Sie sind auf Seite 1von 464

Toromocho EPCM Project

Equipment Tags:
Purchase Order No.

Doc Type

Status Code

Reviewer Eng.

Sequential No.

Aker Solutions Rev No.

Date

NA

06/26/12

Status Code:
1. Reviewed and accepted as final certified. Manufacture may proceed.
2. Reviewed and accepted as noted. Submit certified dwgs. Manufacture may proceed.
3. Reviewed and returned. Correct and resubmit. Manufacture should not proceed.
4. Review not required. For information only. Manufacture may proceed.
Reviewed for general dimensions only. This review does not relieve the vendor of full
responsibility for the adequacy correctness, accuracy and completeness of calculations,
details and dimensions by reviewing these documents.
Aker Solutions does not accept liability for their completeness or accuracy.

INDEX
Item No.

Description

Datasheets (Pump & Motor), Performance Curve

Installation Drawing

Assembly Drawing

Lifting Diagram

ITP

Ultrasonic Flaw Detection Specification For Shaft Parts

Welding Process Specification

Material Report For Main Parts

Ultrasonic Flaw Detection Report

10

Inspection Report For Parts

11

Inspection Record For Assembly

12

Inspection Record For Painting

13

Inspection Record For Packing

14

Hydraulic Pressure Test Report

15

Performance Test Procedure

16

Performance Test Details Sheet

17

Performance Test Report

18

Vibration Report

19

Noise Report

20

Pump IOM

21

Motor IOM

22

Long Term Storage Instructions

23

Spare Parts List for Operation and 1 Year (Un-priced)

24

Pump Lubrication Schedule

25

Motor Lubrication Schedule

26

Packing List

27

Certification of Conformance

28

Motor Wiring Diagram

CERTIFIED FOR
CONSTRUCTION
By: Wang Zhao (Wendy)
Date: 25 October 2010
Mfr:SHIJIAZHUANGKINGDA
PUMP

Inspection & Test Plan


Toromocho Project, PO No.: R05323-P-001A
Shijiazhuang Kingda Pump Industry Group Co., Ltd
Project Doc No.: KD-ITP, Rev.01, Date: 18th October, 2010

Inspection and Test Plan


PO No.: R05323-P-001A, Equipment Name: Hard Metal Slurry Pumps
Supervision
Acceptance

Review

Executive

Contractor

Doc.
Liability

No.

1.1

Test Item

Criteria

Methods

Doc.

Doc.

Time

Management

Acceptance of Contract Documents


Signed Contract and

Check the Contract and

Requirements

Vendors Sales

Requirements

Requirements

by the Contract

Department

Dimensional

Certified Drawings and

Drawings and Document

Drawings submitted

Vendors Sales

Drawings

Documents

Inspection

by Vendor

Department

Contract Inspection

Contractor/Owner

1.2

Owner
Time

Inspection

Signature

Acceptance

Time

Inspection &

Signature

Item

Contractor/Owner

Inspection on Raw Materials and Purchased Parts


JB/T8096-1998
GB9439-1998
(ASTM A48-2003)
GB1348-1998
(ASTM A536-2003)
GB2100-2002

Material Composition

(ASTM A743/743a-1993a)
Inspection

of

raw

Analysis and Mechanical


Visual inspection, Chemical test,

Comply with the

Spectrometer, General gauge

Standards

GB/T8263-1999

2.1
materials

Contractor
After arrival at

Quality Management

Factory

Dept.

Purchase

Prosperities Report,

(ASTM A532M-99)

Product Compliance

GB699-1988

Certificate

Dept.

(ASTM A36/A36M-2005)
SBB121.1-29-1997
SBB125.1-28-1997
SBB302.1-12-2008
SBB0158-2003

2.2

Contract Technical

Visual inspection, check Product

Comply with

Requirements

Compliance Certificate

Contract technical

Bearings

After arrival at

Quality

Contractor

Factory

Management

Purchase

Product Compliance

No. 239, Tianshan Street, Shijiazhuang City, Hebei Province, China


Tel: +86 311 80908109
Fax: +86 311 80908116
Email: w_zhao72@163.com

Inspection & Test Plan


Toromocho Project, PO No.: R05323-P-001A
Shijiazhuang Kingda Pump Industry Group Co., Ltd
Project Doc No.: KD-ITP, Rev.01, Date: 18th October, 2010
requirement
Comply with
2.3

Contract Technical

Visual inspection, check Product

Requirements

Compliance Certificate

WEG Motors

Dept.

Quality

Contractor

Management

Purchase

Dept.

Dept.

Quality

Contractor

Management

Production

Dept.

Dept.

After arrival at
Contract technical

Product Compliance
Factory

requirement
3

Dept.

Inspection and Test in Pump Production Process


SBB139-2001

Material Composition

Inspection Before
3.1
Casting

Comply with the


SBB131-1998

Spectrometer

Analysis and Mechanical

Before Pouring

Standards
Prosperities Report

SBB122-2000
SBB139-2001
SBB122-2000

Spectrometer,

SBB131-1998

Carbon-Sulfur Analyzer,

Material Composition
Comply with the

3.2

Castings

Standards
GB1348-1988

Contractor
After

Quality Management

heat treatment

Dept.

Production

Analysis and Mechanical

Chemical Test, General Gauge

Prosperities Report

Dept.

(ASTM A536-2003)

3.3

Quality

Contractor

Management

Production

Dept.

Dept.

During

Quality

Contractor

Machining

Management

Production

Process

Dept.

Dept.

Quality

Contractor

Management

Production

Dept.

Dept.

Quality

Contractor

Management

Production

Dept.

Dept.

SBB131-1998

Hardness Tester,

Comply with the

Heat Treatment

After

SBB165-2009

Universal Tester

Standards

Report

heat treatment

Heat Treatment

Comply with the


SBB2105-87
Inspection in

General Tools,

Standards and

Machining Dimension

Special Tools

Drawing

Inspection Record

SBB061-2003

3.4
Machining Process

Drawing Requirements
Requirements

Impeller Static
3.5

SBB061-2003

4.1

Shafft Inspection

YB-T036.T-92

Impeller Static Blancing

Static Balance

Standard

Report

Test

Balancing Test Frame

Balancing,

3.6

Comply with the

Comply with the

Shaft Ultrasonics

Shaft Inspection

Standard

Detection Report

Test

Ultrasonic Detection

Assembly, Test, Painting and Packing

Assembly

SBB2103-2000

Comply with the

Clearance Inspection

Standards and

Record in Assembly

General Gauge

Quality

Management

Contractor

After Assembly

No. 239, Tianshan Street, Shijiazhuang City, Hebei Province, China


Tel: +86 311 80908109
Fax: +86 311 80908116
Email: w_zhao72@163.com

Dept.

Production

Inspection & Test Plan


Toromocho Project, PO No.: R05323-P-001A
Shijiazhuang Kingda Pump Industry Group Co., Ltd
Project Doc No.: KD-ITP, Rev.01, Date: 18th October, 2010
Drawing

SBB064-2004

Dept.

Requirements
Drawing Requirements
GB/T5656-94,
Hydraulic
4.2

Contractor
Visual Inspection,

Comply with the

Hydraulic Pressure Test

After Assembly,

Quality Management

Pressure gauge

standards

Report

Witness Point

Dept.

Production

SBB064-1998,
Pressure Test
(HI 1.6-2000/API610)

Dept.

Contract Technical
Requirements
GB3216-2005
(HI 1.6-2000/

Comply with the

ASME B73.1M/B73.2M)

Standards and

Pump Performance

After Assembly,

Quality

JB/T8097-1999

Contract Technical

Running Test Report

Witness Point

Dept.

GB3214-91,

Requirements

Performance
4.3

Contractor

Noise

Management
Production

Pump Test Station

Vibration

Dept.

GB10890,
GB10889
SBB064-2004
Contract Technical

Comply with the


Contractor

4.4

Requirements SBB097-2008

Visual Inspection,

Standards and

Assembly Inspection

SBB0159-1998

Coating Thickness Meter

Contract Technical

Record

Painting

Quality

Management
Production

After Painting
Dept.

Dept.
JB/T4297-1992

Requirements

Contract Technical
Comply with the
Requirements

Contractor
Standards and

4.5

Packing

SBB0157-1997

Assembly Inspection

Visual Inspection

Quality

Contract Technical

Management
Production

After Packing
Dept.

Record

SBB0167-2009

Dept.
Requirements

GB/T13384-1992
5

Relese for Shippment


Release for
Release for

5.1

Contract requirements

As per Contract Requirements

shipment from

Hold Point

shipment
Owner

No. 239, Tianshan Street, Shijiazhuang City, Hebei Province, China


Tel: +86 311 80908109
Fax: +86 311 80908116
Email: w_zhao72@163.com

ULTRASONIC FLAW DETECTION


SPECIFICATION
FOR
SHAFT PARTS

TOROMOCHO PROJECT

Supplier:

SHIJIAZHUANG KINGDA PUMP INDUSTRY GROUP CO., LTD

Reviewed And Approved:

Date:

November, 2011

SHIJIAZHUANG KINGDA PUMP INDUSTRY GROUP CO., LTD


ULTRASONIC FLAW DETECTION SPECIFICATION
Doc No.: WPS-UD-2011, Date: Nov, 2011, Rev 00

GENERAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION


FOR ULTRASONIC FLAW DETECTIOIN FOR SHAFT PARTS
1. General Provision
1.1 Application Scope
This Specification applies for the testing of internal incontinuity of forgings sourced by Kingda by using A
Type Pulse Reflection Ultrasonic Detection method.
This Specification is not applied to work piece of austenite coarse grained.
1.2 Acceptance Standard
GB/T 4162 Forged And Rolled Steel Bars - Method For Ultrasonic Testing
GB/T 7736 Ultrasonic Inspecting Method For Macro-Structure And Imperfection Of Steel
1.3 If special requirements, inspection and acceptance will be carried as per Standards in relative
agreements, drawing and process.
1.4 Requirements for Inspectors
The inspectors should have Ultrasonic Flaw Detection Technology Certification, and the Inspector who will
sign the Report must be qualified for II Grade or Above Certification.
2. Detection Equipment And Instruments
2.1 Ultrasonic Flaw Detector
The ultrasonic flaw detector should be tested for its fuction as per the methods specified in JB/T
10061-1999, and its quota should be meet following:
a). Surplus Sensitivity: N36dB
b). Vertical Linearity Tolerance: D6%
c). Horizontal Linearity Tolerance: 1%
d). Dynamic Range: 30dB.
2.2 Probe
Usually straight beam probe is selected for detection; angle beam probe is selected for assistant detection.
The operation frequency of probe must meet the requirements to penetrate and explore the work piece,
nominal frequency of 2-5MHz is used, and probe crystal diameter or side length is 10-25mm.
2.3 Coupling Medium
Coupling medium whichever can give good coupling effect and is not harmful to body and work piece
should be selected.
The same coupling medium must be used for adjustment, calibration and inspection of equipments.
NO. 239, TIANSHAN STREET, SHIJIAZHUANG CITY, HEBEI PROVINCE, CHINA

SHIJIAZHUANG KINGDA PUMP INDUSTRY GROUP CO., LTD


ULTRASONIC FLAW DETECTION SPECIFICATION
Doc No.: WPS-UD-2011, Date: Nov, 2011, Rev 00

2.4 Test Block


When test forged parts, the test block should be selected according to probe and condition of surface to be
detected, for example, CSI standard test block.
Equipment can also be adjusted according to test block as per GB/T 4162 or GB/T 7736.
3. Detection
3.1 Detection Method
Detection method is generally P-wave reflection, SH-wave reflection can be added if necessary.

A: Necessary detecting direction


B: Detecting direction which needs to be negotiated
Detection At Axial And Circumferential Direction For Shaft Parts
3.2 Detection Time
Usually the detection should be carried after entry of source parts into plant or after heat treatment.
If there any special requirements, the detection should be carried as per special time.
3.3 Detection Procedure
3.3.1 Treatment on Surface of Work Piece
Usually the roughness of surface of work piece should be R06.3m; Roughness may be enlarged for
coarse surface, but not more than 12.5m.
The flaws as mill scale, dirties, paint and pit which can influence the acoustic coupling must be removed or
machined.
3.3.2 Adjustment of Instrument
3.3.2.1 Adjustment of Scan Speed
Generally it is required that forward base of first bottom wave should be not more than 80% of width of
oscilloscope screen in order to observe the situation of other signals after first bottom wave.
3.3.2.2 Adjustment of Sustained Sensitivity
For the work piece with thickness of position tested 3N, bottom wave adjustment method can be used;
For the work piece with thickness of position tested 3N or the surface is very rough, test pad adjustment
NO. 239, TIANSHAN STREET, SHIJIAZHUANG CITY, HEBEI PROVINCE, CHINA

SHIJIAZHUANG KINGDA PUMP INDUSTRY GROUP CO., LTD


ULTRASONIC FLAW DETECTION SPECIFICATION
Doc No.: WPS-UD-2011, Date: Nov, 2011, Rev 00

method can be used.


When the surface shape and roughness of test pad is different from the work piece, coupling compensation
and attenuation compensation methods can be used.
3.3.2.3 Adjustment of Scan Sensitivity
6dB should be amplified based on the inspection sensitivity in order to easily find the defects, but estimation
on the defects should be based on the inspection sensitivity level.
3.4 Inspection Frequency
3.4.1 If no special requirement, the sample test should be made as per SBB302.1-2008.
3.4.2 If any special requirements, the test should be made as per requirements.
3.4.3 For the tested work piece, whole detecting should be made.
3.5 Scan Detection
3.5.1 Scan Type
Usually whole scan should be used.
3.5.2 Scan Speed
In order to ensure the defects can be clearly found, the scan speed should not more than 150mm/s.
3.5.3 Scan Distance
It is required that 15% overlapping should be done between two scans.
3.6 Calibration of Instruments
After detection, the instrument should be calibrated for sensitivity; if the sensitivity can not meet the
requirements, calibration should be done.
4. Estimation of Defects
Usually defects will be estimated according to the reflection and bottom reflection results, including defect
position and size, if necessary, the nature of defects can be estimated.
4.1 Estimation of Defect Position
To determine the surface position of defect according to the probe work position;
To determine he depth of defects according to that tested in oscilloscope screen.
4.2 Estimation of Defect Size
4.2.1 For flat defect of small wafer size, equivalent size of defect should be estimated according to the echo
margin shown in oscilloscope screen.
4.2.2 For flat defect of large wafer size, the length and area of defect should be estimated by 6dB or half
wave height method.
NO. 239, TIANSHAN STREET, SHIJIAZHUANG CITY, HEBEI PROVINCE, CHINA

SHIJIAZHUANG KINGDA PUMP INDUSTRY GROUP CO., LTD


ULTRASONIC FLAW DETECTION SPECIFICATION
Doc No.: WPS-UD-2011, Date: Nov, 2011, Rev 00

4.2.3 For the defect of volume type, circumferential direction detection method can be used.
5. Quality Estimation
Estimation should be made as per GB/T 4162 and GB/T 7736; if any, special requirements can be followed.
After the detection, if disputes, it can be confirmed by low-power etch test.
6. Inspection Record And Report
6.1 Inspection report include: specification, grade, heat number, standard, quality grade and quantity,
issued by who and date, etc.
6.2 Inspection record should include position of defect, size of equivalent, distance and length of defects,
and drop of bottom wave, etc.

NO. 239, TIANSHAN STREET, SHIJIAZHUANG CITY, HEBEI PROVINCE, CHINA

SHIJIAZHUANG KINGDA PUMP INDUSTRY GROUP CO., LTD


WELDING PROCESS SPECIFICATION FOR REPAIR OF CASTINGS
Doc No.: WPS-KD-2011, Date: Oct, 2011, Rev 00

Process Specification of Welding


1. Preparation Before Welding
1.1 Operator must be very well acquainted with the drawings, process specification and relative
documents.
1.2 Operator must carefully check the material grades and dimensions of parts and casting
which are going to be welded.
1.3 Calibers and scales must be marked with inspection certificate. The tools and auxiliary
devices must be reliable.
1.4 The welding machine must be in good condition, grounding and good in insulation.
1.5 Select welding materials as per specification.
1.6 Welding rods must be complete dry, if the rods are wet, make dry treatment as following
table:
Dry Methods for Welding Rod
Type of Rod

Dry Temperature ()

Dry Time (hour)

acid-type

70150

11.5

alkaline-type

250350

12

Note: usually, the acid rod may not be dried before using, the alkaline rod (including S.S. rod) must be dried
treatment before using.

2. Welding
2.1 Clear water, oil stain, rust and burrs within 20mm to 30mm at two sides of weld seam and
bevel before welding.
2.2 For the parts to be beveled, the shape and dimension of bevel should conform to GB985-88
Standard.
2.3 Select welding rod as following Specification Table:
Selection of Welding Rod
Thickness of Welding Part (mm)

Diameter of Rod (mm)

3.2

412

3.24.0

12

4.0

2.4 Welding Current Selection of Common Welding Rod as following:


Reference Current (A)
NO. 239, TIANSHAN STREET, SHIJIAZHUANG CITY, HEBEI PROVINCE, CHINA

SHIJIAZHUANG KINGDA PUMP INDUSTRY GROUP CO., LTD


WELDING PROCESS SPECIFICATION FOR REPAIR OF CASTINGS
Doc No.: WPS-KD-2011, Date: Oct, 2011, Rev 00
Rod Dia.

2.5

3.2

4.0

5.0

E4303

7090

90130

160220

220270

E4303

7090

90130

160190

180230

(mm)
Welding Grade

Note: upper limit for thick plate; the current of horizontal welding is about 10% less than downward welding.

2.5 General Principle for Welding Procedure


2.5.1 It must not produce rigid constraint force against the others of welding seam at the
beginning welding.
2.5.2 One end of each seam should be kept shrink freely at welding.
2.5.3 If the seam length is 1000mm for manual arc welding, generally continuous straight
welding method is used; back-step welding or section back-step welding may be used when
length is 1000mm.
2.6 Generating the arc: it is forbidden to generate the arc on the machined surface and locating
surface; the arc should be generated on the run-on plate and then transit to workpiece.
2.7 Arc Manipulation
2.7.1 Screw type is suitable for the first layer with any welding position and thin plate welding.
2.7.2 Wave type is suitable for the surface welding of downward welding, horizontal welding,
and overhead welding.
2.7.3 8 shape type is suitable for downward and surface welding.
2.7.4 Zigzag type is suitable for horizontal welding.
2.8 Welding: before welding, the current should be regulated on the test plate till the current is
suitable.
2.8.1 Downward welding: the welding seam is at on horizontal level. arc manipulation should be
steady and fully fill the arc crater.
2.8.2 Vertical welding: the welding seam is vertical to the level ground. When vertical welding,
short arc small current should be used, dont swing the rod bigly.
2.8.3 Overhead welding and horizontal welding: welding seam is horizontal or overhead
position. Shortest arc and smallest current should be kept to ensure fused drop transmitted to
metal.
2.9 Correction and Cleaning of Weldment
NO. 239, TIANSHAN STREET, SHIJIAZHUANG CITY, HEBEI PROVINCE, CHINA

SHIJIAZHUANG KINGDA PUMP INDUSTRY GROUP CO., LTD


WELDING PROCESS SPECIFICATION FOR REPAIR OF CASTINGS
Doc No.: WPS-KD-2011, Date: Oct, 2011, Rev 00

2.9.1 Make the correction on the deforms produced in welding with flame correction or
mechanical correction.
2.9.2 Clean spatters, slags and flashes after welding.
2.9.3 The key parts and rigid parts should be distressing tempering treatment after welding.
3. Quality Requirements
3.1 Inspect the weldments for surface appearance and quality as per drawing and specification.
3.2 Welding seam should conform to Welding Seam Quality Standard.

NO. 239, TIANSHAN STREET, SHIJIAZHUANG CITY, HEBEI PROVINCE, CHINA

SHIJIAZHUANG KINGDA PUMP INDUSTRY GROUP CO., LTD


WELDING PROCESS SPECIFICATION FOR REPAIR OF CASTINGS
Doc No.: WPS-KD-2011, Date: Oct, 2011, Rev 00

Process Specification for Weld Repair of Iron Casting


1. Permission Condition for Welding Repair
1.1 When the castings need to be welded repair, it must be approved by Quality Management
Department.
1.2 The permissive condition for the casting welded repair should conform to SBB122 <Pump
Casting Technical Conditions>, drawing and requirements in Contract.
2. Selection of Welding Method
Generally arc welding is used for casting weld repair, arc welding is divided into cold welding
and heat welding.
Application Range: Generally, welding repair will be used at non-machined position which has
low requirement for stress or strength or for defects found in and after machining or fine
machining. Because the correction of heat treatment after weld repair can not be used, in the
condition that its function (quality and precision) will not be influenced by the deformation or
stress caused by partial heating, cold arc welding may be used; when the heating material will
easily crack, heat arc welding can be used.
For iron casting, cold arc welding usually is used.
3.

Preparation before Welding

3.1 Clean up the impurities at defect of casting with shovel, chisel, grinding wheel or other
methods, make it to be V shape with 60-80 or X bevel to expose the metal, sharp angle must
be rounded. All existing web cracks were arrested by drilling 4-8mm holes at the ends of the
cracks.
3.2 Remove the oil dirty at and around the defects with solution or flame.
3.3 Brush muddy water all around defect to avoid weld drop attach the machined surface.
3.4 Use Z308 pure nickel rod (3.2, 4.2), this rod is required to be kept for 1 hour at temperature of
80-120.
3.5 Generally, preheating is not required for cold arc welding; if preheating required, written
approval must be obtained from Quality Department.
4. Welding Repair
4.1 Selection of Rod Diameter and Welding Current
Rod Diameter (mm)

Welding Current (A)

NO. 239, TIANSHAN STREET, SHIJIAZHUANG CITY, HEBEI PROVINCE, CHINA

SHIJIAZHUANG KINGDA PUMP INDUSTRY GROUP CO., LTD


WELDING PROCESS SPECIFICATION FOR REPAIR OF CASTINGS
Doc No.: WPS-KD-2011, Date: Oct, 2011, Rev 00

3.2

70-100

4.2

100-140

4.2 The seams should be successively welded layer by layer. Welding length of single layer is
10-15mm, beat the welding seam with 0.5-1.0 kg hammer to make the seam to be spot shape;
after the temperature of welded position is cooled down to 100, then proceed to welding.
When the welding repair is multi-layer, repeat the operation as single layer welding.
5. Cleaning After Welding
Trim the welding seam on the machined and nonmachined surface with grinding wheel, and
clear the weld drop on the casting and machined surface.
6. Inspection After Welding
6.1 For the requirements of relieving of stress, make inspection after the heat treatment.
6.2 Inspect the grinded effect of welded position to check if it can meet the requirements for
welding repair.
6.3 If the welding position is on non machined surface, check if the welded position is as smooth
as casting itself.
6.4 If the welding position is on the machined surface, check if the welded junction can meet
the requirements of machining.
6.5 Besides required NDT, usually visual inspection is just needed to conform if the weld repairs
meet the quality requirements, defects are left after welding.
6.6 For the casting sustaining the liquid pressure or air pressure, the air tight hydrostatic test
or gas inspection.

NO. 239, TIANSHAN STREET, SHIJIAZHUANG CITY, HEBEI PROVINCE, CHINA


Performance Test Procedure of Centrifugal Pump

1.
2.
3.
1. Preparation before Test
1.1 Define items to be tested;
1.2 Define test criteria and acceptance standard
1.3 Define test field and select test bed

1.
2.
3.
4.
2. Install Pump on Test Bed
2.1 Install pump, motor (if any, gear box), pump intake pipe and discharge pipe;
2.2 Connect pressure gauge, flow meter and electrical meters;
2.3 Connect shaft seal water, cover the motor with water-proof facilities;
2.4 Connect power supply cable with motor, make trial running, and paste
light-sensitive paper for speed.

1.
2.
3.
4.
3. Test
3.1 Start the test, check rise in bearing temperature, leakage of shaft seal, vibration,
and noise;
3.2 Record pressure of suction and discharge, flow rate, current, voltage, power,
speed, etc;
3.3 Draft performance curve;
3.4 Make judgment on the test result.


Test Details Sheet

1 / Pump Details

R05323-P-001A

P.O. No.:

245-PP-008

Equipment No.
1036143-0001-05

Kingda Contract No.

NJA063

Doc. No.
M50KSG-DB/T

Pump Model

2 /Motor Details

WEG

Make

1010566619

Serial No.
444/5T

Motor Model

245-PP-008-M1

Motor No.
55KW

Motor Rating

1785

Motor Speed

3 /Test Details

18:00

Pump Started

19:22

Pump Stopped
50

Bearing Temp.

2011.10.31

Test Date
22

Ambient Temp.

22

Water Temp.

4 /Performance Test Data Tolerance & Standard


/Parameter

/Flow

/Head

/Efficiency

/Standard: ANSI/HI 1.6-B

5 Mechanical Run Tolerance & Standard


5.1 /Vibration

/Standard: JB/T8097-1999
/As per Order Spec.: 85dbA/Max 85

5.2 /Noise Level


dB(A)
/Standard: JB/T8096-1998
5.3 /Rise in Temp. Acceptance
/Measured Temp.

SERIES (M/R) KSH/KSG SLURRY PUMP

INSTALLATION, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE

MANUAL

SHIJIAZHUANG KINGDA PUMP INDUSTRY GROUP CO.,LTD


2010

Series (M/R) KSH/KSG Slurry Pump


Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual
Shijiazhuang Kingda Pump Industry Group Co.,Ltd

Content

1. General Introduction....2

2. Construction.3

3. Installation..6

4. Operation..12

5. Maintenance.17

6. Possible Failures, Cause and Solutions...20

Series (M/R) KSH/KSG Slurry Pump


Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual
Shijiazhuang Kingda Pump Industry Group Co.,Ltd

1. GENERAL INTRODUCTION
Series (M/R) KSH/KSG Pump is also called High Efficiency Slurry Pump. Because these pumps
are fitted with thick wear-resistant parts and heavy frame, so they are suitable to pump the slurry
of highly abrasion, high or low content and high head. During the max permissible working
pressure range, these pumps can be operated in serial. They also can transport the corrosive
slurries.
TYPE DEMONSTRATION:

Frame Type/Lubrication Type


Pump Type
Pump Discharge Diameter. (mm)
Metal Lined/Rubber Lined
Example: M200KSH (/KSG)-FA (/B)
M/R

M for Metal Liner, R for Rubber Liner

200

Discharge Diameter is 200 mm

KSH

Kingda Heavy-duty Slurry Pump

KSG

Kingda High-head Slurry Pump

Frame Type

A/B

A for oil lubrication, B for grease lubrication

Series (M/R) KSH/KSG Slurry Pump


Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual
Shijiazhuang Kingda Pump Industry Group Co.,Ltd

2. CONSTRUCTION
2.1 Pump Head (See Figure 1 and Figure 2)
Both Series (M/R) KSH/KSG metal-lined and rubber-lined pump have construction of
double-casing. They have the replaceable wear-resistant metal liner or rubber liner (including the
impeller, liner, frame plate, etc). Pump casing and cover are made of ductile cast iron; their
construction is vertically split and connected with the bolts. The casing is connected with the
frame with the bolt. When the suction of the pump is installed horizontally, the discharge can be
orientated in any 8 positions at 45 intervals. The front and rear cover plates of impeller have the
back vanes to decrease the leakage and raise the service life of the pumps. Viewing the pump
from the drive side, it should rotate clockwise.

Figure 1 Construction Drawing of MKSH/MKSG (Metal-lined)


Discharge diameter<40mm, open type impeller; Discharge diameter>40mm, enclosed type impeller.
1

Frame

Pump Cover

Cover Plate

Impeller

Liner

Pump Casing

Frame Plate

Packing Box

Series (M/R) KSH/KSG Slurry Pump


Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual
Shijiazhuang Kingda Pump Industry Group Co.,Ltd

Figure 2 Construction Drawing of RKSH/RKSG (Rubber-lined)


Discharge diameter<40mm, open type impeller; Discharge diameter>40mm, enclosed type impeller.
1

Frame

Pump Cover

Cover Plate (R)

Impeller

Cover Liner

Pump Casing

Frame Liner

Packing Box

2.2 Shaft Seal


There three types of shaft seals, packing seal, expeller seal and mechanical seal.
(1) Packing Seal: simple construction and easy maintenance. Shaft seal water is required. For the
condition which does not need the expeller seal, the packing seal can be used.
(2) Expeller Seal: Expeller seal can be used on the single stage pump or the first stage pump in
serial when the suction positive pressure is not more than the discharge pressure by 10%. The
expeller seal does not require the shaft seal water, and the slurry will not be diluted, which can
reach good sealing effect.
(3) Mechanical Seal: Mechanical seal features for highly wear resistant and shock resistance. It
can get non-leak sealing effect under various bad conditions, and be easily installed and

Series (M/R) KSH/KSG Slurry Pump


Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual
Shijiazhuang Kingda Pump Industry Group Co.,Ltd

replaced.
2.3 Transmission Part
During the bearing assembly of (M/R) KSH/KSG Pump, the pump has large diameter, high
stiffness and short cantilever, which will not bend and vibrate under the bad working conditions.
According to the different transmitted power, heavy single-row or double-row tapered roller
bearings can be selected. These bearings can stand the max axial and radial load of the pump. Oil
lubrication is used for the bearing. Seal cover, labyrinth bush, water-proof cover and guard cover
are fitted at the both sides of the bearing body, to prevent the impurities and water from entering
into the bearing and ensure the normal and safe operation of the bearing.

Series (M/R) KSH/KSG Slurry Pump


Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual
Shijiazhuang Kingda Pump Industry Group Co.,Ltd

3. INSTALLATION
3.1 Installation of Bearing Assembly (See Figure 3 and 4)
Heat the bearing inner ring before assembly, the temperature is not allowed to be over 120 and
the inner ring must contact the shaft shoulder closely. For the double row tapered roller bearing,
the inner ring, the outer ring and position bush is a package, not allowed to exchange with the
respective parts of the like bearings. For frame A, B, C, D, E, F, G, the bearing is single row
tapered roller type; when in assembly, adjust the pad at the bearing end cover to ensure the axial
clearance. The axial clearance should be in accordance with the following table:
Frame

FG

Axial Clearance (mm)

0.05-0.15

0.1-0.2

0.15-0.25

0.18-0.28

0.4-0.6

0.5-0.6

For frame R, S, ST, T, TU, U, the bearing at the pump end is double row tapered roller type and
motor end is cylindrical roller bearing, there is no need to adjust the axial clearance for these
bearings.
Proper grease has been filled when assembling the bearing. The seal at the bearing end is
labyrinth ring or bush type; notice the relative arrangement of breach on the diametrical
direction when assembling the labyrinth ring.
Recommend using lithium base grease 2# or 3# and filled quantity as following:
Frame
B

R.

S.

T.

RS

ST

TU

Lubrication
Drive End (g)

30

50

100

200

500

1150

200

500

1150

Driven End (g)

30

50

100

200

500

1150

400

1000

2300

Series (M/R) KSH/KSG Slurry Pump


Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual
Shijiazhuang Kingda Pump Industry Group Co.,Ltd

Figure 3 Constructions Drawing of R, S, ST, TU, T, U Frame Bearing Assembly


1

Labyrinth Bush

Oil Cup

Bearing Body

End Cover

End Cover Seal Pad

Shaft

Figure 4

Bearing

Construction Drawing of A,B,C,D,E,F,G Frame Bearing Assembly

Labyrinth Bush

Oil Cup

Grease Blocker

Bearing Body

Bearing

Adjusting Pad

End Cover

Shaft

3.2 Installation of Shaft Packing Seal


Shaft packing seal assembly includes packing box, shaft sleeve, position bush, seal ring, packing,
packing pad, lantern ring, front lantern ring and packing gland. Packing seal assembly is divided
into lantern ring structure and front lantern ring structure. Front lantern ring structure is the
standard-installed type, and you can see Figure 5 (1) and Figure 5 (2) for the installation drawing.
Lantern ring structure should be used for the condition of suction, for example of installation way
7

Series (M/R) KSH/KSG Slurry Pump


Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual
Shijiazhuang Kingda Pump Industry Group Co.,Ltd

in Figure 6 (1) and (2). Take notice that the seal ring must be in the right position between shaft
sleeve and position bush, and the shaft sleeve and impeller.
Figure 5 (1) and Figure 6 (1) are the construction drawing for the pump of discharge diameter
less than 150mm;
Figure 5 (2) and Figure 6 (2) are the construction drawing for the pump of discharge diameter
more than 500mm.
Selection of the packing: when the working pressure of the pump is below 1MPa (10kgf/cm2),
asbestos fibers dip mica packing is usually used; asbestos fibers soaked PTFE packing is usually
used when the pressure is higher than 1MPa (10kgf/cm2) or pumping the corrosive slurry.

Figure 5(1) Packing Seal Construction

Figure 6(1) Packing Seal Construction

Standard Type

For Suction-Up Condition

Shaft Sleeve

Packing

Shaft Sleeve

Packing

Packing Box

Front Lantern Ring

Packing Box

Lantern Ring

Seal Ring

Locating Bush

Seal Ring

Locating Bush

Packing Pad

Series (M/R) KSH/KSG Slurry Pump


Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual
Shijiazhuang Kingda Pump Industry Group Co.,Ltd

Figure 5(2) Packing Seal Construction

Figure 6(2) Packing Seal Construction

Standard Type

For Suction-Up Condition

Shaft Sleeve

Packing

Shaft Sleeve

Packing

Packing Box

Front Lantern Ring

Packing Box

Lantern Ring

Packing Pad

3.3 Installation of Expeller Seal


Expeller seal assembly includes expeller, release cover shaft sleeve, lantern ring, packing pad,
packing, packing gland, etc. Every part must be installed at right position as in Figure 7.

Figure 7 Seal Construction of Expeller


1

Packing Gland

Release Cover

Expeller

Shaft Sleeve

Series (M/R) KSH/KSG Slurry Pump


Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual
Shijiazhuang Kingda Pump Industry Group Co.,Ltd
5

Seal Ring

Packing

Lantern Ring

Packing Pad

3.4 Installation of Mechanical Seal


Mechanical seal assembly includes Cartridge type mechanical seal, seal box, seal ring, etc.
Strictly install the mechanical seal according to the Manual. See Figure 8 for construction.

Figure 8 Construction of Mechanical Seal


1

Seal Box

Seal Ring

Mechanical Seal

3.5 Installation of Pump Head


Firstly fit the pump body on the frame, then put the shaft seal assembly into the pump body; fit
the rear guard plate and impeller with rear hanging pipe and rear set nut; fit the liner with the
hanging beam and use the bolts to press the liner against the pump body; fit the front guard the
plate into the pump cover, bolt the pump cover, front plate together with the pump body and
fasten all the bolts and nuts. For rubber liner pump, the front liner should be firstly put into the
pump cover and fasten the bolts, then assembly the pump body and pump cover; coat the soapy
water and rubber lubricant at the contact surface for the easy assembly; take notice that the seal
pads should be put at the right position and compressed; to assure the correct position and easy
assembly, the rear guard plate and rear liner hang pipe *302, rear guard plate and rear liner
position nut *302 and liner hanging beam *304 can be used. Following Figures show the
10

Series (M/R) KSH/KSG Slurry Pump


Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual
Shijiazhuang Kingda Pump Industry Group Co.,Ltd

methods.
The pump with ST, T and TU has release ring; before dismantling, the three hex bolts should be
removed and screw them into thither bolt hole on the release ring to jack the three pressure pad
on the shaft to loose the impeller.

Figure 9
1. Rear Guard Plate and Rear Liner Hang Pipe x302
2. Rear Guard Plate and Rear Liner Setting Nut x303
3. Liner Hang Beam x304

11

Series (M/R) KSH/KSG Slurry Pump


Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual
Shijiazhuang Kingda Pump Industry Group Co.,Ltd

4. OPERATION
4.1 Startup
Check the whole machine unit as following procedure before start up:
(1): The pump should be installed on the solid base to bear the whole pump weight to absorb the
vibration and fasten all the foundation bolts.
(2): The pipeline and valves should be separately supported. There is seal pad at the pump flange.
Notice that the pump metal liner may be higher than flange surface when fastening the bolts, and
the bolts should be not over-fastened to avoid damaging the seal pad.
(3): Rotate the pump shaft in accordance with the pump rotation direction, the shaft should drive
the impeller without the friction; if not, the impeller clearance should be adjusted.
(4): Check the motor rotation direction to make sure it can drive the pump rotate toward the
arrow. Reverse rotation may cause the impeller screw stripped and damage the pump, so its
forbidden.
(5): For direct coupling drive, the pump shaft and motor shaft should be strictly centered. The
pump shaft and motor shaft should be in parallel for the belt transmission and adjust the pulley
position to make it vertical to the belt. For the pulley unit of SPA Type and
and

SPB
SPC

SPA
SPB

Type, SPB Type

Type, the adjustment of the pulley should reach the requirements of 1=2 in Figure 10.

(6): A short removable pipe should be fit at the suction of the pump, its length is enough to
disassemble the pump cover, replace the wearing parts and inspect the pump. See the Outline
Dimensional Drawing for the length of this short pipe.
(7): Check shaft seal: for the pumps of expeller seal, when the oil cup is fit with the release gland,
the lubricating grease should be filled through the oil cup; and Sodium-calcium grease is

12

Series (M/R) KSH/KSG Slurry Pump


Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual
Shijiazhuang Kingda Pump Industry Group Co.,Ltd

recommended.
For the pumps of packing seal, firstly turn on the shaft sealing water system to check if the water
quantity and pressure is proper before the startup of the pump; adjust the packing gland set
screw to regulate the tension of the packing; adjust shaft seal water (that the leak quantity at the
packing gland is drop by drop); if too tight, the shaft sleeve will heat easily and power will be
consumed more; if too loose, the leak quantity will be very large. The shaft seal water pressure
usually is higher than pump discharge pressure by 3.5X10-2MPa (0.35kgf/cm2). See following
table for shaft seal water quantity:
Frame Type

E.F

R.RS

S.ST

T.TU

Shaft Seal Water Quantity (L/s)

0.15

0.25

0.35

0.55

0.70

1.2

0.70

1.2

1.6

2.1

(8) Adjustment for the Belt Pretightening Force


We recommend following method for reference:
(8.1) First calculate thee pretightening force Q:
Q=

510(2.5 C 1 ) P C 2
+ mv 2 (Newton)
C1 Z V

(8.2) Then find the e value on the curve according to the pretightening force and belt type;
e . L
(8.3) Find f through formula f=100 ;

(8.4) Find R value of respective V-belt in Table 1, and adjust the center distance of both pulleys
according to the methods in Figure 11 to reach the required pretightening force. Usually, if the
overall reduction is no more than f when loading the Newton force, it reaches the required
pretightening force Q.
In the formula:
Q: the minimum pretightening force of each belt in the static state, unit is Newton;
13

Series (M/R) KSH/KSG Slurry Pump


Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual
Shijiazhuang Kingda Pump Industry Group Co.,Ltd

f:

Overall reduction of belt, unit is mm

C1: Angle coefficient is about 0.9


C2: Operation coefficient is about 1.4
L: Center distance of pulleys
P: Motor Rated Power, KW
Z: V-Belt Quantity
V: linear velocity, m/s
m: Centrifugal force coefficient (see Figure 1)
e: Reduction e of each 100mm hang length, see Figure 11.
Table 1
Type

SPA

SPB

SPC

SPZ

R (N)

60

90

120

30

0.12

0.20

0.38

0.08

Adjust the V-belt till the final pretightening force is the minimum when the load is at max; when
several belts are used at the same time, the circumference of each belt should be basically the
same to assure the equal force.

Figure 10

14

Series (M/R) KSH/KSG Slurry Pump


Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual
Shijiazhuang Kingda Pump Industry Group Co.,Ltd

Figure 11

After adjustment of the V-belt, check if the impeller can rotate normally again; if possible, start
the pump with clear water (before it begins to pump the slurry); turn on the suction pipe valve,
start the motor, check the pressure and flow quantity at the suction and discharge, check the
leakage at the packing. If the packing heats, loose the packing gland bolts to make the leakage
bigger; adjust the leakage to the specified value till the packing run-in with the shaft.
4.2 Operation
(1): Periodically check the pressure and flow quantity of shaft seal water, and adjust the packing
gland and replace the packing during the operation to assure small quantity of clean water
passing through the shaft.

15

Series (M/R) KSH/KSG Slurry Pump


Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual
Shijiazhuang Kingda Pump Industry Group Co.,Ltd

(2): Periodically check the frame. If the bearing heats at the beginning of the operation, shut
down the pump till the bearing become cool, then run it. If the bearing heats seriously and
temperature keep rising, the frame must be disassembled and examined for the cause. Usually
the impurity contained in the lubricating oil can cause the heating, so the bearing oil should be
proper and clean, and replaced periodically.
(3): The pump performance will become poorer and the efficiency will become lower with the
larger and larger clearance between impeller and front guard plate. So adjust the impeller timely
to keep the proper clearance to make the pump run in high efficiency. When the wear situation of
the pump is too bad to meet the requirements of the system, the wear parts should be replaced.
4.3 Shutdown of Pump
Let the pump to transport the clear water for some before the shutdown to clean the slurry left
inside the pump, then stop the pump, valve, packing seal water or mechanical seal water in order.

16

Series (M/R) KSH/KSG Slurry Pump


Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual
Shijiazhuang Kingda Pump Industry Group Co.,Ltd

5. MAINTENANCE
For the safe run of pump, attention must be paid to the normal maintenance as following aspects:
5.1 Maintenance of shaft seal:
For the packing seal pump, periodically check the water pressure and water quantity of shaft
packing seal. Always keep small quantity of clear water flow along with the shaft, periodically
adjust the packing gland, check and replace the packing. The shaft seal water pressure and
quantity should in accordance with the above requirements. Periodically fill the oil into the oil cup
for the expeller seal pump to lubricate the inside packing.
5.2 Adjustment of impeller:
To assure the high-efficiency of the pump, the clearance between the impeller and the front guard
plate; the clearance between impeller and front guard plate of metal liner pump should be
0.5-1mm, the clearance between the impeller and front liner should be equal to that between
impeller and rear liner.
Before adjusting the clearance, the pump should be stopped firstly, then loose the bolts of
bearing assembly and screw the nut of adjusting bolts to make the bearing assembly move
forward, at the same time, rotate the pump as per the arrow by hands till the impeller friction
with the front guard plate; for the metal liner pump, loose the nut (which was fastened) by half
circle, then fasten the nut on the adjusting bolt to make the bearing assembly move backward,
the clearance between the impeller and front guard plate should be 0.5-1mm; for the rubber liner
pump, adjust the nut of the adjusting bolts to make the bearing assembly to move forward to
contact with the front guard sleeve, then move the bearing assembly back to contact with the
back liner, and measure the total movement distance, make the half of this distance as the

17

Series (M/R) KSH/KSG Slurry Pump


Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual
Shijiazhuang Kingda Pump Industry Group Co.,Ltd

clearance of the impeller and front liner; assure the correct clearance of impeller and front and
back liner by adjusting bearing assembly position through the adjusting bolts.
After the adjustment, check if the impeller can rotate normally before startup, if bearing
assembly compress bolts and adjusting bolts are tightened; then start the pump.
5.3 Lubricating of Bearing
Correct assembly, proper lubricating and in-time maintenance will make the service life of
bearing assembly longer. Periodically check the bearing assembly, bearing and lubricant and
interval should not be over than 12 month. Fill the lubricating grease at regular intervals in
operation, the filling interval and filling quantity are relative to the pump speed, bearing size,
continuous operation time, shutdown and startup times, environmental condition and
temperatures; excess grease will cause the heating of bearing. Refer to following table for proper
lubricating schedule:
5.4 Standby pump should be rotated by 1/4 circle by hands to make the bearing stand static load
and vibration evenly

18

Series (M/R) KSH/KSG Slurry Pump


Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual
Shijiazhuang Kingda Pump Industry Group Co.,Ltd

Lubrication Schedule (in hours)

Frame

Grease

Type

Quantity

12

18

28

44

71

Bearing Speed

200

7000

300

400

600

(rpm)

800

1000

1200

1800

2000

3000

2400

1800

1500

1000

3600

2400

1800

1600

1200

900

2500

2000

1500

1200

800

500

500

5000

3600

2200

1600

1100

800

4200

2000

1800

1200

700

400

3000

2000

1400

1000

600

3800

28000

1500

900

500

300

400

R.RS

102

S.ST

132

T.TU

304

4800

3000

1800

900

621

4000

2400

1500

500

R.RS

61

8000

4800

3500

2800

2200

Motor

S.ST

74

8000

6000

3600

2400

1600

1200

End

T.TU

133

8000

7000

4500

2500

1500

192

7000

6000

4000

2000

400

100

1500

900

Pump

End

Note: Above Schedule is only applied for the normal working condition.
During the bearing assembly, the internal plug is to fill the bearing grease, and the external oil
cup is to clean the labyrinth seal. Besides the regular filling of grease, its also to fill the grease to
the oil cup to keep the labyrinth seal clean.

19

Series (M/R) KSH/KSG Slurry Pump


Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual
Shijiazhuang Kingda Pump Industry Group Co.,Ltd

6. POSSIBLE FAILURES, CAUSE AND SOLUTIONS


Failure

Cause

Solutions

Leak at the suction pipe or packing

Block the leak

Wrong rotation direction

Change the rotation direction

Impeller is broken

Replace the new impeller

Suction pipe is blocked

Remove the block

Packing gland is to tight and packing heats

Loose the packing gland bolts

Friction inside the pump

Adjust the clearance

Bearing is broken

Replace the bearing

Transmission belt is too tight

Adjust the belt

Too large flow quantity

Adjust the pump running conditions

High rotation speed, large proportion

Adjust the rotation and proportion

Misalignment or nonparallel of motor shaft and

Adjust the motor shaft and pump shaft

h f
Excessive or too little of bearing lubricating oil

Oil

Impurities is contained in the lubricating oil

Replace the new lubricating oil

Bearing is broken

Replace the new bearing

Misalignment or nonparallel of motor shaft and

Adjust the motor shaft and pump shaft

h f
Shaft is bent

Replace a new shaft

Friction inside the pump or the imbalance of

Decrease the friction and replace a new

ll
Foreign matter inside the bearing

ll
Clean the bearing

Unreasonable assembly of bearing

Replace the bearing or reassemble the

Serious abrasion of packing

b
Replace the new packing

Serious abrasion of shaft sleeve

Replace the new shaft sleeve

Seal water is not clean

Replace the clean seal water

Bearing is broken

Change new bearing

Impeller is not in balance

Change new impeller

Air entered into suction pipe, block

Remove the air and block

Uneven flow, pump empty

Improve the feeding condition

Bad foundation

Strength the foundation

Not pump the liquid

Shaft Power is to high

Overheat of bearing

Service life of bearing is short

Serious leakage at the packing

Abnormal noise and excessive vibration


of pump

quantity

should

be

as

per

20

WEG EXPORTADORA S.A.


Av. Prefeito Waldemar Grubba, 3000
89256-900 - Jaragua do Sul - SC - BRAZIL
Phone 55 (47) 3372-4000 - Fax 55 (47) 3372-4060
http://www.weg.com.br

0280.1515/03.2006

Transforming Energy
into Solutions

INSTALLATION,
OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
FOR INDUCTION
MOTORS
Frame sizes 143/5T to 586/7

THIS MANUAL IS INTENDED TO SUPPLY IMPORTANT


TOPICS THAT MUST BE FOLLOWED DURING
TRANSPORTATION, INSTALLATION, OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE OF WEG MOTORS. THEREFORE, WE
RECOMMEND READING CAREFULLY THIS MANUAL
BEFORE INSTALLING AND OPERATING THE MOTOR.
TO ENSURE PHYSICAL INTEGRITY TO THE
OPERATION AND MATERIAL PROTECTION, ALL
INFORMATION INCLUDED IN THIS MANUAL MUST
BE STRICTLY FOLLOWED.

Purchasing date:

Suppliers name

INDEX
1.
2.
3.
4.

5.

6.
7.

8.

9.

HANDLI NG AND TRANSPORTATION


RECEIVING INSPECTION
STORAGE
INSTALLATION
4.1 - Safety
4.2 - Operating Conditions
4.3 - Foundation
4.4 - Drain Holes
4.5 - Balance
4.6 - Alignment
4.7 - Couplings
4.8 - Electrical Connection
4.9 - Starting Methods
4.10 - Protection Device
4.11 - Start-Up
MAINTENANCE
5.1 - Lubrication
5.1.1 - Machines without Grease Nipples
5.1.2 - Machines Fitted with Grease Fitting
5.1.3 - Compatibility of MOBIL Polirex EM
grease with other types of grease
5.2 - Assembly and Disassembly
SPARE PARTS
VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE MOTORS
7.1 - Standard Motors
7.2 - Inverter Duty Motors
7.3 - Bearing Insulation
ADDITIONAL INSTRUCTIONS
8.1 - Hazardous Area Motors
8.1.1 - General
8.1.2 - Installation
8.1.3 - Checking and maintenance
8.1.4 - Explosion Proof Motor Repairs
WARRANTY TERMS

Invoice/Order number:

Customers name and phone:

Failure description:

Fecha de compra:
1 - HANDLING AND TRANSPORTATION

MOTORS MUST NOT BE LIFTED BY THE SHAFT,


BUT BY THE EYEBOLTS SPECIFIC FOR SUCH
PURPOSE

Nombre del proveedor:


Lifting devices, when supplied, are designed only to support
the motor. If themotor has two lifting devices then a double chain
must be used to lift it.
Lifting and lowering must be done gently without any shocks, to
avoid bearing damaged.
Nmero de la factura o pedido:

Nombre y nmero telefnico del cliente:

DURING TRANSPORTATION, MOTORS FITTED


WITH ROLLER OR ANGULAR CONTACT
BEARINGS ARE PROTECTED AGAINST BEARING
DAMAGES WITH A SHAFT LOCKING DEVICE

THIS LOCKING DEVICE MUST BE USED ON ANY


FURTHER MOTOR TRANSPORTATION, EVEN
WHEN THIS MEANS TO UNCOUPLE THE MOTOR
FROM THE DRIVEN MACHINE

2. RECEIVING INSPECTION
When receiving the motor, check if any damage has occurred
during transportation.

Descripcin de la falla:

If anything has been noticed, notify immediately the carrier, the


insurance company and WEG.
Failure in giving notice to the carrier, to the insurance company
and to WEG may result in loosing product warranty.
Do not remove the existing protecting grease from the shaft end,
nor the stoppers or plugs that close the terminal box holes, if any.
These protection items must be kept in place until the final
installation has been concluded.
After being removed from the package, a complete visual
inspection on the motor should be made:

Check if any damage has occured during transportation.


Check nameplate data.
Rotate shaft with the hand to make sure it is running freely.
Make sure the motor was not exposed to excessive dirt and
moisture during transportation and storage.
3 - STORAGE
If motors are not immediately installed, they must be stored in
dry areas, free of dust, vibrations, gases, corrosive smokes, under
constant temperature and in normal position free from other
materials.
Motor storage temperature must remain between 41F (5C) to
140F (60C), with relative humidity not exceeding 50%.
If motors are stored for more than two years, bearings must be
replaced or the lubrication grease must be totally removed after
cleaning.
Single-phase motors when kept in stock for 2 years or more
must have their capacitors replaced (if any).
WEG recommends to rotate the shaft (by hands) at least once a
month, and to measure the insulation resistance before installing
it, if motors are stored for more than 6 months or when subject
to high humidity areas.
If motor is fitted with space heaters, it is recommended to switch
them on during storage period if the relative humidity exceeds
50%.
If motor remains in stock for a long period without having the
space heaters switched-on or when installed but not in operation,
moisture/water inside the motor may condense. On these cases,
water must be drained by removing the threaded drain plugs.
When drainage is done, switch-on the space heaters and make
sure the motor is completely dry,then reinstall the drain plugs to
ensure proper Degree of Protection (see figure 1).
The space heaters should NEVER be energized while motor is
running.

9. TERMINOS DE GARANTIA
WEG ofrece garanta contra defectos de fabricacin o de
materiales para sus productos, por un perodo de 18 meses,
contados a partir de la fecha de la emisin de la factura por
parte de fb rica o del distribuidor/revendedor, teniendo como
lmite 24 meses de la fecha de fabricacin independiente de
la fecha de instala cin del motor, siempre y cuando hayan
sido satisfechos los siguientes requisitos:
- Transporte, manoseo y almacenamiento adecuados;
- Instalacin correcta y en condiciones ambientales
especficas y sin presencia de ga ses corrosivos;
- Operacin dentro de los lmites de la capacidad del motor;
- Realizacin peridica del debido mantenimiento preventivo;
- Realizacin de reparaciones y/o modificaciones al producto
original efectuada solo por los agentes autorizados de la Red
de Asistencia Tcnica WEG;
- Entregar el producto a l proveedor en el caso de ocurrir una
falla con reclamacin de garanta en un perodo mnimo
suficiente para identificar la causa de la anomala y su
conveniente reparacin;
- Dar aviso inmediato a WEG, por parte del cliente, de los
defectos detec tados y que los mismos sean posteriormente
analizados por WEG como causados por defectos de
fabricacin.
La garant a no incluye los servicios de desmontaje d el motor
en las instalaciones del cliente, costos de transporte del
producto y gastos de traslado, alojamiento y alimentacin del
personal de Asistencia Tcnica cuand o sean solicitados por
el cliente.
Los servicios en garanta sern prestados exclusivamente en
talleres de Asistencia Tcnica Autorizada WEG o en la propia
fbrica.
Se excluyen de esta garanta los componentes cuya vida til,
en uso normal, sea inferior al perodo de garanta otorgado
por WEG las reparaciones o substituc iones de piezas o
product os, a criterio de WEG o su Asistencia Tcnica
Autorizada, no prorrogar el plazo de garanta original.
La presente garanta se limita al producto entregado, no siendo
responsable WEG por daos a personas, a terceros, a otros
equipos e instalaciones, utilidades que se dejen de obtener
o cualquier otro dao emergente o consecuente.

P Las superficies de encaje de los motores a prueba de explosin


no deben ser mecanizadas y no es permitido utilizar entre ellas
ningn tipo de vedamiento, no descrito o suministrado por el
fabricante. Los encajes deben ser solamente limpios y para evitar
corrosin o penetracin de agua, los encajes pueden ser
engrasados con una fina manta de grasa de silicona.
P Verificar si los componentes estn exentos de rebabas, golpes
y suciedad.
P Observar si las piezas estn en perfectas condiciones.
P Lubricar superficialmente las guas de las tapas con aceite
protector para facilitar el montaje.
P Utilizar solamente martillo de material blando en la colocacin
de las piezas.
P Verificar si todos los tornillos estn bien apretados.
P Utilizar sonda calibrada para verificar asiento de la caja de
conexiones (menor de 0,05mm).

8.1.4 Reparos De Motores A Prueba De Explosin


Figure 1
El reparo de repuestos, directamente involucrados en la
proteccin contra riesgo de una explosin, debe ser realizado
sin cualquier modificacin al diseo original del motor.

Insulation Resistance Checking

Despus del reparo, estos repuestos deben ser chequeados y


cuando concluido, el taller de asistencia tcnica debe hacer una
declaracin de todas las operaciones realizadas en el motor
especfico.

Disconnect motor from power supply before making any


insulation resistance measurement.
To avoid electric discharge risks, discharge the terminals right
after performing the measurement.

Para maiores informaciones, en Mxico favor comunicarse a:

Measure the insulation resistance before operating the motor


and/or when there is any sign of moisture in the winding.
The resistance measured at 77F (25C) must be:

WEG Mxico, S.A de C.V.


Carretera Jorobas-Tula Km 3.5,
Mz.5, Lote 1, entre Lote 4 y 5
Fracc. Parque Indistrial Huehuetoca,
Huehuetoca Estado de Mx., C.P 54680
Tel: (55) 5321-4243 y 61; Fax: (55) 5321-4262 y 94
e-mail: wegmex@weg.com.mx

Ri (20 x U) / (1000 + 2P) [M]


(measured with a MEGGER at 500 V d.c.)
where U = voltage (V); P = power (kW).
If the insulation resistance detected is less than 2 mega ohms, the
winding must be dried according to the following procedure:
Warm it up in an oven at a minimum temperature of 176F (80C)
increasing 41F (5C) every hour until reaching 105C (221F),
remaining under this temperature for at lea st one hour.

Check if the stator insulation resistance remains constant within


accepted values. If not, stator must be reimpregnated. If necessary,
replace bearings and seals.
Note:
1) All drains (if any) must be removed while drying.
2 - Measured the insulation resistance in ambient temperature. If
different than 25C it should be corrected using the following
formula:
R(25C) = [( K+25 ) / ( K + T a )] . R (Ta)
Where:
R(25C) insulation resistance related to 25C ambient temperature
K
constant value 234.5 for copper
Ta ambient temperature where the resistance was measured
R(Ta) resistance value measured in ambient temperature Ta

4. INSTALLATION
4.1 - Safety
All personnel involved with electrical installations, either
handling, lifting, operation, start up, maintenance or repair must
be well informed and updated concerning safety standards and
principles that govern the work and carefully follow them.
For practical reasons, it is not possible to include in this Manual
detailed informati on that covers all constructive variables, nor
covering all possible assembl y, operation or maintenance
alternatives.
For this reason, the present Manual only includes required
information that allows qualified and trained personnel to carry
out the work.
If you still have further doubts about this, specially in reference
to specific product information, WEG is willing to provide such
information via its network of authorized service agents and/or
distributors.
In order to allow WEG to provide prompt service, within technical
standards, the motor serial number that is available on the
identification nameplate should be supplied.
Use always appropriate tools for installation and removal.

I
I

LA INSTALACION DE MOTORES PARA AMBIENTES


PELIGROSOS DEBE SER EJECUTADA POR
PERSONAL ESPECIALIZADO
LA ESPECIFICACION DEL LOCAL DE
INSTALACION ES DE RESPONSABILIDAD DEL
CLIENTE, QUE TAMBIEN DETERMINARA LAS
CARACTERISTICAS AMBIENTALES

Cuando se utiliza el prensa cables en la entrada de los cables, lo


mismo debe ser apropiado para el motor y para el tipo de terminal,
el prensa cables debe ser montado, completamente apretado de
manera a adquirir la presin necesaria arriba de los anillos de
vedamiento, bien como:
Evitar la transmisin de vibraciones mecnicas para los
terminales del m otor.
Garantizar la proteccin mecnica IP para la caja de
conexiones.
8.1.3 Chequeo y Mantenimiento
El mantenimiento debe ser ejecutado por talleres tcnicos
autorizados y acreditados por WEG.
Talleres y personal si n autorizacin que realicen reparacin en
los motores para ambientes peligrosos, sern totalmente
responsables por el trabajo ejecutado y los daos ocurridos en
su servicio.
En la ejecucin del mantenimiento, instalacin y relubricacin, se
deben seguir las siguientes orientaciones:
Las conexiones deben estar correctamente cerradas para evitar
elevacin de resistencia, consecuentemente sobrecalentamiento
del contacto
Aislamiento distancia-aire y distancia-superficie entre los
conductores, requeridos por las normas, deben ser respectados
Todos tornillos utilizados en el montaje de las partes del motor
y caja de conexin, deben ser completamente apretados
Vedamientos y repuestos para entrada de los cables sern
hechos utilizando materiales suministrados por el fabricante, de
manera a garantizar el tipo de proteccin original

7.3 Aislamiento del rodamiento


Los motores Inverter Duty en las carcasas 504/5T y 586/7T* son
suministrados con sistema de puesta a tierra entre el eje y la carcasa
en el lado delantero. Tambin, bajo pedido puede ser suministrado
con rodamientos aislados.
Para otras lneas, en las carcasas 504/5T y 586/7T* cuando usados
con convertidor de frecuencia es necesario sistema de puesta a
tierra entre el eje y la carcasa o rodamientos aislados.
* Otros tamaos de carcasas, bajo consulta.
8 INSTRUCCIONES ADICIONALES

8.1 Motores Para Areas de Riesgo

8.1.1 General
Adems de las recomendaciones arriba, las siguientes tambin
deben ser observadas:
Motores para reas de riesgo son fabricados de acuerdo con
normas especficas para estos ambientes.
Motores suministrados para reas de riesgo (reas clasificadas)
deben ser instalados en rea que estn de acuerdo con las
especificadas en la tarjeta de identificacin del motor.
Notas:
Motores Divisin I son tambin adecuados para la Divisin II
Motores de una especificada clase de temperatura son tambin
adecuados para ambientes con combustible de una clase de
temperatura mayor (ejemplo, motores T4 son adecuados para
ambientes de clase T3, T2, T1).
8.1.2 Instalacin
La instalacin debe seguir procedimientos elaborados por la
legislacin local vigente.

MAKE SURE THAT ELECTRIC MOTORS ARE SWITCHED


OFF BEFORE STARTING ANY MAINTENANCE SERVICE

All rotating parts such as pulleys, couplings, outside fans, shaft,


etc. must be protected against accidental contact.
Motors must be protected against unexpected starts.
When performing any maintenance service, disconnect the motor
from the power supply. Make sure all accessories have been
switched off and disconnected.
In order to prevent from penetrating dust and/or water into the
terminal box, cable glands or threaded pipe in the lead holes
passage must be installed. They must be of equal or higher IP
rating than the motor.

LEAD CONNECTION INSULATION INSIDE THE


TERMINAL BOX MUST BE DONE WITH AN INSULATING
MATERIAL COMPATIBLE WITH MOTOR THERMAL
CLASS WHICH IS SHOWN ON THE MOTOR
NAMEPLATE

If installation and safety instructions are not followed accordingly,


warranty may be void.
4.2 - Operating Conditions
In general electric motors are designed for operation up to an
altitude of 1000m above sea level for an ambient temperature
ranging from -4F (-20C) to 104F (40C). Any variation is stated
on the nameplate.
The recommended installation distance between air inlet from
the motor and the wall should be at least of the air inlet diameter.
A person should have enough room to carry out cleaning services.
Machines that are cooled with ambient a ir, air inlet screens must
be cleaned at regular intervals so as to ensure free air circulation.
Warm air can not return to the motor.
For vertically mounted motors with air inlet on top, the air
opening must be protected by a proper cover so as to avoid
dropping of foreign materials on the motors.
Considering that direct sun heat causes increase in
temperature, externally installed motors should be always
protected against weathering.

ODP MOTORS Open motors (IP21, IP23) are machines designed


for operation in clean, dry areas, with enough air circulation for
proper cooling. These motors should never be used in areas with
flammable materials. Open motors may cause sparks and release
cast particles under any eventual insulation failure (short-circuit).
TEFC MOTORS Totally enclosed motors are machines suitable to
operate in areas with moisture, dirt and/or corrosive materials either
in enclosed or open environments.

4.3 - Foundation
Motors provided with feet must be installed on solid foundations
to avoid excessive vibrations.
All motors must be fully fixed and aligned.
The purchaser is fully responsible for the foundation.
Metal parts must be painted to avoid corrosion.
The foundation must be uniform and sufficiently strong to support
any shock. It must be designed in such a way to stop any vibration
originated from resonance.

EL NO CUMPLIMIENTO DE ESTAS
RECOMENDACIONES Y CRITERIOS CAUSA LA
PERDIDA DE GARANTIA DEL MOTOR

7.2 Motores Inverter Duty


Motores con tensiones superiores a 575V e igual o menor que
690V y alimentados por convertidor de frecuencia no necesitan
filtros caso sigan las especificaciones abajo:
Informado por el fabricante del convertidor.

COMPARE THE CURRENT, VOLTAGE, FREQUENCY,


SPEED, OUTPUT AND OTHER VALUES REQUIRED BY
THE APPLICATION WITH MOTOR NAMEPLATE
INFORMATION

Observar tensin de
alimentacin del conjunto
ventilacin forzada.

(*)

Note: Considering that rotation direction is important for correct


operation, then check it carefully before connecting motor to the
load.
4.4 - Drain Holes
Make sure drains are placed at the lower motor position when the
mounting configuration differs from that specified on the motor
purchase o rder.

4.5 Balance

WHEN SPECIAL BALANCE IS REQUIRED,


CONTACT THE FACTORY

EL NO CUMPLIMIENTO
DE ESTAS
RECOMENDACIONES Y
CRITERIOS CAUSA LA
PERDIDA DE GARANTIA
DEL MOTOR

Favor informar tambin el nmero de serie del motor de la


tarjeta de identificacin.
7 MOTORES PARA USO CON CONVERTIDOR DE FRECUENCIA

All motors are dynamically balanced at the factory with half key.
Transmission elements such as pulleys, couplings etc must be
dynamically balanced with half key before installation.

7.1 Lnea de motores Standard


Always use appropriate tools for installation and removal.
Motores con tensiones hasta 575V y accionados por
Convertidor de Frecuencia no requieren filtros cuando
adoptados los criterios a seguir:
Notas:

(*)

Informado por el fabricante del convertidor.

1) Trajeta de
identificacin
mostrando tensin
380-415V / 660-690V 50Hz y 440-460V - 60Hz
y alimentados por
convertidor en tensin
660-690V - 50Hz o 480V
- 60Hz requiere el uso
de filtros.
2) Motores en las
carcasas 504/5T y 586/
7T* cuando usados
con converti dor,
necesitan uso de
rodamientos aislados.

4.6 Alignment

ALIGN THE SHAFT ENDS AND USE FLEXIBLE


COUPLING, WHENEVER POSSIBLE

Make sure that the motor mounting devices do not allow


modifications on the alignment and further damages to the
bearings.
When assembling a half-coupling, make sure to use suitable
equipment and tools to protect the bearings.
Suitable assembly of half-coupling:
Specially in cases of direct couplings, motor shaft must be
aligned axially and radially with the driven machine shaft.
Incorrect alignment can lead to bearing damage, vibrations or
even cause shaft rupture.
Correct alignment can be ensured with the use of dial gauges,
as shown in figures 4.6.1, 4.6.2 and 4.6.3.
If considering a complete shaft turn, misalignment should not
exceed 0.05 mm.

* Otros tamaos de
carcasas, bajo consulta.

Fig. 4.6.1 - Axial reading (parallelism)

Notas:
Aunque la grasa Polyrex EM (Mobil) sea compatible con
los tipos de grasa mencionados arriba, no recomendamos la
mezcla con cualquier tipo de grasa.
Si Ud. necesita utilizar otro tipo de grasa diferente de las
recomendadas arriba, primeramente contacte con WEG.

LA UTILIZACION DE MOTORES NORMALES EN


LOCALES Y/O APLICACIONES ESPECIALES DEBE
ESTAR PRECEDIDA DE UNA CONSULTA AL
FABRICANTE DE GRASAS Y/O A WEG

Fig. 4.6.2 Radial reading (concentricity)

5.2 - Desmontaje Y Montaje

Fig. 4.6.3 Axial and radial reading combined

The axial alignment (E dimension) between half couplings


should be performed in accordance with manufacturers
recommendations.

El desmontaje y montaje del motor deber ser hecho por


personal calificado, utilizando solamente herramientas y
mtodos adecuados.
Las garras del extractor de rodamientos debern estar
aplicadas sobre la pista interna o sobre la tapa interior.
Es esencial que el montaje de los rodamientos sea ejecutado
en condiciones de rigurosa limpieza, para asegurar un buen
funcionamiento y evitar daos. En el caso de colocar
rodamientos nuevos, stos debern ser retirados de su embalaje
solamente en el momento previo de su montaje al mo tor.
Antes de instalar un rodamiento nuevo, es necesario verificar
si el alojamiento de l mismo en el eje se encuentra exento de
rebabas o seales de golpes.
Para montaje del rodamiento caliente sus partes internas con
equipamiento apropiado por induccin o utilice herramientas
apropiadas.

If required, WEG can offer its personnel duly trained as well as a


laser equipment to make motor and driven machine alignment/
leveling.

6. PARTES Y PIEZAS (REPUESTOS)

Expansion effect of the components may change the alignment/


leveling conditions during performance.

Al solicitar piezas para reposicin, es conveniente indicar la


designacin completa del motor, as como el cdigo del mismo
que aparece marcado en la tarjeta de identificacin.

AVISO:
Las tablas arriba son recomendadas especficamente para
relubricacin con grasa Polyrex EM (Mobil) y temperaturas
absolutas de operacin del rodamiento de:
70C (158F) para motores carcasas 254/6T hasta 324/6T.
85C (185F) para motores carcasas 364/5T hasta 586/7T.
Para cada 15C (59F) arriba de ese lmite, los intervalos de
lubricacin deben ser reducidos a la mitad. Los rodamientos
sellados (ZZ) son lubricados para una determinada vida til,
una vez operando bajo condiciones de temperatura de 70C
(158F).
Los periodos de relubricacin informados arriba son para
los casos de aplicacin con grasa Polyrex EM (Mobil)
Motores montados de forma vertical deben tener su intervalo
de relubricacin reducido a la mitad cuando comparados con
motores en la posicin horizontal.
Para aplicaciones con altas o bajas temperaturas, variacin
de velocidad, etc. el tipo de grasa e intervalos de relubricacin
son informados en una tarjeta de identificacin adicional fijada
al motor.

I
I

RECOMENDAMOS EL USO DE RODAMIENTOS


DE ESFERAS PARA MOTORES ACOPLADOS
DIRECTAMENTE A LA CARGA

PELIGRO:
GRASA EN EXCESO PUEDE PROVOCAR
SOBRECALENTAMIENTO DE LOS RODAMIENTOS,
RESULTANDO UN DAO TOTAL

5.1.3 Compatibilidad de la grasa Polirex EM (Mobil) con


otros tipos de grasa:
Conteniendo espesante polyurea y aceite mineral, la grasa
Polyrex EM (Mobil) es compatible con otros tipos de grasa las
cuales contengan:
Base de litio o complejo de litio o polyurea y aceite mineral
altamente refinado.
Aditivo inhibidor contra corrosin, herrumbre y aditivos
antioxidantes.

4.7 Couplings
When using pulley or belt drive (coupling), follow the
instruction given below:
Remove shaft-locking device (if any) before installing the motor.
Belts must be tighten just enough to avoid slippage when
running, according to the specifications stated on the belt
supplier recommendation.
To make the installation of the pulley on the shaft easier, it is
recommended to heat up the pulley at 176F (80C) and have
it mounted at hot, using suitable tools.
To avoi d bearing and shaft end damage, mounting and
dismounting of pulleys must be made with suitable tools.
While mounting and dismounting a pulley, never make pressure
or knocks on the bearings.
Always use flexible couplings; rigid couplings require special
bearing arrangement as well as axial and radial alignment of
the shafts.
WARNING:
EXCESSIVE BELT/CHAIN TENSION WILL DAMAGE
THE BEARINGS AND LEAD TO A PROBABLE
SHAFT RUPTURE
The couplings used must be suitable to withstand radial and
axial vibrations during operation. Special care must be taken to
avoid that the allowable load and speed limits given in the catalog
are not exceeded.
4.8 Electrical Connection
Make sure the motor is connected to the correct power supply.
The cable gauges and the protection devices must be designed
based on motor rated current.

~
WARNING

The capacitor on single-phase motors can


retain a charge which appears across the
motor terminals, even when the motor has
reached standstill condition. So, avoid
touching them at such condition

A WRONG CONNECTION CAN


BURN OUT THE MOTOR.

Voltage and connection are indicated on the motor nameplate.


The acceptable voltage variation is 10%;
the acceptable frequency variation is +3% and -5% and the
total acceptable variation for voltage and frequency is 10%.
Note: For rated voltage range (Tru Metric Line), the acceptable
variation is 5% according to IEC 60034-1.
4.9 - Starting Methods
The motor is rather started through direct starting. In case this
is not possible, use compatible start methods to the motor load
and voltage.
When applying reduced voltage-starting method, remember
that the starting torque will also reduce.
P 3 leads single voltage and 9 leads dual voltage motors can be
started as follows:
- Full Voltage Direct online
- Auto-Transformer starting
- Electronic Soft-Starting
- VFD Starting subject to verification and application analisys.
- Series - Parallel starting (only for 9 leads)
P 6 leads single and dual voltage motors and 12 leads dual
voltage motors can be connected as follows:
- Full Voltage Direct online

La frecuencia adecuada para realizar las inspecciones depender


del tipo de motor y de las condiciones de aplicacin.

I
INTERVALOS DE RELUBRICACION GRASA POLIREX EM (MOBIL)

~
WARNING

Voltage may be connected at motor standstill


inside the terminal box for heating elements
or direct winding heating

PARA LUBRICACION, USE EXCLUSIVAMENTE


PISTOLA ENGRASADORA MANUAL

NO REUTILIZAR PIEZAS DAADAS O CON DESG ASTE.


SUBSTITUIR POR NUEVAS, ORIGINALES DE FABRICA

La frecuencia adecuada para realizar las inspecciones


depender del tipo de motor y de las condiciones de
aplicacin.
5.1 Lubricacin
PROCEDER DE ACUERDO C ON LOS INTERVALOS
DE REENGRASE RECOMENDADOS. ESTO ES VITAL
PARA LA OPERACION DEL MOTOR

5.1.1 - Motores sin grasera


Los motores hasta la carcasa 215T normalmente no llevan grasera.
En estos casos el reengrase deber ser efectuado conforme al
plan de mantenimiento preventivo existente, teniendo en cuenta
los siguientes aspectos:
P
P
P
P
P

Desarmar cuidadosamente los motores.


Retirar toda la grasa.
Lavar los rodamientos con querosina o gasolina.
Secar los rodamientos
Reengrasar el rodamiento inmediatamente.

5.1.2 - Motores con grasera


Se recomienda efectuar el reengrase durante el funcionamiento
del motor, de modo que permita la renovacin de la grasa en el
alojamiento del rodamiento. Si esto no fuera posible debido a la
presencia de piezas giratorias cerca de la entrada de grasa (poleas,
acoplamientos, etc.) que puedan poner en riesgo la integridad
fsica del operador, se procede de la siguiente manera:
P Limpiar las proximidades del agujero de la grasera.
P Inyectar aproximadamente la mitad de la cantidad total de
grasa estimada y poner en marcha el motor durante 1 minuto
aproximadamente en rotacin nominal. Desconectar nuevamente
el motor y colocar la grasa restante.
P La inyeccin de toda la grasa con el motor parado puede
llevar a la penetracin de parte del lubricante al interior del motor,
a travs del agujero de paso de eje en las tapas de rodamientos
interiores.

- WYE/DELTA starting
- Auto-Transformer starting
- Electronic Soft-Starting
- VFD Starting subject to verification and application analisys.
- Series - Parallel starting (only for 12 leads)
Rotation direction is clockwise when motor is viewed from
Drive Endshields side and if the phases are connected
according to sequence L1, L2, L3. This sequence and power
system must be positive.
To change the rotation direction, reverse two of the connecting
leads.
Note: For single-phase motors connections, please check the
motor nameplate.

THE CONNECTION TO THE POWER SUPPLY


MUST BE DONE BY QUALIFIED PERSONNEL AND
WITH FULL ATTENTION TO ASSURE SAFE AND
PERMANENT CONNECTION. AFTER
CONNECTING THE MOTOR, CHECK FOR ANY
STRANGE BODY INSIDE THE TERMINAL BOX. THE
CABLE INLETS NOT IN USE MUST BE CLOSED

Make sure to use correct cable gauge, based on the rated


current stamped on the motor nameplate.

BEFORE ENERGIZING THE TERMINALS, CHECK IF


THE GROUNDING IS MADE ACCORDING TO THE
APPLICABLE STANDARDS. THIS IS ESSENTIAL TO
AVOID ACCIDENTS

4.10 Protection Device


When the motor is supplied with protective or monitor
temperature device such as thermostats, thermistors, thermal
protector etc, connect their terminals to the corresponding
devices on the control panel. If this procedure is not followed
accordingly,warranty will be void.
Do not change protection devices settings as they may not
operate.

4.11 Puesta en Marcha (Start-Up)

L1 L2 L3

P1 P2

I
L1 L2 L3

P1 P2

3x

3x

RELEASE DEVICE

LA CUA DEBE ESTAR COMPLETAMENTE


ASEGURADA O POR EL CONTRARIO RETIRADA
ANTES DE PONER EN MARCHA EL MOTOR

a) El motor debe arrancar y funcionar de manera suave. En el


caso de que esto no ocurra, desconecte el motor y verifique
nuevamente el sistema de montaje y de conexiones antes de
nueva puesta en marcha.

THERMISTORS LEADS

b) En el caso de vibraciones excesivas, verifique se los


tornillos de fijacin estn sueltos o se la vibracin es originada
por mquinas adyacentes. Se debe hacer una verificacin
peridica de la vibracin.

4.11 - Start-Up

IF THE MOTOR IS RUN BARE SHAFT, THE KEY MUST


BE FASTENED OR REMOVED BEFORE STARTING

a) The motor must start and opera te smoothly. In case this


does not occur, turn it off and check all connections and the
mounting before starting it again.
b) In case there is excessive vibration, check if the fixing screws
are correctly fastened.
Check also if the vibration comes from a neighbor machine.
Periodical vibration check must be done.
c) Run the motor under rated load for a short period of time
and compare if the running current is in accordance to the
nameplate current.
5 . MAINTENANCE
Any service on electric machines should only be carried out
when it is completely stopped and all phases disconnected
from the power supply.

WARNING:
SAFETY CHECK LIST

c) Mantener el motor en marcha bajo carga nominal durante


un pequeo periodo de tiempo y comparar la corriente de
operacin con la corriente informada en la tarjeta de
identificacin.
5 - MANTENIMIENTO
Cualquier servicio realizado en mquinas elctricas solamente
debe ser hecho cuando las mismas estn completamente
paradas y todas las fases desconectadas de la red de
transmisin.

PELIGRO:
CONTROL DE SEGURIDAD (CHECK LIST).

Inspeccin General
Inspeccionar el motor peridicamente.
Mantener limpio el motor y asegurar libre flujo de aire.
Verifique los vedamientos (sellos) y efecte la sustitucin
en caso que sea necesario.
Verifique el ajuste de las conexiones del motor as como
los tornillos de sustentacin.
Verifique el estado de los rodamientos siempre
observando: aparicin de fuertes ruidos, vibraciones,
temperatura excesiva y condiciones de la grasa.
Cuando se detecte un cambio en las condiciones de trabajo
normales del motor, analice el motor y reemplace las piezas
requeridas.

LA CONEXION A LA RED DE ALIMENTACION


ELECTRICA DEBE SER EFECTUADA POR PERSONAL
CALIFICADO CON MUCHA ATENCION PARA
ASEGURAR UN CONTACTO SEGURO Y
PERMANENTE. DESPUES DE HABER CONECTADO
EL MOTOR, VERIFIQUE QUE NINGUN CUERPO
EXTRAO PERMANEZCA EN EL INTERIOR DE LA
CAJA DE CONEXIONES. TODA ENTRADA DE CABLES
A LA CAJA QUE NO ESTE SIENDO UTILIZADA, DEBE
SER CERRADA

Asegrese de utilizar el dimetro correcto para el cable de


alimentacin, tomando como base la corriente nominal
indicada en la tarjeta de identificacin del motor.

ANTES DE CONECTAR EL MOTOR, VERIFIQUE


QUE LA PUESTA A TIERRA FUE REALIZADA DE
ACUERDO CON LAS NORMAS VIGENTES. ESTE
DETALLE ES FUNDAMENTAL PARA EVITAR
ACCIDENTES

4.10 Dispositivos de proteccin


Cuando el motor es suministrado con dispositivos de proteccin
o monitoreo de temperatura, tales como, termostatos, termistores,
protectores trmicos, etc., conecte sus terminales a los dispositivos
correspondientes en el panel de control. Caso este procedimiento
no sea seguido correctamente, puede invalidar la garanta.
No altere el reglaje de los dispositivos de proteccin, porque los
mismos pueden se tornar inoperantes.
Diagrama del Dispositivo de Proteccin

L1 L2 L3

P1 P2
L1

3x

L2

P1 P2

L3

3x
CABLES DE
LOS TERMISTORES

DISPOSITIVODE
PROTECCIN

General Inspection
Check motor perio dically.
Keep motor clean and ensure free air flow.
Check seals and replace them, if required.
Check connections as well as supporting screws.
Check bearing condition and pay attention to: Any excessive
noise, vibration, bearing temperature and grease condition.
When a change, under normal conditions is detected, check
the motor and replace required parts.

DO NOT REUSE DAMAGED OR WORN PARTS.


REPLACE THEM BY NEW ONES SUPPLIED BY THE
FACTORY

Periodical inspection depends on motor type and on


application conditions.
5.1 Lubrication

FOLLOW REGREASING INTERVALS. THIS IS


FUNDAMENTAL FOR PROPER MOTOR OPERATION

5.1.1 - Machines withou t Grease Nipples


Motors up to frame size 215T are normally fitted without grease
fittings. In these cases the regreasing shall be done during
preventive maintenance service paying attention to the following
aspects:
Take motor apart carefully.
Take all the grease out.
Wash the bearing with kerosene or diesel.
Dry the bearings
Regrease the bearing immediately.
5.1.2 - Motors Fitted with Grease Fitting
It is strongly recommended to grease the machine while running.
This allows the grease renewal in the bearing housing. When
this is not possible due to rotating parts by the grease device
(pulleys, bushing, etc) that offer some risk to physical integrity
of the operator, proceed as follows:
Clean the area near the grease nipple.
Put approximately half of the total grease and run the motor for
1 minute at full speed.

Then turn off the motor and pump in the rest of the grease.
The injection of all the grease with the motor in standstill can
make the grease penetrate into the motor, through the bearing
housing inner seal.
Inspections intervals depend on motor type and on application
conditions.

USE ONLY MANUAL GREASE GUN FOR


LUBRICATION

La tensin y forma de conexin estn indicadas en la tarjeta de


identificacin del motor.
La variacin aceptable de tensin es de 10%,
La variacin aceptable en la frecuencia es de +3 y 5% y la variacin
total aceptable de la tensin y frecuencia es de 10%.
Nota: Para rango de tensin nominal (Lnea Tru Metric), la variacin
aceptable es 5% de acuerdo con la IEC60034-1.
4.9 - Sistema de arranque

RECOMMENDED RELUBRICATION INTERVALS POLYREX EM GREASE


MOBIL)
(

Es preferible que el motor arranque en forma directa. En el caso


de que esto no sea posible, utilizar mtodos de arranque
alternativos que sean compatibles con la carga y tensin del motor.
Cuando aplicar el sistema de arranque con tensin reducida,
acuerde que el par de arranque tambin reducir.
Los motores 3 cables tensin nica y 9 cables doble tensin
pueden ser arrancados como sigue:
- Arranque directo a plena tensin
- Arranque con auto transformador
- Arrancador Suave (Soft-Starter)
- Arranque con Convertidor de frecuencia bajo verificacin y
anlisis de aplicacin.
- Arranque Serie-Paralelo (solamente para 9 cables)
Los motores 6 cables tensin nica y doble y 12 cables doble
tensin pueden ser conectados como sigue:
- Arranque directo a plena tensin
- Arranque estrella-triangulo
- Arranque con auto transformador
- Arrancador Suave (Soft-Starter)
- Arranque con Convertidor de frecuencia bajo verificacin y
anlisis de aplicacin.
- Arranque Serie- Paralelo (solamente para 12 cables)
El sentido de giro es el horario, mirando el motor desde el extremo
del eje y conectando las fases en la secuencia L1, L2 y L3. Esta
secuencia y la alimentacin deben ser positivas.
Para cambiar el sentido de giro, invertir dos de los cables de
alimentacin.
Nota: Para motores con conexin monofsica, favor verificar la
tarjeta de i dentificacin del motor.

requieren rodamientos especiales, bien como alineacin axial


y radial de los ejes.
ATENCION:
UNA EXCESIVA TENSIN EN LAS CORREAS
DAAR LOS RODAMIENTOS Y HASTA PUEDE
PROVOCAR LA RUPTURA DEL EJE.
Los acoplamientos utilizados deben soportar vibraciones
radiales y axiales durante la operacin. Deben ser tomados
cuidados especiales para evitar que no sean excedidas las
cargas permitidas y limites de velocidad de catlogo.
4.8 Conexin elctrica
Se debe asegurar que el motor sea conectado correctamente
en la red de transmisin.
Los dimetros de los cables y los dispositivos de proteccin
deben ser diseados de acuerdo con la corriente nominal
del motor.

~
PELIGRO

~
PELIGRO

Con el motor parado, puede existir energa


elctrica en el interior de la caja de
conexiones, para las resistencias de
calentamiento o inclusive para el bobinado.

Los capacitores de los motores monofsicos


pueden retener energa elctrica, mismo con
el motor parado. no tocar los capacitores y los
terminales del motor sin verificar que no exista
tensin en los mismos.

TODA CONEXION EFECTUADA DE FORMA


INCORRECTA PUEDE QUEMAR EL MOTOR

Note:
The table above is specifically intended for relubrification with
MOBIL Polyrex EM grease and bearing absolute operating
temperature of:
70C (158F) for 254/6T to 324/6T frame size motors
85C (185F) for 364/5T to 586/7T frame size motors
For every 15C (59F) above these limits, relubrification intervals
must be reduced by half. Shielded bearing (ZZ) are lubricated
for bearing life as lo ng are they operate under conditions and
temperature of 70C (158F).
Relubrication periods given above are for those cases
applying MOBIL Polyrex EM grease.
When motors are used on the vertical position, their
relubrication interval is reduced by half if compared to horizontal
position motors.
On applications with high or low temperatures, speed variation
etc., the type of grease and relubrication intervals is given on an
additional nameplate attached to the motor.

I
I

WE RECOMMENDED TO USE BALL


BEARINGS FOR MOTORS DIRECTLY
COUPLED TO THE LOAD

WARNING:
EXCESS OF GREASE CAN CAUSE BEARING
OVERHEATING RESULTING IN COMPLETE DAMAGE.

5.1.3 - Co mpatibility of MOBIL Polirex EM grease with other


types of grease
Containing polyurea thickener and mineral oil, the MOBIL Polyrex
EM grease is compatible with other types of grease that contain:
Lithium base or complex of lithium or polyurea and highly
refined mineral oil.
Inhibitor additive against corrosion, rust and anti-oxidant
additive.
Note:
Although MOBIL Polyrex EM is compatible with the types of
grease given above, we do not recommend mixing it with any
other types of grease.
If you intend to use a type of grease different than those

recommended above, first contact WEG.

BEFORE USING STANDARD MOTORS IN SPECIFIC


AREAS OR ON SPECIAL APPLICATIONS, FIRST
CONTACT THE GREASE MANUFACTURER OR WEG

5.2 - Assembly and Disassembly


Disassembly and assembly must be done by qualified personnel
using only suitable tools and appropriate methods.
The bearing extractor grips must be applied over the side face
of the inner ring to be disassembled or over an adjacent part.
It is essential to assemble bearings under clean conditions to
ensure good operation and to avoid damages. New bearings
shall only be taken out from their packages when assembling
them.
Before installing a new bearing it is required to check the shaft
fitting for any sharp edge or strike signals.
For bearing assembly warm their inner parts with suitable
equipment inductive process or use suitable tools.
6. SPARE PARTS
When ordering spare parts, please specify the full type designation
and product code as stated on the motor nameplate. Please also
inform the motor serial number stated on the nameplate.
7 - VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE MOTORS

7.1 - Standard Motors Line


Motors with voltages up to 575V do not require filters if follow
the criteria bellow:

Fig. 4.6.3 Lectura Axial y Radial combinado

La alineacin axial (dimensin E) entre mitad de acoplamientos


deben ser ejecutados de acuerdo con las especificaciones del
fabricante.
Bajo consulta, WEG puede ofrecer su personal entrenado y
tambin equipamiento lser para hacer la alineacin/nivelacin
del motor y de la mquina accionada.
La expansin de los componentes puede cambiar las condiciones
de alineacin/nivelacin durante el desempeo.
4.7 Acoplamientos
Cuando se utilice un acoplamiento por medio de correas y
poleas, se debe seguir las informaciones abajo:
- Remover el dispositivo de bloqueo del eje (caso existir) antes
de instalar el motor.
- Las correas deben ser estiradas apenas lo suficiente como
para evitar deslizamiento en el funcionamiento, de acuerdo con
las recomendaciones del fabricante de las correas.
- Para facilitar la instalacin de la polea en el eje, se recomienda
calentar la polea hasta 176F (80C) y montar an caliente,
utilizando herramientas apropiadas.
- Para evitar daos en los rodamientos y punta del eje, el
montaje y desmontaje de las poleas debe s er hecho con
herramientas apropiadas.
- Mientras el montaje y desmontaje de una polea, nunca haga
presin o golpes en los rodamientos.
- Siempre utilice acoplamientos flexibles, acoplamientos rgidos

Fig. 4.6.1 Lect ura Axial (en paralelo)

Fig. 4.6.2 Lect ura radial (concentricidad)

* Other frame sizes, under request.

Note:
1) Motors with nameplate showing voltage 380-415V / 660-690V - 50Hz and 440-480V 60Hz, and fed by VFD on voltage 660-690V - 50Hz or 480V - 60Hz require filters.
2) Motors in frame sizes 504/5T and 586/7T* when uded with VFDs, require insulated
bearings.

Montaje correcto del acoplamiento:


Especialmente en los casos donde se utiliza acoplamiento directo,
el eje debe ser alineado axialmente y radialmente con el eje de la
mquina accionada.
Una alineacin incorrecta puede daar el rodamiento, vibraciones
y hasta provocar ruptura del eje.
Una alineacin correcta puede ser asegurada con el uso de
calibradores, de acuerdo con las figuras 4.6.1, 4.6.2 y 4.6.3.
Considerando un giro completo del eje, la desalineacin no debe
exceder 0.05mm.

IF SUCH RECOMMENDATIONS AND CRITERIA


ARE NOT FOLLOWED ACCORDINGLY, MOTOR
WARRANTY WILL BE VOID

7.2 - Inverter Duty Motors Line


Motors with voltages above 575V and equal or below 690V and fed
by VFD do not require filters when following the criteria below:

La base debe ser uniforme y lo suficientemente robusta para


soportar fuertes choques. Debe ser diseada de manera que
impida las vibraciones originadas por resonancias.
Nota: Considerando que el sentido de rotacin es importante
para un funcionamiento correcto, verificar el sentido de rotacin
antes de acoplar la carga al motor.
4.4 - Agujeros de drenaje
Asegrese que los agujeros de drenaje del motor se siten en
su parte inferior, cuando la forma de montaje del motor difiera
de la especificada en la compra del mismo.
4.5 Balanceo

P Check power supply voltage of the forced cooling set.

BALANCEOS ESPECIALES DEBEN SER


SOLICITADOS PREVIAMENTE A LA
FABRICA

Los motores WEG son balanceados dinmicamente en la planta


con Media Cua
Los elementos de transmisin, tales como, poleas,
acoplamientos, etc., deben ser balanceados dinmicamente con
media cua antes de ser instalados.
Utilice siempre herramientas apropiadas tanto en la instalacin
como en el desacople de los motores.
4.6 Alineacin

ALINEAR LAS PUNTAS DEL EJE, Y UTILICE


SIEMPRE QUE FUERA POSIBLE
ACOPLAMIENTOS FLEXIBLES

Cercirese de que los dispositivos de montaje del motor no


permitan alteraciones en la alineacin y otros daos en los
rodamientos.
Cuando se proceda el montaje del acoplamiento deben ser
usados los medios adecuados y las herramientas necesarias
para no daar los rodamientos.

la entrada de aire. Una persona debe tener espacio suficiente


para mantener servicios de limpieza.
Mquinas que son enfriadas a travs del aire ambiente, deben
limpiar las entradas de aire en intervalos regulares para asegurar
la libre circulacin de aire.
Aire caliente no puede retornar al mo tor.
Para motores montados en la vertical con las entradas de aire
al topo, las entradas de aire deben ser protegidas con
sombrerete para evitar la cada de cuerpos extraos en el motor.
- Considerando que el calor directo del sol causa aumento
de temperatura, los motores instalados externamente deben
siempre ser protegidos contra la intemperie.

COMPARE LOS VALORES DE CORRIENTE,


TENSION, FRECUENCIA, VELOCIDAD, POTENCIA
Y OTROS VALORES EXIGIDOS POR LA
APLICACION, CON LOS DATOS CONTENIDOS EN
LA TARJETA DE IDENTIFICACION

Motores ODP Motores abiertos (IP21, IP23, etc.):


Son motores para uso en locales limpios, secos, con
circulacin de aire suficiente para su refrigeracin. Este tipo
de motor no debe ser utilizado en la presencia de materiales
inflamables o combustibles. Motores abiertos pueden emitir
llama/chispa o metal fundido en una eventual falla del
aislamiento (cortocircuito).
Motore s TCVE (Total mente Cerrado Ventilacin
Externa): Son motores aptos a trabajar en reas con
humedad polvo y materiales corrosivos, en ambientes cerrados
y tambin abiertos.
4.3 - Cimentacin del motor
Los motores con pies (patas) debern ser instalados sobre
apoyos rgidos para evitar excesivas vibraciones.
Todos los motores deben se r apropiadamente fijados y
alineados.
El cliente es totalmente responsable de estos apoyos.
Las partes metlicas debern estar pintadas para evitar la
corrosin.

IF SUCH RECOMMENDATIONS AND CRITERIA


ARE NOT FOLLOWED ACCORDINGLY, MOTOR
WARRANTY WILL BE VOID

7.3 Bearing insulation


Inverter Duty Motors line in frame sizes 504/5T and 586/7T* are
supplied with ground system between the shaft and frame on
Drive Endshield. Also, on request can be supplied with insulated
bearings.
For other lines, in frame sizes 504/5T and 586/7T* when used
with VFDs it is required ground system between the shaft and
frame or insulated bearings.
(*) Other frame sizes, under request.
8 - ADDITIONAL INSTRUCTIONS
8.1 - Hazardous Area Motors
8.1.1 General
Besides the recommendations given above, these
recommendations must be also followed.
Motors for hazardous area are manufactured according to
specific Standards for such environments.
Motors supplied for hazardous area (classified areas) must be
installed in areas that comply with those specified on the motor
nameplate.
Notes:
- Motors of Division I are also suitable for Division II.
- Motors of a given class of temperature are suitable also for
combustible environments of a greater class of temperature
(example, T4 motors are suitable for environments of class T3,
T2, T1).
8.1.2 Installation
A complete installation must follow procedures given by local
legislation in effect.

THE INSTALLATION OF HAZARDOUS AREA


MOTORS MUST BE CARRIED OUT BY SKILLED
PEOPLE

THE SPECIFICATION OF THE MOTOR


INSTALLATION SITE IS FOR CUSTOMERS
RESPONSIBILITY, WHO WILL ALSO DETERMINE
THE ENVIRONMENT CHARACTERISTICS

When cable entrance is made by a cable gland, this must be


suitable to the unit and to the type of cable; the cable gland has
to be assembled, completely screwed in order to get the necessary
pressure on the sealing rings, so as to:
- Avoid transmission of mechanical vibrations to the motor
terminals.
- Guarantee mechanical protection IP to the terminal box.
8.1.3 Checking and Maintenance
Maintenance must be carried out by repair shops authorized
and accredited by WEG.
Repair shops and people without WEGs authorization who will
perform any service on hazardous area motors will be fully
responsible for such service as well as for any consequential
damage.
When performing maintenance, installation or relubrication,
follow these instructions:
Electric connections must be correctly locked to avoid
resistance-increases, with consequent contact overheating.
Insulation air-distance and surface-distance between
conductors, required by the Standards, must be respected.
All screws, used to assemble parts motor and terminal box,
must be completely screwed.
Seals and components replacement for cable entrance would
be made using spare parts, supplied from the manufacturer,in
order to guarantee the original type of protection.
Explosion Proof motors joint surfaces have not to be machined
and it is not allowed to insert, between them, any kind of seals,
not foreseen or suppli ed by the manufacturer. Joint surfaces
have just to be cleaned and, in order to avoid corrosion or water

Utilice siempre herramientas apropiadas para la instalacin y


desmontaje.

VERIFIQUE QUE LOS MOTORES ELECTRICOS


ESTEN DESCONECTADOS ANTES DE INICIAR
CUALQUIER TRABAJO DE MANTENIMIENTO

Todas las partes girantes, tales como poleas, acoplamientos,


ventiladores externos, eje, etc., deben estar protegidos contra
toques accidentales.
Los motores deben estar protegidos contra arranques
accidentales.
Al realizar servicios de mantenimiento en el motor, desconecte
la red de alimentacin. Verifique si todos los accesorios fueron
desconectados de la red de alimentacin y desligados.
Para impedir la penetracin de polvo o agua en el interior de
la caja de conexin, es necesario instalar prensa cables o
electroductores roscados en las salidas de los cables. Los
mismos deben tener grado IP igual o mayor que el m otor.

EL AISLAMIENTO DE LOS CABLES, ADENTRO DE


LA CAJA DE CONEXIONES DEL MOTOR, DEBEN
SER HECHOS CON MATERIALES COMPATIBLES
CON LA CLASE TERMICA DEL MOTOR QUE ESTA
MOSTRADA EN LA TARJETA DE IDENTIFICACION

Se las instrucciones de instalacin y seguridad no son seguidas


correctamente, se puede perder la garanta.
4.2 - Condiciones de Operacin
Los motores elctricos, en general, son diseados para
instalacin y operacin a una altitud hasta 1000m sobre el nivel
del mar con temperaturas ambientes de -20C (-4F) a 40C
(104F).
Variaciones respecto a los valores mencionados deben estar
indicadas en la tarjeta de identificacin.
La distancia de instalacin recomendada entre las entradas de
aire del motor y la pared no debe ser inferior del dimetro de

del estator bobinado. Caso necesario, cambiar los rodamientos


y retenedores.
Nota:
1) Los agujeros de drenaje (cuando existan) deben ser retirados
durante el secado.
2) La resistencia de aislamiento debe ser medida en temperatura
ambiente. Caso sea diferente de 25C debe ser corregida utilizando
la siguiente formula:
R(25C) = [( K+25 ) / ( K + T a )] . R (Ta)
Donde:
R(25C) resistencia del aislamiento relativa a 25C temperatura
ambiente
K
valor constante 234.5 para el cobre
Ta temperatura ambiente donde la resistencia fue medida
R(Ta) valor de la resistencia medida en temperatura ambiente Ta
4. INSTALACION
4.1 - Seguridad
Los profesionales que trabajan en instalaciones elctricas, sea
en el manejo, montaje, operacin, puesta en marcha o en el
mantenimiento, debern estar permanentemente informados y
actualizados sobre las normas y requisitos vigentes en materia
de seguridad y cuidadosamente ponerlas en prctica.
Por motivos prcticos, no es posible incluir en este Manual
informacin detallada de todas las variables constructivas,
tampoco todas las posibilidades de montaje, operacin o
alternativas de mantenimiento.
Debido a esto, este Manual solamente incluye la informacin
requerida que recomienda que estos servicios sean efectuados
solamente por personal calificado y entrenado.
Caso Ud. aun tenga alguna duda a este respecto, especialmente
respecto a informacin especifica del producto, WEG
suministrar esta informacin a travs de su red de servicio
autorizado y/o distribuidores.
Para permitir que WEG tenga un pronto servicio, dentro de las
normas tcnicas, el nmero de serie del motor que se encuentra
en la tarjeta de identificacin debe ser informado.

penetration; they can beoiled by means of a thin coat of silicon


grease.
Check if all components are free of edges, knocks or dirt.
Make sure all parts are in perfect conditions.
Lubricate the surfaces of the endshield fittings with protective
oil to make the assembly easier.
Use only rubber hammer to fit the parts.
Check the correct bolts fastening.
Use clearance calibrator f or correct connection terminal box
fitting (less than 0.05mm).
8.1.4 Explosion Proof Motor Repairs
Repair of parts, directly involved in the protection against risk of
an explosion, must be done without any modification to the
original motor design.
After the repair, these parts must be submitted to a check and
when concluded, the repair shop must issue a statement, about
all operations performed on a specific mo tor.

9. WARRANTY TERMS
WEG warrants its products against defect s in workmanship
and materials for eighteen (18) months from the invoice date
issued by the factory, authorized distributor or agent limited to
twenty four (24) months from manufacturing date independent
of installation date as long as the following items are fulfilled
accordingly:
- Proper transportation, handling and storage;
- Correct installation based on the specified ambient
environmental conditions;
- Operation under motor capacity limits;
- Observation of the periodical maintenance services;
- Repair and/or replacement effected only by personnel duly
authorized in writing by WEG;
- The failed product be available t o the supplier and/or repair
shop for a required period to detect the cause of the failure
and corresponding repair;
- Immediate notice by the purchaser about failures occurred
and that these are accepted by WEG as manufacturing defects.
This warranty does not include disassembly services at the
purchaser facilities, transportation costs with product, tickets,
accommodation and meals for technical personnel when
requested by t he customer.
The warranty service will be only carried out at WEG Authorized
Repair Shops or at WEGs facilities.
Components whose useful life, under normal use, is shorter
than the warranty period are not covered by these warranty
terms.
The repair and/or replacement of parts or components, when
affected b y WEG and/or any WEG Authorized Repair Shop, will
not give warranty extension.
This constitutes WEGs only warranty in connection with this
sale and the company will have no obligation or liability
whatsoever to people, third parties, other equipment or
installations, including without limitation, any claims for
consequential damage s or labor costs.

Las resistencias de calentamiento nunca deben ser energizadas


mientras el motor este operando.

Posicin del Dreno

Figura 1

Dreno

Medicin de la resistencia del aislamiento


Desconectar el motor de la red de energa antes de hacer
cualquier medicin de la resistencia del aislamiento.
Para evitar riesgo de descarga elctrica, descargue los
terminales despus de la medicin.
Mida la resistencia del aislamiento antes de poner el motor en
servicio y/o cuando haya indicios de humedad en el bobinado.
La resistencia, medida a 25C (77F), debe ser:
Ri (20 x U) / (1000 + 2P) [M]
(Medido con MEGGER a 500 V c.c.);
Donde U = tensin (V); P = potencia (kW).
Si la resistencia del aislamiento medida es inferior a 2 M, el
bobinado deber ser secado de acuerdo con lo que sigue:
Calentar el estator bobi nado en un horno partiendo de una
temperatura de 80C (176F) y elevando 5C (41F) por hora
hasta llegar a los 105C (221F); esta ltima temperatura debe
permanecer durante un perodo mnimo de una hora.
Medir se la resistencia del aislamiento del bobinado permanece
constante y con valores dentro de los mnimos recomendados;
caso contrario, se deber proceder a una nueva impregnacin

Verifique si ocurrieron daos durante el transporte.


Verifique los datos de la tarjeta de identificacin.
Gire el eje con la mano para verificar si est girando libremente.
Asegurar que el motor no tenga sido expuesto a polvo o
humedad durante el transporte a almacenamiento.
3. ALMACENAMIENTO

Transformando Energa
en Soluciones

Si los motores no fueran inmediatamente instalados, deben ser


almacenados en un local seco, libre de polvo, vibraciones, gases
y vapores corrosivos; dotado de temperatura uniforme,
colocndolos en posicin normal y sin apoyar sobre ellos otros
objetos.
La temperatura de almacenaje de los motores debe quedar entre
41F (5C) y 140F (60C), con humedad relativa no excediendo
a 50%.
En el caso de motores con ms de dos aos de almacenaje, se
debe proceder al cambio de rodamientos o a la substitucin
total de la grasa lubricante despus de la limpieza de los mismos.
En los motores monofsicos almacenados durante dos aos o
ms, se debe adems cambiar los capacitores (cuando existan).
WEG recomienda girar el eje del motor (manualmente) al menos
una vez al mes y medir la resistencia del aislamiento antes de
instalarlo, en caso de motores almacenados ms de 6 meses o
cuando estn sometidos a ambientes con alta humedad.
Caso el motor dispone de resistencias de calentamiento, estas
debern ser conectadas durante el periodo de almacenaje caso
la humedad relativa exceder 50%.
Caso el motor permanecer almacenado por un largo periodo
sin tener las resistencias de calentamiento conectadas o cuando
estn instaladas pero no en operacin, humedad/agua en la
parta interna del motor pueden condensar.En estos casos, la
agua debe ser drenada removiendo los drenos (tapones)
roscados. Despus del drenaje hecho, conecte las resistencias
de calentamiento y asegure que el motor este completamente
seco, entonces reinstale los tapones (drenos) para asegurar el
grado de proteccin correcto. (Vea figura 1).

MANUAL DE INSTALACION,
OPERACION Y
MANTENIMIENTO PARA
MOTORES DE INDUCCION
Carcasas 143/5t hasta 586/7

LA INTENCION DE ESTE MANUAL ES PROVEER


INFORMACIONES IMPORTANTES QUE DEBEN SER
SEGUIDAS DURANTE TRANSPORTE, INSTALACION,
OPERACION Y MANTENIMIENTO DE LOS MOTORES
WEG. ENTONCES, RECOMENDAMOS LEER
ATENTAMENTE ESTE MANUAL ANTES DE LA
INSTALACION Y OPERACION DEL MOTOR.
PARA ASEGURAR INTEGRIDAD FISICA DE LA
OPERACION Y PROTECCION MATERIAL, TODA LA
INFORMACION INCLUIDA EN ESTE MANUAL DEBERA
SER EXTREMAMENTE SEGUIDA
INDICE

1.
2.
3.
4.

MANEJO Y TRANSPORTE
VERIFICACION EN LA RECEPCION
ALMACENAMIENTO
INSTALACION
4.1 - Seguridad
4.2 - Condiciones de operacin
4.3 - Fundaciones del motor
4.4 - Agujeros de Drenaje
4.5 - Balanceo
4.6 - Alineacin
4.7 - Acoplamientos
4.8 - Conexin elctrica
4.9 - Mtodos de arranque
4.10 - Dispositivo de proteccin
4.11 - Puesta en Marcha
5. MANTENIMIENTO
5.1 - Lubricacin
5.1.1 - Motores sin grasera
5.1.2 - Motores con grasera
5.1.3 - Compatibilidad de la grasa MOBIL Polirex EM
con otros tipos de grasa
5.2 - DESM ONTAJE Y MONTAJE
6. PARTES Y PIEZAS - REPUESTOS
7. MOTORES PARA USO CON CONVERTIDOR DE
FRECUENCIA
7.1 - Motores Standard
7.2 - Motores Inverter Duty
7.3 - Aislamiento de rodamientos
8. INFORMACIONES ADICIONALES
8.1 - Motores para reas de Riesgo
8.1.1 - General
8.1.2 - Instalacin
8.1.3 - Chequeo y Mantenimiento
8.1.4 - Reparos en Motores a Prueba de Explosin
9. TERMINOS DE GARANTIA

1 MANEJO Y TRANSPORTE

LOS MOTORES NO DEBEN SER IZADOS POR EL


EJE, UTILIZE LOS CANCAMOS DE SUSPENSION,
ESPECIFICOS PARA ESTE PROPOSITO

Equipamientos de alzamiento, cuando suministrados, son


proyectados solamente para la sustentacin del motor.
Si el motor por su diseo constructivo tiene dos cncamos de
suspensin, use dispositivos que permitan el izamiento por
ambos elementos al mismo tiempo.
El izamiento as como el descenso del motor deben ser realizados
en forma suave, sin golpes, caso contrario los rodamientos
pueden sufrir daos.

LOS MOTORES CON RODAMIENTOS DE RODILLOS O


DE CONTACTO ANGULAR ESTAN PROTEGIDOS,
DURANTE EL TRANSPORTE, CONTRA DAOS POR
MEDIO DE UN DISPOSITIVO DE BLOQUEO DEL EJE

LOS DISPOSITIVOS DE BLOQUEO DEBEN SER


UTILIZADOS SIEMPRE QUE SE TRANSPORTE
EL MOTOR, AUNQUE ESTO IMPLIQUE
TENERLO QUE DESACOPLAR NUEVAMENTE
DE LA MAQUINA ACCIONADA
2. VERIFICACION EN LA RECEPCION

En la recepcin del motor, verifique si ocurrieron daos durante


el transporte.
En el caso de verificar cualquier dao, avisar inmediatamente la
transportadora, la compaa aseguradora y WEG. No avisar la
transportadora, la compaa aseguradora y WEG puede resulta
en la prdida de la garanta del producto.
No remueva la grasa de proteccin de la punta de eje, tampoco los
tapones que cierran los agujeros de la caja de conexiones, caso
existir. Estos tems de proteccin deben ser mantenidos hasta que
la instalacin completa sea concluida. Despusde la remocin de
su embalaje, una completa inspeccin visual debe ser hecha en

SHIJIAZHUANG KINGDA PUMP INDUSTRY GROUP CO., LTD


TOROMOCHO PROJECT
HARD METAL SLURRY PUMP

LONG-TERM STORAGE INSTRUCTIONS

Hard Metal Slurry Pumps

R05323-P-001A

SHIJIAZHUANG KINGDA PUMP INDUSTRY GROUP Co., Ltd


1st September, 2010

SHIJIAZHUANG KINGDA PUMP INDUSTRY GROUP CO., LTD


LONG-TERM STORAGE INSTRUCTIONS
TOROMOCHO PROJECT
R05323-P-001A, REV A

LONG-TERM STORAGE INSTRUCTIONS


The pumps are shipped fully protected for the commercial shipping and handling that is required for a
given order. Upon receipt, it is necessary that the customer, or an agent of the customer, conduct a
thorough inspection of all pumps and components for completeness of delivery and possible handling
damage. Some small spare parts may be packed separately, if you find damage or loss, please contact
with Kingda and Freight Company immediately.

All shortages should be immediately reported to Kingda.

Note: Any components damaged in shipment should be noted and a claim filed by the responsible
shipping party with the freight company.

Kinda does not warrant any pump or pump components which become damage due to a failure
which adhere to the instructions listed below.

SHIJIAZHUANG KINGDA PUMP INDUSTRY GROUP CO., LTD


LONG-TERM STORAGE INSTRUCTIONS
TOROMOCHO PROJECT
R05323-P-001A, REV A

Outdoor Storage
1. Site selection for outdoor storage of pump and pump components as following:
1.1: Level, well-drained, firm surface, clean, and dry location.
1.2: The environment for pump storage must be dry, dust-free, and well-ventilated. Avoid damage the
bearing because of vibration. The vibration of the storage place is less than 0.2mm/S.
1.3: Isolated or barricaded from possibility of physical damage from transport vehicles, earth working
equipment, and other site erected equipment.
1.4: The inlets and outlets of pumps should be plugged to prevent sundries entering pump cavity.
Accessible for periodic inspection and maintenance.

2. All the pump or pump baseplate should be supported under each corner of its base to allow it to
breathe. Supports (steel beams or wood timbers) of significant size and strength should be placed under
each corner.
All components shipped in crates and pallets must be located and supported such that air can flow under
and around the shipping container.

3. Upon receipt of the Pump and pump components, an initial inspection must be made to ensure that all
protective coatings and/or devices have not been compromised during shipping and handling.
If discrepancies are found, corrective action must be taken to ensure adequate protection of the
equipment during storage.
Particular attention must be paid to:
(a) All bright steel surfaces, journal and machined; such as shafts, end flanges.
(b) All shaft sleeve and bearing surfaces.
(c) All the roller bearing.
(d) All machined surfaces protected with paint

4. It is recommended that all electric motors be stored indoors. The motors are to be stored and protected
in accordance with the requirements of the motor manufacture. Some motors may have low voltage
internal heaters that are to be energized during storage.
If indoor store is not possible, it is necessary that these pumps and components be covered by a tarp
which is loose enough to let the component breathe. In areas of high relative humidity, it may be
necessary to use a desiccant to keep it free of moisture.
Note: WEG will provide the Motor Storage Instructions on all motors supplied by us.
Some motors may have low voltage internal heaters that are to be energized during storage.

SHIJIAZHUANG KINGDA PUMP INDUSTRY GROUP CO., LTD


LONG-TERM STORAGE INSTRUCTIONS
TOROMOCHO PROJECT
R05323-P-001A, REV A

Covered or Indoor Storage


The pumps should be covered or Indoor Storage. Covered storage will consist of any structure with a roof
to protect pumps and pump components from direct sunshine and rain. Indoor storage will consist of a
closed-in structure that will protect from sun, rain, wind and dust.
It is recommended that all electric drive motors should be stored indoors. The motors are to be stored and
protected in accordance with the requirements of the motor manufacture.
If proper indoor storage is not available, then the sensitive components must be covered with a well
drained and ventilated tarp or tent structure.

Attention during Storage


1. If the storage time is not more than 1 month, It is suggested that the pump should rotate by 1/4 turn
by manual every 1 week.

2. If the storage time is longer than 1 month, its recommended that preservative oil is painted on the
inside of the pump. The preservative oil should be replaced every 12 month. (The preservative oil film
must be cleaned before the trial run of the pump).
It is suggested that the pump should rotate by 1/4 turn by manual every 1 week.
For the pumps with packing, if the storage time is too long, replace the old packing.

3. Check all the components every 3 months; if rusted or oxidized, clean the surface and repaint the
preservative oil.

PARTICULAR ATTENTION must be paid to following:


1. Machined surface of rotating parts, as shaft, shaft sleeve, etc.
2. All the roller bearings, adequate lubricating oil should be filled in it to minimize the chance of oxidization
or rust.
3. The temperature of storage environment should not be less than 5 centigrade. It is to prevent the left
water to cracking the water jacket freezingly in the low temperature condition.
4. Measure the insulating resistance of stator with megameter periodically to check if the motor is not
affected with dampness.
5. The end of cable should be packed with adhesive butyl tape to avoid the moisture entering into the
cable.
6. To avoid the quick aging, keep the cable, winding wire and rubber parts away from the direct sunlight,
heat and hot flame.
7. The technical documents should be safely kept from moisture.

SHIJIAZHUANG KINGDA PUMP INDUSTRY GROUP CO., LTD


LONG-TERM STORAGE INSTRUCTIONS
TOROMOCHO PROJECT
R05323-P-001A, REV A

Storage/Maintenance
Period

Task

Action
Re-establish the integrity of all protective coatings and covering devices. Check

Initial receipt of pumps

Inventory

and pump components

Inspection

and

for damage to the surface finish (paint) that may allow rust or corrosion and
repaint as necessary.
-Report any shipping damages to the freight company.
-Report any shortages to Kingda.

After three (3) Months


of Storage

After six (6) Months of


Storage

Re-inspect all pump components, making sure no rust or oxidation is starting to


Inspection

form on machined surfaces. If rust or oxidation is found, the surface(s) must be


cleaned and a protective coating applied.
Re-inspect all pump components, making sure no rust or oxidation is starting to

Inspection

form on machined surfaces. If rust or oxidation is found, the surface(s) must be


cleaned and a protective coating applied.

The customer shall maintain a Periodic Inspection and Maintenance Log documenting condition and
efforts to maintain the protection of the Pump and components.

TOROMOCHO PROJECT
RECOMMENDED SPARE PARTS LIST
PO Number: R05323-P-001A

Equipment Name: Hard Metal Slurry Pumps

Date:20th, May 2011

Vendor:Shijiazhuang Kingda Pump Industry Group Co., Ltd


Vendor Contact: Ms.Wendy WANG Phone:+86 311 80908109 Fax:+86 311 80908116 Email: w_zhao72@163.com

STOCKHOLDINGS

MANUFACTURER'S DATA

Rubber+Fiber
KB04
KB04
KB04
KB04
NBR
NBR
NBR
Natural Rubber
PTFE
3Cr13
Rubber+Fiber
KB04
KB04
KB04
KB04
NBR
NBR
Natural Rubber
Natural Rubber
Natural Rubber
PTFE
4Cr13
Rubber+Fiber
KB04
KB04
KB04
KB04
NBR
NBR
NBR
NBR
Natural Rubber
NBR
2Cr13
3Cr13

245-PP-004
245-PP-005
245-PP-006
245-PP-106
M150KSH-EB/T

245-PP-008
245-PP-108
M50KSG-DB/T

260-PP-065
260-PP-065
M75KSG-EB/T

10

4000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
4000
4000
4000
4000
4000
4000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
4000
4000
4000
4000
4000
4000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
4000
4000
4000
4000
4000
4000

100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100

8
1
1
1
1
3
1
2
1
4
1
6
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
4
1
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1

14

15

64
12
12
12
12
36
8
16
8
32
8
24
6
6
6
6
12
6
4
8
4
16
4
16
6
6
6
6
6
6
4
4
8
4
4
4

N
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
N
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y
Y

64
12
12
12
12
36
8
16
8
32
8
24
6
6
6
6
12
6
4
8
4
16
4
16
6
6
6
6
6
6
4
4
8
4
4
4

16

17
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No

MSDS Applicable

13

to

12

Total Quantity
Ordered

11

18

19

20

21

Re-Order Point

8V-2500
M150KSH-F-01
M150KSH-F-05
M150KSH-F-02
M150KSH-F-06
SBB002-F109
K021-F6-L
K007-F8
K020-F6
SBB004-F111
K010-F
5V-1800
K001-DH2
K005-DH2
K002-DH2
K006-DH2
SBB002-D109
SBB002-EP
K021-C2-LP
K007-DH2
K020-C2
SBB004-D111
K010-D
8V-2500
M75KSHH-EB/T-03J
M75KSHH-EB/T-04
K002-EH3
4/3E-HH-02
SBB002-E109
SBB002-EH122
SBB002-F064
K021-EH3-L
K007-F8
K020-EH3
GRJ-100
8/6E-HH-01

Minimum

8V-2500
M150KSH-F-01
M150KSH-F-05
M150KSH-F-02
M150KSH-F-06
SBB002-F109
K021-F6-L
K007-F8
K020-F6
SBB004-F111
K010-F
5V-1800
K001-DH2
K005-DH2
K002-DH2
K006-DH2
SBB002-D109
SBB002-EP
K021-C2-LP
K007-DH2
K020-C2
SBB004-D111
K010-D
8V-2500
M75KSHH-EB/T-03J
M75KSHH-EB/T-04
K002-EH3
4/3E-HH-02
SBB002-E109
SBB002-EH122
SBB002-F064
K021-EH3-L
K007-F8
K020-EH3
GRJ-100
8/6E-HH-01

Maximum

V-Belt
Impeller
Throat Bush
Volute Liner
Frame Plate Liner Insert
O Ring
Discharge Joint Ring
Volute Liner Seal
Intake Joint Ring
Packing
Shaft Sleeve
V-Belt
Impeller
Throat Bush
Volute Liner
Frame Plate Liner Insert
O Ring
O Ring
Discharge Joint Ring
Volute Liner Seal
Intake Joint Ring
Packing
Shaft Sleeve
V-Belt
Impeller
Throat Bush
Volute Liner
Frame Plate Liner Insert
O Ring
O Ring
O Ring
Discharge Joint Ring
Volute Liner Seal
Intake Joint Ring
Mechanical Seal
Shaft Sleeve

Original
Manufacturers
Name and
Identification
Numbers
(see note 3)

Quality & Inspection


Clauses

strip
piece
piece
piece
piece
set
set
set
piece
set
piece
strip
piece
piece
piece
piece
set
set
set
set
piece
set
piece
strip
piece
piece
piece
piece
set
set
set
set
set
piece
set
piece

Unit Price
(US Dollar)

Inventory Number

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36

Mean Time
Between
Lead Time Quantity
Failure ARO (Days) Installed
MTBF
(Hours)

Storage Requirements

Parent Equipment
Number (List all
applicable tag
numbers)

Capital (Yes / No)

Material
Specification or
Certification
Reference

One Year Operation

Manufacturers
Drawing or Ref. No.

Start-Up

PARTS DESCRIPTION

EOM Part No.


(see note 2)

Commissioning

UNIT OF MEASURE

ITEM NUMBER

be

Required on Site Dates


Commissioning & Start-Up
USD . .
One Year Operation
USD ..

22

23

24

indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor

Remark:
1. Prices keep valid for 30 days since the date of issue.

Kingda-P001A Spare Parts List Unpriced.xls SPL Form

2012/2/2 10:21

Toromocho Project
Lubrication Schedule
Vendor: Shijiazhuang Kingda Pump Industry Group Co., Ltd

Date: 28th October, 2010

Equipment Name: Hard Metal Slurry Pumps

PO No.: R05323-P-001A

Equipment No.

245-PP-004/005/006/106

245-PP-008/108

260-PP-065/165

Pump Model

M150KSH-EB/T

M50KSG-DB/T

M75KSG-EB/T

Pump Speed
(RPM)

Lubricant Type

Lubricant
Manufacturer

Lubricated
Position

Filled Qty
(per each bearing)
(in g)

Replacement
Frequency
(in hours)

lithium grease #2 or #3

pump end

71

1200-630

lithium grease #2 or #3

motor end

71

1200-630

lithium grease #2 or #3

pump end

28

1300

lithium grease #2 or #3

motor end

28

1300

lithium grease #2 or #3

pump end

44

800-750

lithium grease #2 or #3

motor end

44

800-750

810~1050

1350

1200~1280

Tormocho Project
LUBRICATION SCHEDULE
PO Number: R05323-P-001
Vendor :SHIJIAZHUANG KINGDA PUMP
page 1 of 1
EQUIP NO.

245-PP-004
245-PP-005
245-PP-006
245-PP-106

DESCRIPTION, WHERE USED

Front bearing NU322-C3

Equipment: Standard End Suction Pumps


Vendor contact Name : Wang zhao(Wendy)
E-mail :w_zhao72@163.com
LUBRICANT TYPE

POLYREX EM
(polyurea grease

Rear bearing 6319-C3


Front bearing NU319-C3

245-PP-008/108
Rear bearing 6316-C3
Front bearing NU319-C3
260-PP-065/165
Rear bearing 6316-C3

QUANTITY MANUFACTURER

60g

POLYREX EM
(polyurea grease

FREQUENCY OF LUBRICATION &


REMARKS
14875 h

MOBIL
45g

POLYREX EM
(polyurea grease

Date : 16 11 2010
Phone:86-0311-80908102
Fax :86-0311-80908116

20000 h

45g

11859 h
MOBIL

34g

20000 h

45g

11859 h
MOBIL

34g

20000 h

ELECTRIC MOTOR WIRING DIAGRAM

SINGLE SPEED 380V 60HZ MOTOR:

WEG INDSTRIAS S/A

INDEX
Item No.

Description

Datasheets (Pump & Motor), Performance Curve

Installation Drawing

Assembly Drawing

Lifting Diagram

ITP

Ultrasonic Flaw Detection Specification For Shaft Parts

Welding Process Specification

Material Report For Main Parts

Ultrasonic Flaw Detection Report

10

Inspection Report For Parts

11

Inspection Record For Assembly

12

Inspection Record For Painting

13

Inspection Record For Packing

14

Hydraulic Pressure Test Report

15

Performance Test Procedure

16

Performance Test Details Sheet

17

Performance Test Report

18

Vibration Report

19

Noise Report

20

Pump IOM

21

Motor IOM

22

Long Term Storage Instructions

23

Spare Parts List for Operation and 1 Year (Un-priced)

24

Pump Lubrication Schedule

25

Motor Lubrication Schedule

26

Packing List

27

Certification of Conformance

28

Motor Wiring Diagram

CERTIFIED FOR
CONSTRUCTION
By: Wang Zhao (Wendy)
Date: 25 October 2010
Mfr:SHIJIAZHUANGKINGDA
PUMP

Inspection & Test Plan


Toromocho Project, PO No.: R05323-P-001A
Shijiazhuang Kingda Pump Industry Group Co., Ltd
Project Doc No.: KD-ITP, Rev.01, Date: 18th October, 2010

Inspection and Test Plan


PO No.: R05323-P-001A, Equipment Name: Hard Metal Slurry Pumps
Supervision
Acceptance

Review

Executive

Contractor

Doc.
Liability

No.

1.1

Test Item

Criteria

Methods

Doc.

Doc.

Time

Management

Acceptance of Contract Documents


Signed Contract and

Check the Contract and

Requirements

Vendors Sales

Requirements

Requirements

by the Contract

Department

Dimensional

Certified Drawings and

Drawings and Document

Drawings submitted

Vendors Sales

Drawings

Documents

Inspection

by Vendor

Department

Contract Inspection

Contractor/Owner

1.2

Owner
Time

Inspection

Signature

Acceptance

Time

Inspection &

Signature

Item

Contractor/Owner

Inspection on Raw Materials and Purchased Parts


JB/T8096-1998
GB9439-1998
(ASTM A48-2003)
GB1348-1998
(ASTM A536-2003)
GB2100-2002

Material Composition

(ASTM A743/743a-1993a)
Inspection

of

raw

Analysis and Mechanical


Visual inspection, Chemical test,

Comply with the

Spectrometer, General gauge

Standards

GB/T8263-1999

2.1
materials

Contractor
After arrival at

Quality Management

Factory

Dept.

Purchase

Prosperities Report,

(ASTM A532M-99)

Product Compliance

GB699-1988

Certificate

Dept.

(ASTM A36/A36M-2005)
SBB121.1-29-1997
SBB125.1-28-1997
SBB302.1-12-2008
SBB0158-2003

2.2

Contract Technical

Visual inspection, check Product

Comply with

Requirements

Compliance Certificate

Contract technical

Bearings

After arrival at

Quality

Contractor

Factory

Management

Purchase

Product Compliance

No. 239, Tianshan Street, Shijiazhuang City, Hebei Province, China


Tel: +86 311 80908109
Fax: +86 311 80908116
Email: w_zhao72@163.com

Inspection & Test Plan


Toromocho Project, PO No.: R05323-P-001A
Shijiazhuang Kingda Pump Industry Group Co., Ltd
Project Doc No.: KD-ITP, Rev.01, Date: 18th October, 2010
requirement
Comply with
2.3

Contract Technical

Visual inspection, check Product

Requirements

Compliance Certificate

WEG Motors

Dept.

Quality

Contractor

Management

Purchase

Dept.

Dept.

Quality

Contractor

Management

Production

Dept.

Dept.

After arrival at
Contract technical

Product Compliance
Factory

requirement
3

Dept.

Inspection and Test in Pump Production Process


SBB139-2001

Material Composition

Inspection Before
3.1
Casting

Comply with the


SBB131-1998

Spectrometer

Analysis and Mechanical

Before Pouring

Standards
Prosperities Report

SBB122-2000
SBB139-2001
SBB122-2000

Spectrometer,

SBB131-1998

Carbon-Sulfur Analyzer,

Material Composition
Comply with the

3.2

Castings

Standards
GB1348-1988

Contractor
After

Quality Management

heat treatment

Dept.

Production

Analysis and Mechanical

Chemical Test, General Gauge

Prosperities Report

Dept.

(ASTM A536-2003)

3.3

Quality

Contractor

Management

Production

Dept.

Dept.

During

Quality

Contractor

Machining

Management

Production

Process

Dept.

Dept.

Quality

Contractor

Management

Production

Dept.

Dept.

Quality

Contractor

Management

Production

Dept.

Dept.

SBB131-1998

Hardness Tester,

Comply with the

Heat Treatment

After

SBB165-2009

Universal Tester

Standards

Report

heat treatment

Heat Treatment

Comply with the


SBB2105-87
Inspection in

General Tools,

Standards and

Machining Dimension

Special Tools

Drawing

Inspection Record

SBB061-2003

3.4
Machining Process

Drawing Requirements
Requirements

Impeller Static
3.5

SBB061-2003

4.1

Shafft Inspection

YB-T036.T-92

Impeller Static Blancing

Static Balance

Standard

Report

Test

Balancing Test Frame

Balancing,

3.6

Comply with the

Comply with the

Shaft Ultrasonics

Shaft Inspection

Standard

Detection Report

Test

Ultrasonic Detection

Assembly, Test, Painting and Packing

Assembly

SBB2103-2000

Comply with the

Clearance Inspection

Standards and

Record in Assembly

General Gauge

Quality

Management

Contractor

After Assembly

No. 239, Tianshan Street, Shijiazhuang City, Hebei Province, China


Tel: +86 311 80908109
Fax: +86 311 80908116
Email: w_zhao72@163.com

Dept.

Production

Inspection & Test Plan


Toromocho Project, PO No.: R05323-P-001A
Shijiazhuang Kingda Pump Industry Group Co., Ltd
Project Doc No.: KD-ITP, Rev.01, Date: 18th October, 2010
Drawing

SBB064-2004

Dept.

Requirements
Drawing Requirements
GB/T5656-94,
Hydraulic
4.2

Contractor
Visual Inspection,

Comply with the

Hydraulic Pressure Test

After Assembly,

Quality Management

Pressure gauge

standards

Report

Witness Point

Dept.

Production

SBB064-1998,
Pressure Test
(HI 1.6-2000/API610)

Dept.

Contract Technical
Requirements
GB3216-2005
(HI 1.6-2000/

Comply with the

ASME B73.1M/B73.2M)

Standards and

Pump Performance

After Assembly,

Quality

JB/T8097-1999

Contract Technical

Running Test Report

Witness Point

Dept.

GB3214-91,

Requirements

Performance
4.3

Contractor

Noise

Management
Production

Pump Test Station

Vibration

Dept.

GB10890,
GB10889
SBB064-2004
Contract Technical

Comply with the


Contractor

4.4

Requirements SBB097-2008

Visual Inspection,

Standards and

Assembly Inspection

SBB0159-1998

Coating Thickness Meter

Contract Technical

Record

Painting

Quality

Management
Production

After Painting
Dept.

Dept.
JB/T4297-1992

Requirements

Contract Technical
Comply with the
Requirements

Contractor
Standards and

4.5

Packing

SBB0157-1997

Assembly Inspection

Visual Inspection

Quality

Contract Technical

Management
Production

After Packing
Dept.

Record

SBB0167-2009

Dept.
Requirements

GB/T13384-1992
5

Relese for Shippment


Release for
Release for

5.1

Contract requirements

As per Contract Requirements

shipment from

Hold Point

shipment
Owner

No. 239, Tianshan Street, Shijiazhuang City, Hebei Province, China


Tel: +86 311 80908109
Fax: +86 311 80908116
Email: w_zhao72@163.com

ULTRASONIC FLAW DETECTION


SPECIFICATION
FOR
SHAFT PARTS

TOROMOCHO PROJECT

Supplier:

SHIJIAZHUANG KINGDA PUMP INDUSTRY GROUP CO., LTD

Reviewed And Approved:

Date:

November, 2011

SHIJIAZHUANG KINGDA PUMP INDUSTRY GROUP CO., LTD


ULTRASONIC FLAW DETECTION SPECIFICATION
Doc No.: WPS-UD-2011, Date: Nov, 2011, Rev 00

GENERAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION


FOR ULTRASONIC FLAW DETECTIOIN FOR SHAFT PARTS
1. General Provision
1.1 Application Scope
This Specification applies for the testing of internal incontinuity of forgings sourced by Kingda by using A
Type Pulse Reflection Ultrasonic Detection method.
This Specification is not applied to work piece of austenite coarse grained.
1.2 Acceptance Standard
GB/T 4162 Forged And Rolled Steel Bars - Method For Ultrasonic Testing
GB/T 7736 Ultrasonic Inspecting Method For Macro-Structure And Imperfection Of Steel
1.3 If special requirements, inspection and acceptance will be carried as per Standards in relative
agreements, drawing and process.
1.4 Requirements for Inspectors
The inspectors should have Ultrasonic Flaw Detection Technology Certification, and the Inspector who will
sign the Report must be qualified for II Grade or Above Certification.
2. Detection Equipment And Instruments
2.1 Ultrasonic Flaw Detector
The ultrasonic flaw detector should be tested for its fuction as per the methods specified in JB/T
10061-1999, and its quota should be meet following:
a). Surplus Sensitivity: N36dB
b). Vertical Linearity Tolerance: D6%
c). Horizontal Linearity Tolerance: 1%
d). Dynamic Range: 30dB.
2.2 Probe
Usually straight beam probe is selected for detection; angle beam probe is selected for assistant detection.
The operation frequency of probe must meet the requirements to penetrate and explore the work piece,
nominal frequency of 2-5MHz is used, and probe crystal diameter or side length is 10-25mm.
2.3 Coupling Medium
Coupling medium whichever can give good coupling effect and is not harmful to body and work piece
should be selected.
The same coupling medium must be used for adjustment, calibration and inspection of equipments.
NO. 239, TIANSHAN STREET, SHIJIAZHUANG CITY, HEBEI PROVINCE, CHINA

SHIJIAZHUANG KINGDA PUMP INDUSTRY GROUP CO., LTD


ULTRASONIC FLAW DETECTION SPECIFICATION
Doc No.: WPS-UD-2011, Date: Nov, 2011, Rev 00

2.4 Test Block


When test forged parts, the test block should be selected according to probe and condition of surface to be
detected, for example, CSI standard test block.
Equipment can also be adjusted according to test block as per GB/T 4162 or GB/T 7736.
3. Detection
3.1 Detection Method
Detection method is generally P-wave reflection, SH-wave reflection can be added if necessary.

A: Necessary detecting direction


B: Detecting direction which needs to be negotiated
Detection At Axial And Circumferential Direction For Shaft Parts
3.2 Detection Time
Usually the detection should be carried after entry of source parts into plant or after heat treatment.
If there any special requirements, the detection should be carried as per special time.
3.3 Detection Procedure
3.3.1 Treatment on Surface of Work Piece
Usually the roughness of surface of work piece should be R06.3m; Roughness may be enlarged for
coarse surface, but not more than 12.5m.
The flaws as mill scale, dirties, paint and pit which can influence the acoustic coupling must be removed or
machined.
3.3.2 Adjustment of Instrument
3.3.2.1 Adjustment of Scan Speed
Generally it is required that forward base of first bottom wave should be not more than 80% of width of
oscilloscope screen in order to observe the situation of other signals after first bottom wave.
3.3.2.2 Adjustment of Sustained Sensitivity
For the work piece with thickness of position tested 3N, bottom wave adjustment method can be used;
For the work piece with thickness of position tested 3N or the surface is very rough, test pad adjustment
NO. 239, TIANSHAN STREET, SHIJIAZHUANG CITY, HEBEI PROVINCE, CHINA

SHIJIAZHUANG KINGDA PUMP INDUSTRY GROUP CO., LTD


ULTRASONIC FLAW DETECTION SPECIFICATION
Doc No.: WPS-UD-2011, Date: Nov, 2011, Rev 00

method can be used.


When the surface shape and roughness of test pad is different from the work piece, coupling compensation
and attenuation compensation methods can be used.
3.3.2.3 Adjustment of Scan Sensitivity
6dB should be amplified based on the inspection sensitivity in order to easily find the defects, but estimation
on the defects should be based on the inspection sensitivity level.
3.4 Inspection Frequency
3.4.1 If no special requirement, the sample test should be made as per SBB302.1-2008.
3.4.2 If any special requirements, the test should be made as per requirements.
3.4.3 For the tested work piece, whole detecting should be made.
3.5 Scan Detection
3.5.1 Scan Type
Usually whole scan should be used.
3.5.2 Scan Speed
In order to ensure the defects can be clearly found, the scan speed should not more than 150mm/s.
3.5.3 Scan Distance
It is required that 15% overlapping should be done between two scans.
3.6 Calibration of Instruments
After detection, the instrument should be calibrated for sensitivity; if the sensitivity can not meet the
requirements, calibration should be done.
4. Estimation of Defects
Usually defects will be estimated according to the reflection and bottom reflection results, including defect
position and size, if necessary, the nature of defects can be estimated.
4.1 Estimation of Defect Position
To determine the surface position of defect according to the probe work position;
To determine he depth of defects according to that tested in oscilloscope screen.
4.2 Estimation of Defect Size
4.2.1 For flat defect of small wafer size, equivalent size of defect should be estimated according to the echo
margin shown in oscilloscope screen.
4.2.2 For flat defect of large wafer size, the length and area of defect should be estimated by 6dB or half
wave height method.
NO. 239, TIANSHAN STREET, SHIJIAZHUANG CITY, HEBEI PROVINCE, CHINA

SHIJIAZHUANG KINGDA PUMP INDUSTRY GROUP CO., LTD


ULTRASONIC FLAW DETECTION SPECIFICATION
Doc No.: WPS-UD-2011, Date: Nov, 2011, Rev 00

4.2.3 For the defect of volume type, circumferential direction detection method can be used.
5. Quality Estimation
Estimation should be made as per GB/T 4162 and GB/T 7736; if any, special requirements can be followed.
After the detection, if disputes, it can be confirmed by low-power etch test.
6. Inspection Record And Report
6.1 Inspection report include: specification, grade, heat number, standard, quality grade and quantity,
issued by who and date, etc.
6.2 Inspection record should include position of defect, size of equivalent, distance and length of defects,
and drop of bottom wave, etc.

NO. 239, TIANSHAN STREET, SHIJIAZHUANG CITY, HEBEI PROVINCE, CHINA

SHIJIAZHUANG KINGDA PUMP INDUSTRY GROUP CO., LTD


WELDING PROCESS SPECIFICATION FOR REPAIR OF CASTINGS
Doc No.: WPS-KD-2011, Date: Oct, 2011, Rev 00

Process Specification of Welding


1. Preparation Before Welding
1.1 Operator must be very well acquainted with the drawings, process specification and relative
documents.
1.2 Operator must carefully check the material grades and dimensions of parts and casting
which are going to be welded.
1.3 Calibers and scales must be marked with inspection certificate. The tools and auxiliary
devices must be reliable.
1.4 The welding machine must be in good condition, grounding and good in insulation.
1.5 Select welding materials as per specification.
1.6 Welding rods must be complete dry, if the rods are wet, make dry treatment as following
table:
Dry Methods for Welding Rod
Type of Rod

Dry Temperature ()

Dry Time (hour)

acid-type

70150

11.5

alkaline-type

250350

12

Note: usually, the acid rod may not be dried before using, the alkaline rod (including S.S. rod) must be dried
treatment before using.

2. Welding
2.1 Clear water, oil stain, rust and burrs within 20mm to 30mm at two sides of weld seam and
bevel before welding.
2.2 For the parts to be beveled, the shape and dimension of bevel should conform to GB985-88
Standard.
2.3 Select welding rod as following Specification Table:
Selection of Welding Rod
Thickness of Welding Part (mm)

Diameter of Rod (mm)

3.2

412

3.24.0

12

4.0

2.4 Welding Current Selection of Common Welding Rod as following:


Reference Current (A)
NO. 239, TIANSHAN STREET, SHIJIAZHUANG CITY, HEBEI PROVINCE, CHINA

SHIJIAZHUANG KINGDA PUMP INDUSTRY GROUP CO., LTD


WELDING PROCESS SPECIFICATION FOR REPAIR OF CASTINGS
Doc No.: WPS-KD-2011, Date: Oct, 2011, Rev 00
Rod Dia.

2.5

3.2

4.0

5.0

E4303

7090

90130

160220

220270

E4303

7090

90130

160190

180230

(mm)
Welding Grade

Note: upper limit for thick plate; the current of horizontal welding is about 10% less than downward welding.

2.5 General Principle for Welding Procedure


2.5.1 It must not produce rigid constraint force against the others of welding seam at the
beginning welding.
2.5.2 One end of each seam should be kept shrink freely at welding.
2.5.3 If the seam length is 1000mm for manual arc welding, generally continuous straight
welding method is used; back-step welding or section back-step welding may be used when
length is 1000mm.
2.6 Generating the arc: it is forbidden to generate the arc on the machined surface and locating
surface; the arc should be generated on the run-on plate and then transit to workpiece.
2.7 Arc Manipulation
2.7.1 Screw type is suitable for the first layer with any welding position and thin plate welding.
2.7.2 Wave type is suitable for the surface welding of downward welding, horizontal welding,
and overhead welding.
2.7.3 8 shape type is suitable for downward and surface welding.
2.7.4 Zigzag type is suitable for horizontal welding.
2.8 Welding: before welding, the current should be regulated on the test plate till the current is
suitable.
2.8.1 Downward welding: the welding seam is at on horizontal level. arc manipulation should be
steady and fully fill the arc crater.
2.8.2 Vertical welding: the welding seam is vertical to the level ground. When vertical welding,
short arc small current should be used, dont swing the rod bigly.
2.8.3 Overhead welding and horizontal welding: welding seam is horizontal or overhead
position. Shortest arc and smallest current should be kept to ensure fused drop transmitted to
metal.
2.9 Correction and Cleaning of Weldment
NO. 239, TIANSHAN STREET, SHIJIAZHUANG CITY, HEBEI PROVINCE, CHINA

SHIJIAZHUANG KINGDA PUMP INDUSTRY GROUP CO., LTD


WELDING PROCESS SPECIFICATION FOR REPAIR OF CASTINGS
Doc No.: WPS-KD-2011, Date: Oct, 2011, Rev 00

2.9.1 Make the correction on the deforms produced in welding with flame correction or
mechanical correction.
2.9.2 Clean spatters, slags and flashes after welding.
2.9.3 The key parts and rigid parts should be distressing tempering treatment after welding.
3. Quality Requirements
3.1 Inspect the weldments for surface appearance and quality as per drawing and specification.
3.2 Welding seam should conform to Welding Seam Quality Standard.

NO. 239, TIANSHAN STREET, SHIJIAZHUANG CITY, HEBEI PROVINCE, CHINA

SHIJIAZHUANG KINGDA PUMP INDUSTRY GROUP CO., LTD


WELDING PROCESS SPECIFICATION FOR REPAIR OF CASTINGS
Doc No.: WPS-KD-2011, Date: Oct, 2011, Rev 00

Process Specification for Weld Repair of Iron Casting


1. Permission Condition for Welding Repair
1.1 When the castings need to be welded repair, it must be approved by Quality Management
Department.
1.2 The permissive condition for the casting welded repair should conform to SBB122 <Pump
Casting Technical Conditions>, drawing and requirements in Contract.
2. Selection of Welding Method
Generally arc welding is used for casting weld repair, arc welding is divided into cold welding
and heat welding.
Application Range: Generally, welding repair will be used at non-machined position which has
low requirement for stress or strength or for defects found in and after machining or fine
machining. Because the correction of heat treatment after weld repair can not be used, in the
condition that its function (quality and precision) will not be influenced by the deformation or
stress caused by partial heating, cold arc welding may be used; when the heating material will
easily crack, heat arc welding can be used.
For iron casting, cold arc welding usually is used.
3.

Preparation before Welding

3.1 Clean up the impurities at defect of casting with shovel, chisel, grinding wheel or other
methods, make it to be V shape with 60-80 or X bevel to expose the metal, sharp angle must
be rounded. All existing web cracks were arrested by drilling 4-8mm holes at the ends of the
cracks.
3.2 Remove the oil dirty at and around the defects with solution or flame.
3.3 Brush muddy water all around defect to avoid weld drop attach the machined surface.
3.4 Use Z308 pure nickel rod (3.2, 4.2), this rod is required to be kept for 1 hour at temperature of
80-120.
3.5 Generally, preheating is not required for cold arc welding; if preheating required, written
approval must be obtained from Quality Department.
4. Welding Repair
4.1 Selection of Rod Diameter and Welding Current
Rod Diameter (mm)

Welding Current (A)

NO. 239, TIANSHAN STREET, SHIJIAZHUANG CITY, HEBEI PROVINCE, CHINA

SHIJIAZHUANG KINGDA PUMP INDUSTRY GROUP CO., LTD


WELDING PROCESS SPECIFICATION FOR REPAIR OF CASTINGS
Doc No.: WPS-KD-2011, Date: Oct, 2011, Rev 00

3.2

70-100

4.2

100-140

4.2 The seams should be successively welded layer by layer. Welding length of single layer is
10-15mm, beat the welding seam with 0.5-1.0 kg hammer to make the seam to be spot shape;
after the temperature of welded position is cooled down to 100, then proceed to welding.
When the welding repair is multi-layer, repeat the operation as single layer welding.
5. Cleaning After Welding
Trim the welding seam on the machined and nonmachined surface with grinding wheel, and
clear the weld drop on the casting and machined surface.
6. Inspection After Welding
6.1 For the requirements of relieving of stress, make inspection after the heat treatment.
6.2 Inspect the grinded effect of welded position to check if it can meet the requirements for
welding repair.
6.3 If the welding position is on non machined surface, check if the welded position is as smooth
as casting itself.
6.4 If the welding position is on the machined surface, check if the welded junction can meet
the requirements of machining.
6.5 Besides required NDT, usually visual inspection is just needed to conform if the weld repairs
meet the quality requirements, defects are left after welding.
6.6 For the casting sustaining the liquid pressure or air pressure, the air tight hydrostatic test
or gas inspection.

NO. 239, TIANSHAN STREET, SHIJIAZHUANG CITY, HEBEI PROVINCE, CHINA


Performance Test Procedure of Centrifugal Pump

1.
2.
3.
1. Preparation before Test
1.1 Define items to be tested;
1.2 Define test criteria and acceptance standard
1.3 Define test field and select test bed

1.
2.
3.
4.
2. Install Pump on Test Bed
2.1 Install pump, motor (if any, gear box), pump intake pipe and discharge pipe;
2.2 Connect pressure gauge, flow meter and electrical meters;
2.3 Connect shaft seal water, cover the motor with water-proof facilities;
2.4 Connect power supply cable with motor, make trial running, and paste
light-sensitive paper for speed.

1.
2.
3.
4.
3. Test
3.1 Start the test, check rise in bearing temperature, leakage of shaft seal, vibration,
and noise;
3.2 Record pressure of suction and discharge, flow rate, current, voltage, power,
speed, etc;
3.3 Draft performance curve;
3.4 Make judgment on the test result.


Test Details Sheet

1 / Pump Details

R05323-P-001A

P.O. No.:

245-PP-108

Equipment No.
1036143-0001-06

Kingda Contract No.

NJA064

Doc. No.
M50KSG-DB/T

Pump Model

2 /Motor Details

WEG

Make

1010566618

Serial No.
444/5T

Motor Model

245-PP-108-M1

Motor No.
55KW

Motor Rating

1785

Motor Speed

3 /Test Details

10:00

Pump Started

11:00

Pump Stopped
42

Bearing Temp.

2011.12.30

Test Date
16

Ambient Temp.

13

Water Temp.

4 /Performance Test Data Tolerance & Standard


/Parameter

/Flow

/Head

/Efficiency

/Standard: ANSI/HI 1.6-B

5 Mechanical Run Tolerance & Standard


5.1 /Vibration

/Standard: JB/T8097-1999
/As per Order Spec.: 85dbA/Max 85

5.2 /Noise Level


dB(A)
/Standard: JB/T8096-1998
5.3 /Rise in Temp. Acceptance
/Measured Temp.

SERIES (M/R) KSH/KSG SLURRY PUMP

INSTALLATION, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE

MANUAL

SHIJIAZHUANG KINGDA PUMP INDUSTRY GROUP CO.,LTD


2010

Series (M/R) KSH/KSG Slurry Pump


Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual
Shijiazhuang Kingda Pump Industry Group Co.,Ltd

Content

1. General Introduction....2

2. Construction.3

3. Installation..6

4. Operation..12

5. Maintenance.17

6. Possible Failures, Cause and Solutions...20

Series (M/R) KSH/KSG Slurry Pump


Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual
Shijiazhuang Kingda Pump Industry Group Co.,Ltd

1. GENERAL INTRODUCTION
Series (M/R) KSH/KSG Pump is also called High Efficiency Slurry Pump. Because these pumps
are fitted with thick wear-resistant parts and heavy frame, so they are suitable to pump the slurry
of highly abrasion, high or low content and high head. During the max permissible working
pressure range, these pumps can be operated in serial. They also can transport the corrosive
slurries.
TYPE DEMONSTRATION:

Frame Type/Lubrication Type


Pump Type
Pump Discharge Diameter. (mm)
Metal Lined/Rubber Lined
Example: M200KSH (/KSG)-FA (/B)
M/R

M for Metal Liner, R for Rubber Liner

200

Discharge Diameter is 200 mm

KSH

Kingda Heavy-duty Slurry Pump

KSG

Kingda High-head Slurry Pump

Frame Type

A/B

A for oil lubrication, B for grease lubrication

Series (M/R) KSH/KSG Slurry Pump


Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual
Shijiazhuang Kingda Pump Industry Group Co.,Ltd

2. CONSTRUCTION
2.1 Pump Head (See Figure 1 and Figure 2)
Both Series (M/R) KSH/KSG metal-lined and rubber-lined pump have construction of
double-casing. They have the replaceable wear-resistant metal liner or rubber liner (including the
impeller, liner, frame plate, etc). Pump casing and cover are made of ductile cast iron; their
construction is vertically split and connected with the bolts. The casing is connected with the
frame with the bolt. When the suction of the pump is installed horizontally, the discharge can be
orientated in any 8 positions at 45 intervals. The front and rear cover plates of impeller have the
back vanes to decrease the leakage and raise the service life of the pumps. Viewing the pump
from the drive side, it should rotate clockwise.

Figure 1 Construction Drawing of MKSH/MKSG (Metal-lined)


Discharge diameter<40mm, open type impeller; Discharge diameter>40mm, enclosed type impeller.
1

Frame

Pump Cover

Cover Plate

Impeller

Liner

Pump Casing

Frame Plate

Packing Box

Series (M/R) KSH/KSG Slurry Pump


Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual
Shijiazhuang Kingda Pump Industry Group Co.,Ltd

Figure 2 Construction Drawing of RKSH/RKSG (Rubber-lined)


Discharge diameter<40mm, open type impeller; Discharge diameter>40mm, enclosed type impeller.
1

Frame

Pump Cover

Cover Plate (R)

Impeller

Cover Liner

Pump Casing

Frame Liner

Packing Box

2.2 Shaft Seal


There three types of shaft seals, packing seal, expeller seal and mechanical seal.
(1) Packing Seal: simple construction and easy maintenance. Shaft seal water is required. For the
condition which does not need the expeller seal, the packing seal can be used.
(2) Expeller Seal: Expeller seal can be used on the single stage pump or the first stage pump in
serial when the suction positive pressure is not more than the discharge pressure by 10%. The
expeller seal does not require the shaft seal water, and the slurry will not be diluted, which can
reach good sealing effect.
(3) Mechanical Seal: Mechanical seal features for highly wear resistant and shock resistance. It
can get non-leak sealing effect under various bad conditions, and be easily installed and

Series (M/R) KSH/KSG Slurry Pump


Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual
Shijiazhuang Kingda Pump Industry Group Co.,Ltd

replaced.
2.3 Transmission Part
During the bearing assembly of (M/R) KSH/KSG Pump, the pump has large diameter, high
stiffness and short cantilever, which will not bend and vibrate under the bad working conditions.
According to the different transmitted power, heavy single-row or double-row tapered roller
bearings can be selected. These bearings can stand the max axial and radial load of the pump. Oil
lubrication is used for the bearing. Seal cover, labyrinth bush, water-proof cover and guard cover
are fitted at the both sides of the bearing body, to prevent the impurities and water from entering
into the bearing and ensure the normal and safe operation of the bearing.

Series (M/R) KSH/KSG Slurry Pump


Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual
Shijiazhuang Kingda Pump Industry Group Co.,Ltd

3. INSTALLATION
3.1 Installation of Bearing Assembly (See Figure 3 and 4)
Heat the bearing inner ring before assembly, the temperature is not allowed to be over 120 and
the inner ring must contact the shaft shoulder closely. For the double row tapered roller bearing,
the inner ring, the outer ring and position bush is a package, not allowed to exchange with the
respective parts of the like bearings. For frame A, B, C, D, E, F, G, the bearing is single row
tapered roller type; when in assembly, adjust the pad at the bearing end cover to ensure the axial
clearance. The axial clearance should be in accordance with the following table:
Frame

FG

Axial Clearance (mm)

0.05-0.15

0.1-0.2

0.15-0.25

0.18-0.28

0.4-0.6

0.5-0.6

For frame R, S, ST, T, TU, U, the bearing at the pump end is double row tapered roller type and
motor end is cylindrical roller bearing, there is no need to adjust the axial clearance for these
bearings.
Proper grease has been filled when assembling the bearing. The seal at the bearing end is
labyrinth ring or bush type; notice the relative arrangement of breach on the diametrical
direction when assembling the labyrinth ring.
Recommend using lithium base grease 2# or 3# and filled quantity as following:
Frame
B

R.

S.

T.

RS

ST

TU

Lubrication
Drive End (g)

30

50

100

200

500

1150

200

500

1150

Driven End (g)

30

50

100

200

500

1150

400

1000

2300

Series (M/R) KSH/KSG Slurry Pump


Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual
Shijiazhuang Kingda Pump Industry Group Co.,Ltd

Figure 3 Constructions Drawing of R, S, ST, TU, T, U Frame Bearing Assembly


1

Labyrinth Bush

Oil Cup

Bearing Body

End Cover

End Cover Seal Pad

Shaft

Figure 4

Bearing

Construction Drawing of A,B,C,D,E,F,G Frame Bearing Assembly

Labyrinth Bush

Oil Cup

Grease Blocker

Bearing Body

Bearing

Adjusting Pad

End Cover

Shaft

3.2 Installation of Shaft Packing Seal


Shaft packing seal assembly includes packing box, shaft sleeve, position bush, seal ring, packing,
packing pad, lantern ring, front lantern ring and packing gland. Packing seal assembly is divided
into lantern ring structure and front lantern ring structure. Front lantern ring structure is the
standard-installed type, and you can see Figure 5 (1) and Figure 5 (2) for the installation drawing.
Lantern ring structure should be used for the condition of suction, for example of installation way
7

Series (M/R) KSH/KSG Slurry Pump


Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual
Shijiazhuang Kingda Pump Industry Group Co.,Ltd

in Figure 6 (1) and (2). Take notice that the seal ring must be in the right position between shaft
sleeve and position bush, and the shaft sleeve and impeller.
Figure 5 (1) and Figure 6 (1) are the construction drawing for the pump of discharge diameter
less than 150mm;
Figure 5 (2) and Figure 6 (2) are the construction drawing for the pump of discharge diameter
more than 500mm.
Selection of the packing: when the working pressure of the pump is below 1MPa (10kgf/cm2),
asbestos fibers dip mica packing is usually used; asbestos fibers soaked PTFE packing is usually
used when the pressure is higher than 1MPa (10kgf/cm2) or pumping the corrosive slurry.

Figure 5(1) Packing Seal Construction

Figure 6(1) Packing Seal Construction

Standard Type

For Suction-Up Condition

Shaft Sleeve

Packing

Shaft Sleeve

Packing

Packing Box

Front Lantern Ring

Packing Box

Lantern Ring

Seal Ring

Locating Bush

Seal Ring

Locating Bush

Packing Pad

Series (M/R) KSH/KSG Slurry Pump


Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual
Shijiazhuang Kingda Pump Industry Group Co.,Ltd

Figure 5(2) Packing Seal Construction

Figure 6(2) Packing Seal Construction

Standard Type

For Suction-Up Condition

Shaft Sleeve

Packing

Shaft Sleeve

Packing

Packing Box

Front Lantern Ring

Packing Box

Lantern Ring

Packing Pad

3.3 Installation of Expeller Seal


Expeller seal assembly includes expeller, release cover shaft sleeve, lantern ring, packing pad,
packing, packing gland, etc. Every part must be installed at right position as in Figure 7.

Figure 7 Seal Construction of Expeller


1

Packing Gland

Release Cover

Expeller

Shaft Sleeve

Series (M/R) KSH/KSG Slurry Pump


Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual
Shijiazhuang Kingda Pump Industry Group Co.,Ltd
5

Seal Ring

Packing

Lantern Ring

Packing Pad

3.4 Installation of Mechanical Seal


Mechanical seal assembly includes Cartridge type mechanical seal, seal box, seal ring, etc.
Strictly install the mechanical seal according to the Manual. See Figure 8 for construction.

Figure 8 Construction of Mechanical Seal


1

Seal Box

Seal Ring

Mechanical Seal

3.5 Installation of Pump Head


Firstly fit the pump body on the frame, then put the shaft seal assembly into the pump body; fit
the rear guard plate and impeller with rear hanging pipe and rear set nut; fit the liner with the
hanging beam and use the bolts to press the liner against the pump body; fit the front guard the
plate into the pump cover, bolt the pump cover, front plate together with the pump body and
fasten all the bolts and nuts. For rubber liner pump, the front liner should be firstly put into the
pump cover and fasten the bolts, then assembly the pump body and pump cover; coat the soapy
water and rubber lubricant at the contact surface for the easy assembly; take notice that the seal
pads should be put at the right position and compressed; to assure the correct position and easy
assembly, the rear guard plate and rear liner hang pipe *302, rear guard plate and rear liner
position nut *302 and liner hanging beam *304 can be used. Following Figures show the
10

Series (M/R) KSH/KSG Slurry Pump


Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual
Shijiazhuang Kingda Pump Industry Group Co.,Ltd

methods.
The pump with ST, T and TU has release ring; before dismantling, the three hex bolts should be
removed and screw them into thither bolt hole on the release ring to jack the three pressure pad
on the shaft to loose the impeller.

Figure 9
1. Rear Guard Plate and Rear Liner Hang Pipe x302
2. Rear Guard Plate and Rear Liner Setting Nut x303
3. Liner Hang Beam x304

11

Series (M/R) KSH/KSG Slurry Pump


Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual
Shijiazhuang Kingda Pump Industry Group Co.,Ltd

4. OPERATION
4.1 Startup
Check the whole machine unit as following procedure before start up:
(1): The pump should be installed on the solid base to bear the whole pump weight to absorb the
vibration and fasten all the foundation bolts.
(2): The pipeline and valves should be separately supported. There is seal pad at the pump flange.
Notice that the pump metal liner may be higher than flange surface when fastening the bolts, and
the bolts should be not over-fastened to avoid damaging the seal pad.
(3): Rotate the pump shaft in accordance with the pump rotation direction, the shaft should drive
the impeller without the friction; if not, the impeller clearance should be adjusted.
(4): Check the motor rotation direction to make sure it can drive the pump rotate toward the
arrow. Reverse rotation may cause the impeller screw stripped and damage the pump, so its
forbidden.
(5): For direct coupling drive, the pump shaft and motor shaft should be strictly centered. The
pump shaft and motor shaft should be in parallel for the belt transmission and adjust the pulley
position to make it vertical to the belt. For the pulley unit of SPA Type and
and

SPB
SPC

SPA
SPB

Type, SPB Type

Type, the adjustment of the pulley should reach the requirements of 1=2 in Figure 10.

(6): A short removable pipe should be fit at the suction of the pump, its length is enough to
disassemble the pump cover, replace the wearing parts and inspect the pump. See the Outline
Dimensional Drawing for the length of this short pipe.
(7): Check shaft seal: for the pumps of expeller seal, when the oil cup is fit with the release gland,
the lubricating grease should be filled through the oil cup; and Sodium-calcium grease is

12

Series (M/R) KSH/KSG Slurry Pump


Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual
Shijiazhuang Kingda Pump Industry Group Co.,Ltd

recommended.
For the pumps of packing seal, firstly turn on the shaft sealing water system to check if the water
quantity and pressure is proper before the startup of the pump; adjust the packing gland set
screw to regulate the tension of the packing; adjust shaft seal water (that the leak quantity at the
packing gland is drop by drop); if too tight, the shaft sleeve will heat easily and power will be
consumed more; if too loose, the leak quantity will be very large. The shaft seal water pressure
usually is higher than pump discharge pressure by 3.5X10-2MPa (0.35kgf/cm2). See following
table for shaft seal water quantity:
Frame Type

E.F

R.RS

S.ST

T.TU

Shaft Seal Water Quantity (L/s)

0.15

0.25

0.35

0.55

0.70

1.2

0.70

1.2

1.6

2.1

(8) Adjustment for the Belt Pretightening Force


We recommend following method for reference:
(8.1) First calculate thee pretightening force Q:
Q=

510(2.5 C 1 ) P C 2
+ mv 2 (Newton)
C1 Z V

(8.2) Then find the e value on the curve according to the pretightening force and belt type;
e . L
(8.3) Find f through formula f=100 ;

(8.4) Find R value of respective V-belt in Table 1, and adjust the center distance of both pulleys
according to the methods in Figure 11 to reach the required pretightening force. Usually, if the
overall reduction is no more than f when loading the Newton force, it reaches the required
pretightening force Q.
In the formula:
Q: the minimum pretightening force of each belt in the static state, unit is Newton;
13

Series (M/R) KSH/KSG Slurry Pump


Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual
Shijiazhuang Kingda Pump Industry Group Co.,Ltd

f:

Overall reduction of belt, unit is mm

C1: Angle coefficient is about 0.9


C2: Operation coefficient is about 1.4
L: Center distance of pulleys
P: Motor Rated Power, KW
Z: V-Belt Quantity
V: linear velocity, m/s
m: Centrifugal force coefficient (see Figure 1)
e: Reduction e of each 100mm hang length, see Figure 11.
Table 1
Type

SPA

SPB

SPC

SPZ

R (N)

60

90

120

30

0.12

0.20

0.38

0.08

Adjust the V-belt till the final pretightening force is the minimum when the load is at max; when
several belts are used at the same time, the circumference of each belt should be basically the
same to assure the equal force.

Figure 10

14

Series (M/R) KSH/KSG Slurry Pump


Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual
Shijiazhuang Kingda Pump Industry Group Co.,Ltd

Figure 11

After adjustment of the V-belt, check if the impeller can rotate normally again; if possible, start
the pump with clear water (before it begins to pump the slurry); turn on the suction pipe valve,
start the motor, check the pressure and flow quantity at the suction and discharge, check the
leakage at the packing. If the packing heats, loose the packing gland bolts to make the leakage
bigger; adjust the leakage to the specified value till the packing run-in with the shaft.
4.2 Operation
(1): Periodically check the pressure and flow quantity of shaft seal water, and adjust the packing
gland and replace the packing during the operation to assure small quantity of clean water
passing through the shaft.

15

Series (M/R) KSH/KSG Slurry Pump


Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual
Shijiazhuang Kingda Pump Industry Group Co.,Ltd

(2): Periodically check the frame. If the bearing heats at the beginning of the operation, shut
down the pump till the bearing become cool, then run it. If the bearing heats seriously and
temperature keep rising, the frame must be disassembled and examined for the cause. Usually
the impurity contained in the lubricating oil can cause the heating, so the bearing oil should be
proper and clean, and replaced periodically.
(3): The pump performance will become poorer and the efficiency will become lower with the
larger and larger clearance between impeller and front guard plate. So adjust the impeller timely
to keep the proper clearance to make the pump run in high efficiency. When the wear situation of
the pump is too bad to meet the requirements of the system, the wear parts should be replaced.
4.3 Shutdown of Pump
Let the pump to transport the clear water for some before the shutdown to clean the slurry left
inside the pump, then stop the pump, valve, packing seal water or mechanical seal water in order.

16

Series (M/R) KSH/KSG Slurry Pump


Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual
Shijiazhuang Kingda Pump Industry Group Co.,Ltd

5. MAINTENANCE
For the safe run of pump, attention must be paid to the normal maintenance as following aspects:
5.1 Maintenance of shaft seal:
For the packing seal pump, periodically check the water pressure and water quantity of shaft
packing seal. Always keep small quantity of clear water flow along with the shaft, periodically
adjust the packing gland, check and replace the packing. The shaft seal water pressure and
quantity should in accordance with the above requirements. Periodically fill the oil into the oil cup
for the expeller seal pump to lubricate the inside packing.
5.2 Adjustment of impeller:
To assure the high-efficiency of the pump, the clearance between the impeller and the front guard
plate; the clearance between impeller and front guard plate of metal liner pump should be
0.5-1mm, the clearance between the impeller and front liner should be equal to that between
impeller and rear liner.
Before adjusting the clearance, the pump should be stopped firstly, then loose the bolts of
bearing assembly and screw the nut of adjusting bolts to make the bearing assembly move
forward, at the same time, rotate the pump as per the arrow by hands till the impeller friction
with the front guard plate; for the metal liner pump, loose the nut (which was fastened) by half
circle, then fasten the nut on the adjusting bolt to make the bearing assembly move backward,
the clearance between the impeller and front guard plate should be 0.5-1mm; for the rubber liner
pump, adjust the nut of the adjusting bolts to make the bearing assembly to move forward to
contact with the front guard sleeve, then move the bearing assembly back to contact with the
back liner, and measure the total movement distance, make the half of this distance as the

17

Series (M/R) KSH/KSG Slurry Pump


Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual
Shijiazhuang Kingda Pump Industry Group Co.,Ltd

clearance of the impeller and front liner; assure the correct clearance of impeller and front and
back liner by adjusting bearing assembly position through the adjusting bolts.
After the adjustment, check if the impeller can rotate normally before startup, if bearing
assembly compress bolts and adjusting bolts are tightened; then start the pump.
5.3 Lubricating of Bearing
Correct assembly, proper lubricating and in-time maintenance will make the service life of
bearing assembly longer. Periodically check the bearing assembly, bearing and lubricant and
interval should not be over than 12 month. Fill the lubricating grease at regular intervals in
operation, the filling interval and filling quantity are relative to the pump speed, bearing size,
continuous operation time, shutdown and startup times, environmental condition and
temperatures; excess grease will cause the heating of bearing. Refer to following table for proper
lubricating schedule:
5.4 Standby pump should be rotated by 1/4 circle by hands to make the bearing stand static load
and vibration evenly

18

Series (M/R) KSH/KSG Slurry Pump


Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual
Shijiazhuang Kingda Pump Industry Group Co.,Ltd

Lubrication Schedule (in hours)

Frame

Grease

Type

Quantity

12

18

28

44

71

Bearing Speed

200

7000

300

400

600

(rpm)

800

1000

1200

1800

2000

3000

2400

1800

1500

1000

3600

2400

1800

1600

1200

900

2500

2000

1500

1200

800

500

500

5000

3600

2200

1600

1100

800

4200

2000

1800

1200

700

400

3000

2000

1400

1000

600

3800

28000

1500

900

500

300

400

R.RS

102

S.ST

132

T.TU

304

4800

3000

1800

900

621

4000

2400

1500

500

R.RS

61

8000

4800

3500

2800

2200

Motor

S.ST

74

8000

6000

3600

2400

1600

1200

End

T.TU

133

8000

7000

4500

2500

1500

192

7000

6000

4000

2000

400

100

1500

900

Pump

End

Note: Above Schedule is only applied for the normal working condition.
During the bearing assembly, the internal plug is to fill the bearing grease, and the external oil
cup is to clean the labyrinth seal. Besides the regular filling of grease, its also to fill the grease to
the oil cup to keep the labyrinth seal clean.

19

Series (M/R) KSH/KSG Slurry Pump


Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual
Shijiazhuang Kingda Pump Industry Group Co.,Ltd

6. POSSIBLE FAILURES, CAUSE AND SOLUTIONS


Failure

Cause

Solutions

Leak at the suction pipe or packing

Block the leak

Wrong rotation direction

Change the rotation direction

Impeller is broken

Replace the new impeller

Suction pipe is blocked

Remove the block

Packing gland is to tight and packing heats

Loose the packing gland bolts

Friction inside the pump

Adjust the clearance

Bearing is broken

Replace the bearing

Transmission belt is too tight

Adjust the belt

Too large flow quantity

Adjust the pump running conditions

High rotation speed, large proportion

Adjust the rotation and proportion

Misalignment or nonparallel of motor shaft and

Adjust the motor shaft and pump shaft

h f
Excessive or too little of bearing lubricating oil

Oil

Impurities is contained in the lubricating oil

Replace the new lubricating oil

Bearing is broken

Replace the new bearing

Misalignment or nonparallel of motor shaft and

Adjust the motor shaft and pump shaft

h f
Shaft is bent

Replace a new shaft

Friction inside the pump or the imbalance of

Decrease the friction and replace a new

ll
Foreign matter inside the bearing

ll
Clean the bearing

Unreasonable assembly of bearing

Replace the bearing or reassemble the

Serious abrasion of packing

b
Replace the new packing

Serious abrasion of shaft sleeve

Replace the new shaft sleeve

Seal water is not clean

Replace the clean seal water

Bearing is broken

Change new bearing

Impeller is not in balance

Change new impeller

Air entered into suction pipe, block

Remove the air and block

Uneven flow, pump empty

Improve the feeding condition

Bad foundation

Strength the foundation

Not pump the liquid

Shaft Power is to high

Overheat of bearing

Service life of bearing is short

Serious leakage at the packing

Abnormal noise and excessive vibration


of pump

quantity

should

be

as

per

20

WEG EXPORTADORA S.A.


Av. Prefeito Waldemar Grubba, 3000
89256-900 - Jaragua do Sul - SC - BRAZIL
Phone 55 (47) 3372-4000 - Fax 55 (47) 3372-4060
http://www.weg.com.br

0280.1515/03.2006

Transforming Energy
into Solutions

INSTALLATION,
OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
FOR INDUCTION
MOTORS
Frame sizes 143/5T to 586/7

THIS MANUAL IS INTENDED TO SUPPLY IMPORTANT


TOPICS THAT MUST BE FOLLOWED DURING
TRANSPORTATION, INSTALLATION, OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE OF WEG MOTORS. THEREFORE, WE
RECOMMEND READING CAREFULLY THIS MANUAL
BEFORE INSTALLING AND OPERATING THE MOTOR.
TO ENSURE PHYSICAL INTEGRITY TO THE
OPERATION AND MATERIAL PROTECTION, ALL
INFORMATION INCLUDED IN THIS MANUAL MUST
BE STRICTLY FOLLOWED.

Purchasing date:

Suppliers name

INDEX
1.
2.
3.
4.

5.

6.
7.

8.

9.

HANDLI NG AND TRANSPORTATION


RECEIVING INSPECTION
STORAGE
INSTALLATION
4.1 - Safety
4.2 - Operating Conditions
4.3 - Foundation
4.4 - Drain Holes
4.5 - Balance
4.6 - Alignment
4.7 - Couplings
4.8 - Electrical Connection
4.9 - Starting Methods
4.10 - Protection Device
4.11 - Start-Up
MAINTENANCE
5.1 - Lubrication
5.1.1 - Machines without Grease Nipples
5.1.2 - Machines Fitted with Grease Fitting
5.1.3 - Compatibility of MOBIL Polirex EM
grease with other types of grease
5.2 - Assembly and Disassembly
SPARE PARTS
VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE MOTORS
7.1 - Standard Motors
7.2 - Inverter Duty Motors
7.3 - Bearing Insulation
ADDITIONAL INSTRUCTIONS
8.1 - Hazardous Area Motors
8.1.1 - General
8.1.2 - Installation
8.1.3 - Checking and maintenance
8.1.4 - Explosion Proof Motor Repairs
WARRANTY TERMS

Invoice/Order number:

Customers name and phone:

Failure description:

Fecha de compra:
1 - HANDLING AND TRANSPORTATION

MOTORS MUST NOT BE LIFTED BY THE SHAFT,


BUT BY THE EYEBOLTS SPECIFIC FOR SUCH
PURPOSE

Nombre del proveedor:


Lifting devices, when supplied, are designed only to support
the motor. If themotor has two lifting devices then a double chain
must be used to lift it.
Lifting and lowering must be done gently without any shocks, to
avoid bearing damaged.
Nmero de la factura o pedido:

Nombre y nmero telefnico del cliente:

DURING TRANSPORTATION, MOTORS FITTED


WITH ROLLER OR ANGULAR CONTACT
BEARINGS ARE PROTECTED AGAINST BEARING
DAMAGES WITH A SHAFT LOCKING DEVICE

THIS LOCKING DEVICE MUST BE USED ON ANY


FURTHER MOTOR TRANSPORTATION, EVEN
WHEN THIS MEANS TO UNCOUPLE THE MOTOR
FROM THE DRIVEN MACHINE

2. RECEIVING INSPECTION
When receiving the motor, check if any damage has occurred
during transportation.

Descripcin de la falla:

If anything has been noticed, notify immediately the carrier, the


insurance company and WEG.
Failure in giving notice to the carrier, to the insurance company
and to WEG may result in loosing product warranty.
Do not remove the existing protecting grease from the shaft end,
nor the stoppers or plugs that close the terminal box holes, if any.
These protection items must be kept in place until the final
installation has been concluded.
After being removed from the package, a complete visual
inspection on the motor should be made:

Check if any damage has occured during transportation.


Check nameplate data.
Rotate shaft with the hand to make sure it is running freely.
Make sure the motor was not exposed to excessive dirt and
moisture during transportation and storage.
3 - STORAGE
If motors are not immediately installed, they must be stored in
dry areas, free of dust, vibrations, gases, corrosive smokes, under
constant temperature and in normal position free from other
materials.
Motor storage temperature must remain between 41F (5C) to
140F (60C), with relative humidity not exceeding 50%.
If motors are stored for more than two years, bearings must be
replaced or the lubrication grease must be totally removed after
cleaning.
Single-phase motors when kept in stock for 2 years or more
must have their capacitors replaced (if any).
WEG recommends to rotate the shaft (by hands) at least once a
month, and to measure the insulation resistance before installing
it, if motors are stored for more than 6 months or when subject
to high humidity areas.
If motor is fitted with space heaters, it is recommended to switch
them on during storage period if the relative humidity exceeds
50%.
If motor remains in stock for a long period without having the
space heaters switched-on or when installed but not in operation,
moisture/water inside the motor may condense. On these cases,
water must be drained by removing the threaded drain plugs.
When drainage is done, switch-on the space heaters and make
sure the motor is completely dry,then reinstall the drain plugs to
ensure proper Degree of Protection (see figure 1).
The space heaters should NEVER be energized while motor is
running.

9. TERMINOS DE GARANTIA
WEG ofrece garanta contra defectos de fabricacin o de
materiales para sus productos, por un perodo de 18 meses,
contados a partir de la fecha de la emisin de la factura por
parte de fb rica o del distribuidor/revendedor, teniendo como
lmite 24 meses de la fecha de fabricacin independiente de
la fecha de instala cin del motor, siempre y cuando hayan
sido satisfechos los siguientes requisitos:
- Transporte, manoseo y almacenamiento adecuados;
- Instalacin correcta y en condiciones ambientales
especficas y sin presencia de ga ses corrosivos;
- Operacin dentro de los lmites de la capacidad del motor;
- Realizacin peridica del debido mantenimiento preventivo;
- Realizacin de reparaciones y/o modificaciones al producto
original efectuada solo por los agentes autorizados de la Red
de Asistencia Tcnica WEG;
- Entregar el producto a l proveedor en el caso de ocurrir una
falla con reclamacin de garanta en un perodo mnimo
suficiente para identificar la causa de la anomala y su
conveniente reparacin;
- Dar aviso inmediato a WEG, por parte del cliente, de los
defectos detec tados y que los mismos sean posteriormente
analizados por WEG como causados por defectos de
fabricacin.
La garant a no incluye los servicios de desmontaje d el motor
en las instalaciones del cliente, costos de transporte del
producto y gastos de traslado, alojamiento y alimentacin del
personal de Asistencia Tcnica cuand o sean solicitados por
el cliente.
Los servicios en garanta sern prestados exclusivamente en
talleres de Asistencia Tcnica Autorizada WEG o en la propia
fbrica.
Se excluyen de esta garanta los componentes cuya vida til,
en uso normal, sea inferior al perodo de garanta otorgado
por WEG las reparaciones o substituc iones de piezas o
product os, a criterio de WEG o su Asistencia Tcnica
Autorizada, no prorrogar el plazo de garanta original.
La presente garanta se limita al producto entregado, no siendo
responsable WEG por daos a personas, a terceros, a otros
equipos e instalaciones, utilidades que se dejen de obtener
o cualquier otro dao emergente o consecuente.

P Las superficies de encaje de los motores a prueba de explosin


no deben ser mecanizadas y no es permitido utilizar entre ellas
ningn tipo de vedamiento, no descrito o suministrado por el
fabricante. Los encajes deben ser solamente limpios y para evitar
corrosin o penetracin de agua, los encajes pueden ser
engrasados con una fina manta de grasa de silicona.
P Verificar si los componentes estn exentos de rebabas, golpes
y suciedad.
P Observar si las piezas estn en perfectas condiciones.
P Lubricar superficialmente las guas de las tapas con aceite
protector para facilitar el montaje.
P Utilizar solamente martillo de material blando en la colocacin
de las piezas.
P Verificar si todos los tornillos estn bien apretados.
P Utilizar sonda calibrada para verificar asiento de la caja de
conexiones (menor de 0,05mm).

8.1.4 Reparos De Motores A Prueba De Explosin


Figure 1
El reparo de repuestos, directamente involucrados en la
proteccin contra riesgo de una explosin, debe ser realizado
sin cualquier modificacin al diseo original del motor.

Insulation Resistance Checking

Despus del reparo, estos repuestos deben ser chequeados y


cuando concluido, el taller de asistencia tcnica debe hacer una
declaracin de todas las operaciones realizadas en el motor
especfico.

Disconnect motor from power supply before making any


insulation resistance measurement.
To avoid electric discharge risks, discharge the terminals right
after performing the measurement.

Para maiores informaciones, en Mxico favor comunicarse a:

Measure the insulation resistance before operating the motor


and/or when there is any sign of moisture in the winding.
The resistance measured at 77F (25C) must be:

WEG Mxico, S.A de C.V.


Carretera Jorobas-Tula Km 3.5,
Mz.5, Lote 1, entre Lote 4 y 5
Fracc. Parque Indistrial Huehuetoca,
Huehuetoca Estado de Mx., C.P 54680
Tel: (55) 5321-4243 y 61; Fax: (55) 5321-4262 y 94
e-mail: wegmex@weg.com.mx

Ri (20 x U) / (1000 + 2P) [M]


(measured with a MEGGER at 500 V d.c.)
where U = voltage (V); P = power (kW).
If the insulation resistance detected is less than 2 mega ohms, the
winding must be dried according to the following procedure:
Warm it up in an oven at a minimum temperature of 176F (80C)
increasing 41F (5C) every hour until reaching 105C (221F),
remaining under this temperature for at lea st one hour.

Check if the stator insulation resistance remains constant within


accepted values. If not, stator must be reimpregnated. If necessary,
replace bearings and seals.
Note:
1) All drains (if any) must be removed while drying.
2 - Measured the insulation resistance in ambient temperature. If
different than 25C it should be corrected using the following
formula:
R(25C) = [( K+25 ) / ( K + T a )] . R (Ta)
Where:
R(25C) insulation resistance related to 25C ambient temperature
K
constant value 234.5 for copper
Ta ambient temperature where the resistance was measured
R(Ta) resistance value measured in ambient temperature Ta

4. INSTALLATION
4.1 - Safety
All personnel involved with electrical installations, either
handling, lifting, operation, start up, maintenance or repair must
be well informed and updated concerning safety standards and
principles that govern the work and carefully follow them.
For practical reasons, it is not possible to include in this Manual
detailed informati on that covers all constructive variables, nor
covering all possible assembl y, operation or maintenance
alternatives.
For this reason, the present Manual only includes required
information that allows qualified and trained personnel to carry
out the work.
If you still have further doubts about this, specially in reference
to specific product information, WEG is willing to provide such
information via its network of authorized service agents and/or
distributors.
In order to allow WEG to provide prompt service, within technical
standards, the motor serial number that is available on the
identification nameplate should be supplied.
Use always appropriate tools for installation and removal.

I
I

LA INSTALACION DE MOTORES PARA AMBIENTES


PELIGROSOS DEBE SER EJECUTADA POR
PERSONAL ESPECIALIZADO
LA ESPECIFICACION DEL LOCAL DE
INSTALACION ES DE RESPONSABILIDAD DEL
CLIENTE, QUE TAMBIEN DETERMINARA LAS
CARACTERISTICAS AMBIENTALES

Cuando se utiliza el prensa cables en la entrada de los cables, lo


mismo debe ser apropiado para el motor y para el tipo de terminal,
el prensa cables debe ser montado, completamente apretado de
manera a adquirir la presin necesaria arriba de los anillos de
vedamiento, bien como:
Evitar la transmisin de vibraciones mecnicas para los
terminales del m otor.
Garantizar la proteccin mecnica IP para la caja de
conexiones.
8.1.3 Chequeo y Mantenimiento
El mantenimiento debe ser ejecutado por talleres tcnicos
autorizados y acreditados por WEG.
Talleres y personal si n autorizacin que realicen reparacin en
los motores para ambientes peligrosos, sern totalmente
responsables por el trabajo ejecutado y los daos ocurridos en
su servicio.
En la ejecucin del mantenimiento, instalacin y relubricacin, se
deben seguir las siguientes orientaciones:
Las conexiones deben estar correctamente cerradas para evitar
elevacin de resistencia, consecuentemente sobrecalentamiento
del contacto
Aislamiento distancia-aire y distancia-superficie entre los
conductores, requeridos por las normas, deben ser respectados
Todos tornillos utilizados en el montaje de las partes del motor
y caja de conexin, deben ser completamente apretados
Vedamientos y repuestos para entrada de los cables sern
hechos utilizando materiales suministrados por el fabricante, de
manera a garantizar el tipo de proteccin original

7.3 Aislamiento del rodamiento


Los motores Inverter Duty en las carcasas 504/5T y 586/7T* son
suministrados con sistema de puesta a tierra entre el eje y la carcasa
en el lado delantero. Tambin, bajo pedido puede ser suministrado
con rodamientos aislados.
Para otras lneas, en las carcasas 504/5T y 586/7T* cuando usados
con convertidor de frecuencia es necesario sistema de puesta a
tierra entre el eje y la carcasa o rodamientos aislados.
* Otros tamaos de carcasas, bajo consulta.
8 INSTRUCCIONES ADICIONALES

8.1 Motores Para Areas de Riesgo

8.1.1 General
Adems de las recomendaciones arriba, las siguientes tambin
deben ser observadas:
Motores para reas de riesgo son fabricados de acuerdo con
normas especficas para estos ambientes.
Motores suministrados para reas de riesgo (reas clasificadas)
deben ser instalados en rea que estn de acuerdo con las
especificadas en la tarjeta de identificacin del motor.
Notas:
Motores Divisin I son tambin adecuados para la Divisin II
Motores de una especificada clase de temperatura son tambin
adecuados para ambientes con combustible de una clase de
temperatura mayor (ejemplo, motores T4 son adecuados para
ambientes de clase T3, T2, T1).
8.1.2 Instalacin
La instalacin debe seguir procedimientos elaborados por la
legislacin local vigente.

MAKE SURE THAT ELECTRIC MOTORS ARE SWITCHED


OFF BEFORE STARTING ANY MAINTENANCE SERVICE

All rotating parts such as pulleys, couplings, outside fans, shaft,


etc. must be protected against accidental contact.
Motors must be protected against unexpected starts.
When performing any maintenance service, disconnect the motor
from the power supply. Make sure all accessories have been
switched off and disconnected.
In order to prevent from penetrating dust and/or water into the
terminal box, cable glands or threaded pipe in the lead holes
passage must be installed. They must be of equal or higher IP
rating than the motor.

LEAD CONNECTION INSULATION INSIDE THE


TERMINAL BOX MUST BE DONE WITH AN INSULATING
MATERIAL COMPATIBLE WITH MOTOR THERMAL
CLASS WHICH IS SHOWN ON THE MOTOR
NAMEPLATE

If installation and safety instructions are not followed accordingly,


warranty may be void.
4.2 - Operating Conditions
In general electric motors are designed for operation up to an
altitude of 1000m above sea level for an ambient temperature
ranging from -4F (-20C) to 104F (40C). Any variation is stated
on the nameplate.
The recommended installation distance between air inlet from
the motor and the wall should be at least of the air inlet diameter.
A person should have enough room to carry out cleaning services.
Machines that are cooled with ambient a ir, air inlet screens must
be cleaned at regular intervals so as to ensure free air circulation.
Warm air can not return to the motor.
For vertically mounted motors with air inlet on top, the air
opening must be protected by a proper cover so as to avoid
dropping of foreign materials on the motors.
Considering that direct sun heat causes increase in
temperature, externally installed motors should be always
protected against weathering.

ODP MOTORS Open motors (IP21, IP23) are machines designed


for operation in clean, dry areas, with enough air circulation for
proper cooling. These motors should never be used in areas with
flammable materials. Open motors may cause sparks and release
cast particles under any eventual insulation failure (short-circuit).
TEFC MOTORS Totally enclosed motors are machines suitable to
operate in areas with moisture, dirt and/or corrosive materials either
in enclosed or open environments.

4.3 - Foundation
Motors provided with feet must be installed on solid foundations
to avoid excessive vibrations.
All motors must be fully fixed and aligned.
The purchaser is fully responsible for the foundation.
Metal parts must be painted to avoid corrosion.
The foundation must be uniform and sufficiently strong to support
any shock. It must be designed in such a way to stop any vibration
originated from resonance.

EL NO CUMPLIMIENTO DE ESTAS
RECOMENDACIONES Y CRITERIOS CAUSA LA
PERDIDA DE GARANTIA DEL MOTOR

7.2 Motores Inverter Duty


Motores con tensiones superiores a 575V e igual o menor que
690V y alimentados por convertidor de frecuencia no necesitan
filtros caso sigan las especificaciones abajo:
Informado por el fabricante del convertidor.

COMPARE THE CURRENT, VOLTAGE, FREQUENCY,


SPEED, OUTPUT AND OTHER VALUES REQUIRED BY
THE APPLICATION WITH MOTOR NAMEPLATE
INFORMATION

Observar tensin de
alimentacin del conjunto
ventilacin forzada.

(*)

Note: Considering that rotation direction is important for correct


operation, then check it carefully before connecting motor to the
load.
4.4 - Drain Holes
Make sure drains are placed at the lower motor position when the
mounting configuration differs from that specified on the motor
purchase o rder.

4.5 Balance

WHEN SPECIAL BALANCE IS REQUIRED,


CONTACT THE FACTORY

EL NO CUMPLIMIENTO
DE ESTAS
RECOMENDACIONES Y
CRITERIOS CAUSA LA
PERDIDA DE GARANTIA
DEL MOTOR

Favor informar tambin el nmero de serie del motor de la


tarjeta de identificacin.
7 MOTORES PARA USO CON CONVERTIDOR DE FRECUENCIA

All motors are dynamically balanced at the factory with half key.
Transmission elements such as pulleys, couplings etc must be
dynamically balanced with half key before installation.

7.1 Lnea de motores Standard


Always use appropriate tools for installation and removal.
Motores con tensiones hasta 575V y accionados por
Convertidor de Frecuencia no requieren filtros cuando
adoptados los criterios a seguir:
Notas:

(*)

Informado por el fabricante del convertidor.

1) Trajeta de
identificacin
mostrando tensin
380-415V / 660-690V 50Hz y 440-460V - 60Hz
y alimentados por
convertidor en tensin
660-690V - 50Hz o 480V
- 60Hz requiere el uso
de filtros.
2) Motores en las
carcasas 504/5T y 586/
7T* cuando usados
con converti dor,
necesitan uso de
rodamientos aislados.

4.6 Alignment

ALIGN THE SHAFT ENDS AND USE FLEXIBLE


COUPLING, WHENEVER POSSIBLE

Make sure that the motor mounting devices do not allow


modifications on the alignment and further damages to the
bearings.
When assembling a half-coupling, make sure to use suitable
equipment and tools to protect the bearings.
Suitable assembly of half-coupling:
Specially in cases of direct couplings, motor shaft must be
aligned axially and radially with the driven machine shaft.
Incorrect alignment can lead to bearing damage, vibrations or
even cause shaft rupture.
Correct alignment can be ensured with the use of dial gauges,
as shown in figures 4.6.1, 4.6.2 and 4.6.3.
If considering a complete shaft turn, misalignment should not
exceed 0.05 mm.

* Otros tamaos de
carcasas, bajo consulta.

Fig. 4.6.1 - Axial reading (parallelism)

Notas:
Aunque la grasa Polyrex EM (Mobil) sea compatible con
los tipos de grasa mencionados arriba, no recomendamos la
mezcla con cualquier tipo de grasa.
Si Ud. necesita utilizar otro tipo de grasa diferente de las
recomendadas arriba, primeramente contacte con WEG.

LA UTILIZACION DE MOTORES NORMALES EN


LOCALES Y/O APLICACIONES ESPECIALES DEBE
ESTAR PRECEDIDA DE UNA CONSULTA AL
FABRICANTE DE GRASAS Y/O A WEG

Fig. 4.6.2 Radial reading (concentricity)

5.2 - Desmontaje Y Montaje

Fig. 4.6.3 Axial and radial reading combined

The axial alignment (E dimension) between half couplings


should be performed in accordance with manufacturers
recommendations.

El desmontaje y montaje del motor deber ser hecho por


personal calificado, utilizando solamente herramientas y
mtodos adecuados.
Las garras del extractor de rodamientos debern estar
aplicadas sobre la pista interna o sobre la tapa interior.
Es esencial que el montaje de los rodamientos sea ejecutado
en condiciones de rigurosa limpieza, para asegurar un buen
funcionamiento y evitar daos. En el caso de colocar
rodamientos nuevos, stos debern ser retirados de su embalaje
solamente en el momento previo de su montaje al mo tor.
Antes de instalar un rodamiento nuevo, es necesario verificar
si el alojamiento de l mismo en el eje se encuentra exento de
rebabas o seales de golpes.
Para montaje del rodamiento caliente sus partes internas con
equipamiento apropiado por induccin o utilice herramientas
apropiadas.

If required, WEG can offer its personnel duly trained as well as a


laser equipment to make motor and driven machine alignment/
leveling.

6. PARTES Y PIEZAS (REPUESTOS)

Expansion effect of the components may change the alignment/


leveling conditions during performance.

Al solicitar piezas para reposicin, es conveniente indicar la


designacin completa del motor, as como el cdigo del mismo
que aparece marcado en la tarjeta de identificacin.

AVISO:
Las tablas arriba son recomendadas especficamente para
relubricacin con grasa Polyrex EM (Mobil) y temperaturas
absolutas de operacin del rodamiento de:
70C (158F) para motores carcasas 254/6T hasta 324/6T.
85C (185F) para motores carcasas 364/5T hasta 586/7T.
Para cada 15C (59F) arriba de ese lmite, los intervalos de
lubricacin deben ser reducidos a la mitad. Los rodamientos
sellados (ZZ) son lubricados para una determinada vida til,
una vez operando bajo condiciones de temperatura de 70C
(158F).
Los periodos de relubricacin informados arriba son para
los casos de aplicacin con grasa Polyrex EM (Mobil)
Motores montados de forma vertical deben tener su intervalo
de relubricacin reducido a la mitad cuando comparados con
motores en la posicin horizontal.
Para aplicaciones con altas o bajas temperaturas, variacin
de velocidad, etc. el tipo de grasa e intervalos de relubricacin
son informados en una tarjeta de identificacin adicional fijada
al motor.

I
I

RECOMENDAMOS EL USO DE RODAMIENTOS


DE ESFERAS PARA MOTORES ACOPLADOS
DIRECTAMENTE A LA CARGA

PELIGRO:
GRASA EN EXCESO PUEDE PROVOCAR
SOBRECALENTAMIENTO DE LOS RODAMIENTOS,
RESULTANDO UN DAO TOTAL

5.1.3 Compatibilidad de la grasa Polirex EM (Mobil) con


otros tipos de grasa:
Conteniendo espesante polyurea y aceite mineral, la grasa
Polyrex EM (Mobil) es compatible con otros tipos de grasa las
cuales contengan:
Base de litio o complejo de litio o polyurea y aceite mineral
altamente refinado.
Aditivo inhibidor contra corrosin, herrumbre y aditivos
antioxidantes.

4.7 Couplings
When using pulley or belt drive (coupling), follow the
instruction given below:
Remove shaft-locking device (if any) before installing the motor.
Belts must be tighten just enough to avoid slippage when
running, according to the specifications stated on the belt
supplier recommendation.
To make the installation of the pulley on the shaft easier, it is
recommended to heat up the pulley at 176F (80C) and have
it mounted at hot, using suitable tools.
To avoi d bearing and shaft end damage, mounting and
dismounting of pulleys must be made with suitable tools.
While mounting and dismounting a pulley, never make pressure
or knocks on the bearings.
Always use flexible couplings; rigid couplings require special
bearing arrangement as well as axial and radial alignment of
the shafts.
WARNING:
EXCESSIVE BELT/CHAIN TENSION WILL DAMAGE
THE BEARINGS AND LEAD TO A PROBABLE
SHAFT RUPTURE
The couplings used must be suitable to withstand radial and
axial vibrations during operation. Special care must be taken to
avoid that the allowable load and speed limits given in the catalog
are not exceeded.
4.8 Electrical Connection
Make sure the motor is connected to the correct power supply.
The cable gauges and the protection devices must be designed
based on motor rated current.

~
WARNING

The capacitor on single-phase motors can


retain a charge which appears across the
motor terminals, even when the motor has
reached standstill condition. So, avoid
touching them at such condition

A WRONG CONNECTION CAN


BURN OUT THE MOTOR.

Voltage and connection are indicated on the motor nameplate.


The acceptable voltage variation is 10%;
the acceptable frequency variation is +3% and -5% and the
total acceptable variation for voltage and frequency is 10%.
Note: For rated voltage range (Tru Metric Line), the acceptable
variation is 5% according to IEC 60034-1.
4.9 - Starting Methods
The motor is rather started through direct starting. In case this
is not possible, use compatible start methods to the motor load
and voltage.
When applying reduced voltage-starting method, remember
that the starting torque will also reduce.
P 3 leads single voltage and 9 leads dual voltage motors can be
started as follows:
- Full Voltage Direct online
- Auto-Transformer starting
- Electronic Soft-Starting
- VFD Starting subject to verification and application analisys.
- Series - Parallel starting (only for 9 leads)
P 6 leads single and dual voltage motors and 12 leads dual
voltage motors can be connected as follows:
- Full Voltage Direct online

La frecuencia adecuada para realizar las inspecciones depender


del tipo de motor y de las condiciones de aplicacin.

I
INTERVALOS DE RELUBRICACION GRASA POLIREX EM (MOBIL)

~
WARNING

Voltage may be connected at motor standstill


inside the terminal box for heating elements
or direct winding heating

PARA LUBRICACION, USE EXCLUSIVAMENTE


PISTOLA ENGRASADORA MANUAL

NO REUTILIZAR PIEZAS DAADAS O CON DESG ASTE.


SUBSTITUIR POR NUEVAS, ORIGINALES DE FABRICA

La frecuencia adecuada para realizar las inspecciones


depender del tipo de motor y de las condiciones de
aplicacin.
5.1 Lubricacin
PROCEDER DE ACUERDO C ON LOS INTERVALOS
DE REENGRASE RECOMENDADOS. ESTO ES VITAL
PARA LA OPERACION DEL MOTOR

5.1.1 - Motores sin grasera


Los motores hasta la carcasa 215T normalmente no llevan grasera.
En estos casos el reengrase deber ser efectuado conforme al
plan de mantenimiento preventivo existente, teniendo en cuenta
los siguientes aspectos:
P
P
P
P
P

Desarmar cuidadosamente los motores.


Retirar toda la grasa.
Lavar los rodamientos con querosina o gasolina.
Secar los rodamientos
Reengrasar el rodamiento inmediatamente.

5.1.2 - Motores con grasera


Se recomienda efectuar el reengrase durante el funcionamiento
del motor, de modo que permita la renovacin de la grasa en el
alojamiento del rodamiento. Si esto no fuera posible debido a la
presencia de piezas giratorias cerca de la entrada de grasa (poleas,
acoplamientos, etc.) que puedan poner en riesgo la integridad
fsica del operador, se procede de la siguiente manera:
P Limpiar las proximidades del agujero de la grasera.
P Inyectar aproximadamente la mitad de la cantidad total de
grasa estimada y poner en marcha el motor durante 1 minuto
aproximadamente en rotacin nominal. Desconectar nuevamente
el motor y colocar la grasa restante.
P La inyeccin de toda la grasa con el motor parado puede
llevar a la penetracin de parte del lubricante al interior del motor,
a travs del agujero de paso de eje en las tapas de rodamientos
interiores.

- WYE/DELTA starting
- Auto-Transformer starting
- Electronic Soft-Starting
- VFD Starting subject to verification and application analisys.
- Series - Parallel starting (only for 12 leads)
Rotation direction is clockwise when motor is viewed from
Drive Endshields side and if the phases are connected
according to sequence L1, L2, L3. This sequence and power
system must be positive.
To change the rotation direction, reverse two of the connecting
leads.
Note: For single-phase motors connections, please check the
motor nameplate.

THE CONNECTION TO THE POWER SUPPLY


MUST BE DONE BY QUALIFIED PERSONNEL AND
WITH FULL ATTENTION TO ASSURE SAFE AND
PERMANENT CONNECTION. AFTER
CONNECTING THE MOTOR, CHECK FOR ANY
STRANGE BODY INSIDE THE TERMINAL BOX. THE
CABLE INLETS NOT IN USE MUST BE CLOSED

Make sure to use correct cable gauge, based on the rated


current stamped on the motor nameplate.

BEFORE ENERGIZING THE TERMINALS, CHECK IF


THE GROUNDING IS MADE ACCORDING TO THE
APPLICABLE STANDARDS. THIS IS ESSENTIAL TO
AVOID ACCIDENTS

4.10 Protection Device


When the motor is supplied with protective or monitor
temperature device such as thermostats, thermistors, thermal
protector etc, connect their terminals to the corresponding
devices on the control panel. If this procedure is not followed
accordingly,warranty will be void.
Do not change protection devices settings as they may not
operate.

4.11 Puesta en Marcha (Start-Up)

L1 L2 L3

P1 P2

I
L1 L2 L3

P1 P2

3x

3x

RELEASE DEVICE

LA CUA DEBE ESTAR COMPLETAMENTE


ASEGURADA O POR EL CONTRARIO RETIRADA
ANTES DE PONER EN MARCHA EL MOTOR

a) El motor debe arrancar y funcionar de manera suave. En el


caso de que esto no ocurra, desconecte el motor y verifique
nuevamente el sistema de montaje y de conexiones antes de
nueva puesta en marcha.

THERMISTORS LEADS

b) En el caso de vibraciones excesivas, verifique se los


tornillos de fijacin estn sueltos o se la vibracin es originada
por mquinas adyacentes. Se debe hacer una verificacin
peridica de la vibracin.

4.11 - Start-Up

IF THE MOTOR IS RUN BARE SHAFT, THE KEY MUST


BE FASTENED OR REMOVED BEFORE STARTING

a) The motor must start and opera te smoothly. In case this


does not occur, turn it off and check all connections and the
mounting before starting it again.
b) In case there is excessive vibration, check if the fixing screws
are correctly fastened.
Check also if the vibration comes from a neighbor machine.
Periodical vibration check must be done.
c) Run the motor under rated load for a short period of time
and compare if the running current is in accordance to the
nameplate current.
5 . MAINTENANCE
Any service on electric machines should only be carried out
when it is completely stopped and all phases disconnected
from the power supply.

WARNING:
SAFETY CHECK LIST

c) Mantener el motor en marcha bajo carga nominal durante


un pequeo periodo de tiempo y comparar la corriente de
operacin con la corriente informada en la tarjeta de
identificacin.
5 - MANTENIMIENTO
Cualquier servicio realizado en mquinas elctricas solamente
debe ser hecho cuando las mismas estn completamente
paradas y todas las fases desconectadas de la red de
transmisin.

PELIGRO:
CONTROL DE SEGURIDAD (CHECK LIST).

Inspeccin General
Inspeccionar el motor peridicamente.
Mantener limpio el motor y asegurar libre flujo de aire.
Verifique los vedamientos (sellos) y efecte la sustitucin
en caso que sea necesario.
Verifique el ajuste de las conexiones del motor as como
los tornillos de sustentacin.
Verifique el estado de los rodamientos siempre
observando: aparicin de fuertes ruidos, vibraciones,
temperatura excesiva y condiciones de la grasa.
Cuando se detecte un cambio en las condiciones de trabajo
normales del motor, analice el motor y reemplace las piezas
requeridas.

LA CONEXION A LA RED DE ALIMENTACION


ELECTRICA DEBE SER EFECTUADA POR PERSONAL
CALIFICADO CON MUCHA ATENCION PARA
ASEGURAR UN CONTACTO SEGURO Y
PERMANENTE. DESPUES DE HABER CONECTADO
EL MOTOR, VERIFIQUE QUE NINGUN CUERPO
EXTRAO PERMANEZCA EN EL INTERIOR DE LA
CAJA DE CONEXIONES. TODA ENTRADA DE CABLES
A LA CAJA QUE NO ESTE SIENDO UTILIZADA, DEBE
SER CERRADA

Asegrese de utilizar el dimetro correcto para el cable de


alimentacin, tomando como base la corriente nominal
indicada en la tarjeta de identificacin del motor.

ANTES DE CONECTAR EL MOTOR, VERIFIQUE


QUE LA PUESTA A TIERRA FUE REALIZADA DE
ACUERDO CON LAS NORMAS VIGENTES. ESTE
DETALLE ES FUNDAMENTAL PARA EVITAR
ACCIDENTES

4.10 Dispositivos de proteccin


Cuando el motor es suministrado con dispositivos de proteccin
o monitoreo de temperatura, tales como, termostatos, termistores,
protectores trmicos, etc., conecte sus terminales a los dispositivos
correspondientes en el panel de control. Caso este procedimiento
no sea seguido correctamente, puede invalidar la garanta.
No altere el reglaje de los dispositivos de proteccin, porque los
mismos pueden se tornar inoperantes.
Diagrama del Dispositivo de Proteccin

L1 L2 L3

P1 P2
L1

3x

L2

P1 P2

L3

3x
CABLES DE
LOS TERMISTORES

DISPOSITIVODE
PROTECCIN

General Inspection
Check motor perio dically.
Keep motor clean and ensure free air flow.
Check seals and replace them, if required.
Check connections as well as supporting screws.
Check bearing condition and pay attention to: Any excessive
noise, vibration, bearing temperature and grease condition.
When a change, under normal conditions is detected, check
the motor and replace required parts.

DO NOT REUSE DAMAGED OR WORN PARTS.


REPLACE THEM BY NEW ONES SUPPLIED BY THE
FACTORY

Periodical inspection depends on motor type and on


application conditions.
5.1 Lubrication

FOLLOW REGREASING INTERVALS. THIS IS


FUNDAMENTAL FOR PROPER MOTOR OPERATION

5.1.1 - Machines withou t Grease Nipples


Motors up to frame size 215T are normally fitted without grease
fittings. In these cases the regreasing shall be done during
preventive maintenance service paying attention to the following
aspects:
Take motor apart carefully.
Take all the grease out.
Wash the bearing with kerosene or diesel.
Dry the bearings
Regrease the bearing immediately.
5.1.2 - Motors Fitted with Grease Fitting
It is strongly recommended to grease the machine while running.
This allows the grease renewal in the bearing housing. When
this is not possible due to rotating parts by the grease device
(pulleys, bushing, etc) that offer some risk to physical integrity
of the operator, proceed as follows:
Clean the area near the grease nipple.
Put approximately half of the total grease and run the motor for
1 minute at full speed.

Then turn off the motor and pump in the rest of the grease.
The injection of all the grease with the motor in standstill can
make the grease penetrate into the motor, through the bearing
housing inner seal.
Inspections intervals depend on motor type and on application
conditions.

USE ONLY MANUAL GREASE GUN FOR


LUBRICATION

La tensin y forma de conexin estn indicadas en la tarjeta de


identificacin del motor.
La variacin aceptable de tensin es de 10%,
La variacin aceptable en la frecuencia es de +3 y 5% y la variacin
total aceptable de la tensin y frecuencia es de 10%.
Nota: Para rango de tensin nominal (Lnea Tru Metric), la variacin
aceptable es 5% de acuerdo con la IEC60034-1.
4.9 - Sistema de arranque

RECOMMENDED RELUBRICATION INTERVALS POLYREX EM GREASE


MOBIL)
(

Es preferible que el motor arranque en forma directa. En el caso


de que esto no sea posible, utilizar mtodos de arranque
alternativos que sean compatibles con la carga y tensin del motor.
Cuando aplicar el sistema de arranque con tensin reducida,
acuerde que el par de arranque tambin reducir.
Los motores 3 cables tensin nica y 9 cables doble tensin
pueden ser arrancados como sigue:
- Arranque directo a plena tensin
- Arranque con auto transformador
- Arrancador Suave (Soft-Starter)
- Arranque con Convertidor de frecuencia bajo verificacin y
anlisis de aplicacin.
- Arranque Serie-Paralelo (solamente para 9 cables)
Los motores 6 cables tensin nica y doble y 12 cables doble
tensin pueden ser conectados como sigue:
- Arranque directo a plena tensin
- Arranque estrella-triangulo
- Arranque con auto transformador
- Arrancador Suave (Soft-Starter)
- Arranque con Convertidor de frecuencia bajo verificacin y
anlisis de aplicacin.
- Arranque Serie- Paralelo (solamente para 12 cables)
El sentido de giro es el horario, mirando el motor desde el extremo
del eje y conectando las fases en la secuencia L1, L2 y L3. Esta
secuencia y la alimentacin deben ser positivas.
Para cambiar el sentido de giro, invertir dos de los cables de
alimentacin.
Nota: Para motores con conexin monofsica, favor verificar la
tarjeta de i dentificacin del motor.

requieren rodamientos especiales, bien como alineacin axial


y radial de los ejes.
ATENCION:
UNA EXCESIVA TENSIN EN LAS CORREAS
DAAR LOS RODAMIENTOS Y HASTA PUEDE
PROVOCAR LA RUPTURA DEL EJE.
Los acoplamientos utilizados deben soportar vibraciones
radiales y axiales durante la operacin. Deben ser tomados
cuidados especiales para evitar que no sean excedidas las
cargas permitidas y limites de velocidad de catlogo.
4.8 Conexin elctrica
Se debe asegurar que el motor sea conectado correctamente
en la red de transmisin.
Los dimetros de los cables y los dispositivos de proteccin
deben ser diseados de acuerdo con la corriente nominal
del motor.

~
PELIGRO

~
PELIGRO

Con el motor parado, puede existir energa


elctrica en el interior de la caja de
conexiones, para las resistencias de
calentamiento o inclusive para el bobinado.

Los capacitores de los motores monofsicos


pueden retener energa elctrica, mismo con
el motor parado. no tocar los capacitores y los
terminales del motor sin verificar que no exista
tensin en los mismos.

TODA CONEXION EFECTUADA DE FORMA


INCORRECTA PUEDE QUEMAR EL MOTOR

Note:
The table above is specifically intended for relubrification with
MOBIL Polyrex EM grease and bearing absolute operating
temperature of:
70C (158F) for 254/6T to 324/6T frame size motors
85C (185F) for 364/5T to 586/7T frame size motors
For every 15C (59F) above these limits, relubrification intervals
must be reduced by half. Shielded bearing (ZZ) are lubricated
for bearing life as lo ng are they operate under conditions and
temperature of 70C (158F).
Relubrication periods given above are for those cases
applying MOBIL Polyrex EM grease.
When motors are used on the vertical position, their
relubrication interval is reduced by half if compared to horizontal
position motors.
On applications with high or low temperatures, speed variation
etc., the type of grease and relubrication intervals is given on an
additional nameplate attached to the motor.

I
I

WE RECOMMENDED TO USE BALL


BEARINGS FOR MOTORS DIRECTLY
COUPLED TO THE LOAD

WARNING:
EXCESS OF GREASE CAN CAUSE BEARING
OVERHEATING RESULTING IN COMPLETE DAMAGE.

5.1.3 - Co mpatibility of MOBIL Polirex EM grease with other


types of grease
Containing polyurea thickener and mineral oil, the MOBIL Polyrex
EM grease is compatible with other types of grease that contain:
Lithium base or complex of lithium or polyurea and highly
refined mineral oil.
Inhibitor additive against corrosion, rust and anti-oxidant
additive.
Note:
Although MOBIL Polyrex EM is compatible with the types of
grease given above, we do not recommend mixing it with any
other types of grease.
If you intend to use a type of grease different than those

recommended above, first contact WEG.

BEFORE USING STANDARD MOTORS IN SPECIFIC


AREAS OR ON SPECIAL APPLICATIONS, FIRST
CONTACT THE GREASE MANUFACTURER OR WEG

5.2 - Assembly and Disassembly


Disassembly and assembly must be done by qualified personnel
using only suitable tools and appropriate methods.
The bearing extractor grips must be applied over the side face
of the inner ring to be disassembled or over an adjacent part.
It is essential to assemble bearings under clean conditions to
ensure good operation and to avoid damages. New bearings
shall only be taken out from their packages when assembling
them.
Before installing a new bearing it is required to check the shaft
fitting for any sharp edge or strike signals.
For bearing assembly warm their inner parts with suitable
equipment inductive process or use suitable tools.
6. SPARE PARTS
When ordering spare parts, please specify the full type designation
and product code as stated on the motor nameplate. Please also
inform the motor serial number stated on the nameplate.
7 - VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE MOTORS

7.1 - Standard Motors Line


Motors with voltages up to 575V do not require filters if follow
the criteria bellow:

Fig. 4.6.3 Lectura Axial y Radial combinado

La alineacin axial (dimensin E) entre mitad de acoplamientos


deben ser ejecutados de acuerdo con las especificaciones del
fabricante.
Bajo consulta, WEG puede ofrecer su personal entrenado y
tambin equipamiento lser para hacer la alineacin/nivelacin
del motor y de la mquina accionada.
La expansin de los componentes puede cambiar las condiciones
de alineacin/nivelacin durante el desempeo.
4.7 Acoplamientos
Cuando se utilice un acoplamiento por medio de correas y
poleas, se debe seguir las informaciones abajo:
- Remover el dispositivo de bloqueo del eje (caso existir) antes
de instalar el motor.
- Las correas deben ser estiradas apenas lo suficiente como
para evitar deslizamiento en el funcionamiento, de acuerdo con
las recomendaciones del fabricante de las correas.
- Para facilitar la instalacin de la polea en el eje, se recomienda
calentar la polea hasta 176F (80C) y montar an caliente,
utilizando herramientas apropiadas.
- Para evitar daos en los rodamientos y punta del eje, el
montaje y desmontaje de las poleas debe s er hecho con
herramientas apropiadas.
- Mientras el montaje y desmontaje de una polea, nunca haga
presin o golpes en los rodamientos.
- Siempre utilice acoplamientos flexibles, acoplamientos rgidos

Fig. 4.6.1 Lect ura Axial (en paralelo)

Fig. 4.6.2 Lect ura radial (concentricidad)

* Other frame sizes, under request.

Note:
1) Motors with nameplate showing voltage 380-415V / 660-690V - 50Hz and 440-480V 60Hz, and fed by VFD on voltage 660-690V - 50Hz or 480V - 60Hz require filters.
2) Motors in frame sizes 504/5T and 586/7T* when uded with VFDs, require insulated
bearings.

Montaje correcto del acoplamiento:


Especialmente en los casos donde se utiliza acoplamiento directo,
el eje debe ser alineado axialmente y radialmente con el eje de la
mquina accionada.
Una alineacin incorrecta puede daar el rodamiento, vibraciones
y hasta provocar ruptura del eje.
Una alineacin correcta puede ser asegurada con el uso de
calibradores, de acuerdo con las figuras 4.6.1, 4.6.2 y 4.6.3.
Considerando un giro completo del eje, la desalineacin no debe
exceder 0.05mm.

IF SUCH RECOMMENDATIONS AND CRITERIA


ARE NOT FOLLOWED ACCORDINGLY, MOTOR
WARRANTY WILL BE VOID

7.2 - Inverter Duty Motors Line


Motors with voltages above 575V and equal or below 690V and fed
by VFD do not require filters when following the criteria below:

La base debe ser uniforme y lo suficientemente robusta para


soportar fuertes choques. Debe ser diseada de manera que
impida las vibraciones originadas por resonancias.
Nota: Considerando que el sentido de rotacin es importante
para un funcionamiento correcto, verificar el sentido de rotacin
antes de acoplar la carga al motor.
4.4 - Agujeros de drenaje
Asegrese que los agujeros de drenaje del motor se siten en
su parte inferior, cuando la forma de montaje del motor difiera
de la especificada en la compra del mismo.
4.5 Balanceo

P Check power supply voltage of the forced cooling set.

BALANCEOS ESPECIALES DEBEN SER


SOLICITADOS PREVIAMENTE A LA
FABRICA

Los motores WEG son balanceados dinmicamente en la planta


con Media Cua
Los elementos de transmisin, tales como, poleas,
acoplamientos, etc., deben ser balanceados dinmicamente con
media cua antes de ser instalados.
Utilice siempre herramientas apropiadas tanto en la instalacin
como en el desacople de los motores.
4.6 Alineacin

ALINEAR LAS PUNTAS DEL EJE, Y UTILICE


SIEMPRE QUE FUERA POSIBLE
ACOPLAMIENTOS FLEXIBLES

Cercirese de que los dispositivos de montaje del motor no


permitan alteraciones en la alineacin y otros daos en los
rodamientos.
Cuando se proceda el montaje del acoplamiento deben ser
usados los medios adecuados y las herramientas necesarias
para no daar los rodamientos.

la entrada de aire. Una persona debe tener espacio suficiente


para mantener servicios de limpieza.
Mquinas que son enfriadas a travs del aire ambiente, deben
limpiar las entradas de aire en intervalos regulares para asegurar
la libre circulacin de aire.
Aire caliente no puede retornar al mo tor.
Para motores montados en la vertical con las entradas de aire
al topo, las entradas de aire deben ser protegidas con
sombrerete para evitar la cada de cuerpos extraos en el motor.
- Considerando que el calor directo del sol causa aumento
de temperatura, los motores instalados externamente deben
siempre ser protegidos contra la intemperie.

COMPARE LOS VALORES DE CORRIENTE,


TENSION, FRECUENCIA, VELOCIDAD, POTENCIA
Y OTROS VALORES EXIGIDOS POR LA
APLICACION, CON LOS DATOS CONTENIDOS EN
LA TARJETA DE IDENTIFICACION

Motores ODP Motores abiertos (IP21, IP23, etc.):


Son motores para uso en locales limpios, secos, con
circulacin de aire suficiente para su refrigeracin. Este tipo
de motor no debe ser utilizado en la presencia de materiales
inflamables o combustibles. Motores abiertos pueden emitir
llama/chispa o metal fundido en una eventual falla del
aislamiento (cortocircuito).
Motore s TCVE (Total mente Cerrado Ventilacin
Externa): Son motores aptos a trabajar en reas con
humedad polvo y materiales corrosivos, en ambientes cerrados
y tambin abiertos.
4.3 - Cimentacin del motor
Los motores con pies (patas) debern ser instalados sobre
apoyos rgidos para evitar excesivas vibraciones.
Todos los motores deben se r apropiadamente fijados y
alineados.
El cliente es totalmente responsable de estos apoyos.
Las partes metlicas debern estar pintadas para evitar la
corrosin.

IF SUCH RECOMMENDATIONS AND CRITERIA


ARE NOT FOLLOWED ACCORDINGLY, MOTOR
WARRANTY WILL BE VOID

7.3 Bearing insulation


Inverter Duty Motors line in frame sizes 504/5T and 586/7T* are
supplied with ground system between the shaft and frame on
Drive Endshield. Also, on request can be supplied with insulated
bearings.
For other lines, in frame sizes 504/5T and 586/7T* when used
with VFDs it is required ground system between the shaft and
frame or insulated bearings.
(*) Other frame sizes, under request.
8 - ADDITIONAL INSTRUCTIONS
8.1 - Hazardous Area Motors
8.1.1 General
Besides the recommendations given above, these
recommendations must be also followed.
Motors for hazardous area are manufactured according to
specific Standards for such environments.
Motors supplied for hazardous area (classified areas) must be
installed in areas that comply with those specified on the motor
nameplate.
Notes:
- Motors of Division I are also suitable for Division II.
- Motors of a given class of temperature are suitable also for
combustible environments of a greater class of temperature
(example, T4 motors are suitable for environments of class T3,
T2, T1).
8.1.2 Installation
A complete installation must follow procedures given by local
legislation in effect.

THE INSTALLATION OF HAZARDOUS AREA


MOTORS MUST BE CARRIED OUT BY SKILLED
PEOPLE

THE SPECIFICATION OF THE MOTOR


INSTALLATION SITE IS FOR CUSTOMERS
RESPONSIBILITY, WHO WILL ALSO DETERMINE
THE ENVIRONMENT CHARACTERISTICS

When cable entrance is made by a cable gland, this must be


suitable to the unit and to the type of cable; the cable gland has
to be assembled, completely screwed in order to get the necessary
pressure on the sealing rings, so as to:
- Avoid transmission of mechanical vibrations to the motor
terminals.
- Guarantee mechanical protection IP to the terminal box.
8.1.3 Checking and Maintenance
Maintenance must be carried out by repair shops authorized
and accredited by WEG.
Repair shops and people without WEGs authorization who will
perform any service on hazardous area motors will be fully
responsible for such service as well as for any consequential
damage.
When performing maintenance, installation or relubrication,
follow these instructions:
Electric connections must be correctly locked to avoid
resistance-increases, with consequent contact overheating.
Insulation air-distance and surface-distance between
conductors, required by the Standards, must be respected.
All screws, used to assemble parts motor and terminal box,
must be completely screwed.
Seals and components replacement for cable entrance would
be made using spare parts, supplied from the manufacturer,in
order to guarantee the original type of protection.
Explosion Proof motors joint surfaces have not to be machined
and it is not allowed to insert, between them, any kind of seals,
not foreseen or suppli ed by the manufacturer. Joint surfaces
have just to be cleaned and, in order to avoid corrosion or water

Utilice siempre herramientas apropiadas para la instalacin y


desmontaje.

VERIFIQUE QUE LOS MOTORES ELECTRICOS


ESTEN DESCONECTADOS ANTES DE INICIAR
CUALQUIER TRABAJO DE MANTENIMIENTO

Todas las partes girantes, tales como poleas, acoplamientos,


ventiladores externos, eje, etc., deben estar protegidos contra
toques accidentales.
Los motores deben estar protegidos contra arranques
accidentales.
Al realizar servicios de mantenimiento en el motor, desconecte
la red de alimentacin. Verifique si todos los accesorios fueron
desconectados de la red de alimentacin y desligados.
Para impedir la penetracin de polvo o agua en el interior de
la caja de conexin, es necesario instalar prensa cables o
electroductores roscados en las salidas de los cables. Los
mismos deben tener grado IP igual o mayor que el m otor.

EL AISLAMIENTO DE LOS CABLES, ADENTRO DE


LA CAJA DE CONEXIONES DEL MOTOR, DEBEN
SER HECHOS CON MATERIALES COMPATIBLES
CON LA CLASE TERMICA DEL MOTOR QUE ESTA
MOSTRADA EN LA TARJETA DE IDENTIFICACION

Se las instrucciones de instalacin y seguridad no son seguidas


correctamente, se puede perder la garanta.
4.2 - Condiciones de Operacin
Los motores elctricos, en general, son diseados para
instalacin y operacin a una altitud hasta 1000m sobre el nivel
del mar con temperaturas ambientes de -20C (-4F) a 40C
(104F).
Variaciones respecto a los valores mencionados deben estar
indicadas en la tarjeta de identificacin.
La distancia de instalacin recomendada entre las entradas de
aire del motor y la pared no debe ser inferior del dimetro de

del estator bobinado. Caso necesario, cambiar los rodamientos


y retenedores.
Nota:
1) Los agujeros de drenaje (cuando existan) deben ser retirados
durante el secado.
2) La resistencia de aislamiento debe ser medida en temperatura
ambiente. Caso sea diferente de 25C debe ser corregida utilizando
la siguiente formula:
R(25C) = [( K+25 ) / ( K + T a )] . R (Ta)
Donde:
R(25C) resistencia del aislamiento relativa a 25C temperatura
ambiente
K
valor constante 234.5 para el cobre
Ta temperatura ambiente donde la resistencia fue medida
R(Ta) valor de la resistencia medida en temperatura ambiente Ta
4. INSTALACION
4.1 - Seguridad
Los profesionales que trabajan en instalaciones elctricas, sea
en el manejo, montaje, operacin, puesta en marcha o en el
mantenimiento, debern estar permanentemente informados y
actualizados sobre las normas y requisitos vigentes en materia
de seguridad y cuidadosamente ponerlas en prctica.
Por motivos prcticos, no es posible incluir en este Manual
informacin detallada de todas las variables constructivas,
tampoco todas las posibilidades de montaje, operacin o
alternativas de mantenimiento.
Debido a esto, este Manual solamente incluye la informacin
requerida que recomienda que estos servicios sean efectuados
solamente por personal calificado y entrenado.
Caso Ud. aun tenga alguna duda a este respecto, especialmente
respecto a informacin especifica del producto, WEG
suministrar esta informacin a travs de su red de servicio
autorizado y/o distribuidores.
Para permitir que WEG tenga un pronto servicio, dentro de las
normas tcnicas, el nmero de serie del motor que se encuentra
en la tarjeta de identificacin debe ser informado.

penetration; they can beoiled by means of a thin coat of silicon


grease.
Check if all components are free of edges, knocks or dirt.
Make sure all parts are in perfect conditions.
Lubricate the surfaces of the endshield fittings with protective
oil to make the assembly easier.
Use only rubber hammer to fit the parts.
Check the correct bolts fastening.
Use clearance calibrator f or correct connection terminal box
fitting (less than 0.05mm).
8.1.4 Explosion Proof Motor Repairs
Repair of parts, directly involved in the protection against risk of
an explosion, must be done without any modification to the
original motor design.
After the repair, these parts must be submitted to a check and
when concluded, the repair shop must issue a statement, about
all operations performed on a specific mo tor.

9. WARRANTY TERMS
WEG warrants its products against defect s in workmanship
and materials for eighteen (18) months from the invoice date
issued by the factory, authorized distributor or agent limited to
twenty four (24) months from manufacturing date independent
of installation date as long as the following items are fulfilled
accordingly:
- Proper transportation, handling and storage;
- Correct installation based on the specified ambient
environmental conditions;
- Operation under motor capacity limits;
- Observation of the periodical maintenance services;
- Repair and/or replacement effected only by personnel duly
authorized in writing by WEG;
- The failed product be available t o the supplier and/or repair
shop for a required period to detect the cause of the failure
and corresponding repair;
- Immediate notice by the purchaser about failures occurred
and that these are accepted by WEG as manufacturing defects.
This warranty does not include disassembly services at the
purchaser facilities, transportation costs with product, tickets,
accommodation and meals for technical personnel when
requested by t he customer.
The warranty service will be only carried out at WEG Authorized
Repair Shops or at WEGs facilities.
Components whose useful life, under normal use, is shorter
than the warranty period are not covered by these warranty
terms.
The repair and/or replacement of parts or components, when
affected b y WEG and/or any WEG Authorized Repair Shop, will
not give warranty extension.
This constitutes WEGs only warranty in connection with this
sale and the company will have no obligation or liability
whatsoever to people, third parties, other equipment or
installations, including without limitation, any claims for
consequential damage s or labor costs.

Las resistencias de calentamiento nunca deben ser energizadas


mientras el motor este operando.

Posicin del Dreno

Figura 1

Dreno

Medicin de la resistencia del aislamiento


Desconectar el motor de la red de energa antes de hacer
cualquier medicin de la resistencia del aislamiento.
Para evitar riesgo de descarga elctrica, descargue los
terminales despus de la medicin.
Mida la resistencia del aislamiento antes de poner el motor en
servicio y/o cuando haya indicios de humedad en el bobinado.
La resistencia, medida a 25C (77F), debe ser:
Ri (20 x U) / (1000 + 2P) [M]
(Medido con MEGGER a 500 V c.c.);
Donde U = tensin (V); P = potencia (kW).
Si la resistencia del aislamiento medida es inferior a 2 M, el
bobinado deber ser secado de acuerdo con lo que sigue:
Calentar el estator bobi nado en un horno partiendo de una
temperatura de 80C (176F) y elevando 5C (41F) por hora
hasta llegar a los 105C (221F); esta ltima temperatura debe
permanecer durante un perodo mnimo de una hora.
Medir se la resistencia del aislamiento del bobinado permanece
constante y con valores dentro de los mnimos recomendados;
caso contrario, se deber proceder a una nueva impregnacin

Verifique si ocurrieron daos durante el transporte.


Verifique los datos de la tarjeta de identificacin.
Gire el eje con la mano para verificar si est girando libremente.
Asegurar que el motor no tenga sido expuesto a polvo o
humedad durante el transporte a almacenamiento.
3. ALMACENAMIENTO

Transformando Energa
en Soluciones

Si los motores no fueran inmediatamente instalados, deben ser


almacenados en un local seco, libre de polvo, vibraciones, gases
y vapores corrosivos; dotado de temperatura uniforme,
colocndolos en posicin normal y sin apoyar sobre ellos otros
objetos.
La temperatura de almacenaje de los motores debe quedar entre
41F (5C) y 140F (60C), con humedad relativa no excediendo
a 50%.
En el caso de motores con ms de dos aos de almacenaje, se
debe proceder al cambio de rodamientos o a la substitucin
total de la grasa lubricante despus de la limpieza de los mismos.
En los motores monofsicos almacenados durante dos aos o
ms, se debe adems cambiar los capacitores (cuando existan).
WEG recomienda girar el eje del motor (manualmente) al menos
una vez al mes y medir la resistencia del aislamiento antes de
instalarlo, en caso de motores almacenados ms de 6 meses o
cuando estn sometidos a ambientes con alta humedad.
Caso el motor dispone de resistencias de calentamiento, estas
debern ser conectadas durante el periodo de almacenaje caso
la humedad relativa exceder 50%.
Caso el motor permanecer almacenado por un largo periodo
sin tener las resistencias de calentamiento conectadas o cuando
estn instaladas pero no en operacin, humedad/agua en la
parta interna del motor pueden condensar.En estos casos, la
agua debe ser drenada removiendo los drenos (tapones)
roscados. Despus del drenaje hecho, conecte las resistencias
de calentamiento y asegure que el motor este completamente
seco, entonces reinstale los tapones (drenos) para asegurar el
grado de proteccin correcto. (Vea figura 1).

MANUAL DE INSTALACION,
OPERACION Y
MANTENIMIENTO PARA
MOTORES DE INDUCCION
Carcasas 143/5t hasta 586/7

LA INTENCION DE ESTE MANUAL ES PROVEER


INFORMACIONES IMPORTANTES QUE DEBEN SER
SEGUIDAS DURANTE TRANSPORTE, INSTALACION,
OPERACION Y MANTENIMIENTO DE LOS MOTORES
WEG. ENTONCES, RECOMENDAMOS LEER
ATENTAMENTE ESTE MANUAL ANTES DE LA
INSTALACION Y OPERACION DEL MOTOR.
PARA ASEGURAR INTEGRIDAD FISICA DE LA
OPERACION Y PROTECCION MATERIAL, TODA LA
INFORMACION INCLUIDA EN ESTE MANUAL DEBERA
SER EXTREMAMENTE SEGUIDA
INDICE

1.
2.
3.
4.

MANEJO Y TRANSPORTE
VERIFICACION EN LA RECEPCION
ALMACENAMIENTO
INSTALACION
4.1 - Seguridad
4.2 - Condiciones de operacin
4.3 - Fundaciones del motor
4.4 - Agujeros de Drenaje
4.5 - Balanceo
4.6 - Alineacin
4.7 - Acoplamientos
4.8 - Conexin elctrica
4.9 - Mtodos de arranque
4.10 - Dispositivo de proteccin
4.11 - Puesta en Marcha
5. MANTENIMIENTO
5.1 - Lubricacin
5.1.1 - Motores sin grasera
5.1.2 - Motores con grasera
5.1.3 - Compatibilidad de la grasa MOBIL Polirex EM
con otros tipos de grasa
5.2 - DESM ONTAJE Y MONTAJE
6. PARTES Y PIEZAS - REPUESTOS
7. MOTORES PARA USO CON CONVERTIDOR DE
FRECUENCIA
7.1 - Motores Standard
7.2 - Motores Inverter Duty
7.3 - Aislamiento de rodamientos
8. INFORMACIONES ADICIONALES
8.1 - Motores para reas de Riesgo
8.1.1 - General
8.1.2 - Instalacin
8.1.3 - Chequeo y Mantenimiento
8.1.4 - Reparos en Motores a Prueba de Explosin
9. TERMINOS DE GARANTIA

1 MANEJO Y TRANSPORTE

LOS MOTORES NO DEBEN SER IZADOS POR EL


EJE, UTILIZE LOS CANCAMOS DE SUSPENSION,
ESPECIFICOS PARA ESTE PROPOSITO

Equipamientos de alzamiento, cuando suministrados, son


proyectados solamente para la sustentacin del motor.
Si el motor por su diseo constructivo tiene dos cncamos de
suspensin, use dispositivos que permitan el izamiento por
ambos elementos al mismo tiempo.
El izamiento as como el descenso del motor deben ser realizados
en forma suave, sin golpes, caso contrario los rodamientos
pueden sufrir daos.

LOS MOTORES CON RODAMIENTOS DE RODILLOS O


DE CONTACTO ANGULAR ESTAN PROTEGIDOS,
DURANTE EL TRANSPORTE, CONTRA DAOS POR
MEDIO DE UN DISPOSITIVO DE BLOQUEO DEL EJE

LOS DISPOSITIVOS DE BLOQUEO DEBEN SER


UTILIZADOS SIEMPRE QUE SE TRANSPORTE
EL MOTOR, AUNQUE ESTO IMPLIQUE
TENERLO QUE DESACOPLAR NUEVAMENTE
DE LA MAQUINA ACCIONADA
2. VERIFICACION EN LA RECEPCION

En la recepcin del motor, verifique si ocurrieron daos durante


el transporte.
En el caso de verificar cualquier dao, avisar inmediatamente la
transportadora, la compaa aseguradora y WEG. No avisar la
transportadora, la compaa aseguradora y WEG puede resulta
en la prdida de la garanta del producto.
No remueva la grasa de proteccin de la punta de eje, tampoco los
tapones que cierran los agujeros de la caja de conexiones, caso
existir. Estos tems de proteccin deben ser mantenidos hasta que
la instalacin completa sea concluida. Despusde la remocin de
su embalaje, una completa inspeccin visual debe ser hecha en

SHIJIAZHUANG KINGDA PUMP INDUSTRY GROUP CO., LTD


TOROMOCHO PROJECT
HARD METAL SLURRY PUMP

LONG-TERM STORAGE INSTRUCTIONS

Hard Metal Slurry Pumps

R05323-P-001A

SHIJIAZHUANG KINGDA PUMP INDUSTRY GROUP Co., Ltd


1st September, 2010

SHIJIAZHUANG KINGDA PUMP INDUSTRY GROUP CO., LTD


LONG-TERM STORAGE INSTRUCTIONS
TOROMOCHO PROJECT
R05323-P-001A, REV A

LONG-TERM STORAGE INSTRUCTIONS


The pumps are shipped fully protected for the commercial shipping and handling that is required for a
given order. Upon receipt, it is necessary that the customer, or an agent of the customer, conduct a
thorough inspection of all pumps and components for completeness of delivery and possible handling
damage. Some small spare parts may be packed separately, if you find damage or loss, please contact
with Kingda and Freight Company immediately.

All shortages should be immediately reported to Kingda.

Note: Any components damaged in shipment should be noted and a claim filed by the responsible
shipping party with the freight company.

Kinda does not warrant any pump or pump components which become damage due to a failure
which adhere to the instructions listed below.

SHIJIAZHUANG KINGDA PUMP INDUSTRY GROUP CO., LTD


LONG-TERM STORAGE INSTRUCTIONS
TOROMOCHO PROJECT
R05323-P-001A, REV A

Outdoor Storage
1. Site selection for outdoor storage of pump and pump components as following:
1.1: Level, well-drained, firm surface, clean, and dry location.
1.2: The environment for pump storage must be dry, dust-free, and well-ventilated. Avoid damage the
bearing because of vibration. The vibration of the storage place is less than 0.2mm/S.
1.3: Isolated or barricaded from possibility of physical damage from transport vehicles, earth working
equipment, and other site erected equipment.
1.4: The inlets and outlets of pumps should be plugged to prevent sundries entering pump cavity.
Accessible for periodic inspection and maintenance.

2. All the pump or pump baseplate should be supported under each corner of its base to allow it to
breathe. Supports (steel beams or wood timbers) of significant size and strength should be placed under
each corner.
All components shipped in crates and pallets must be located and supported such that air can flow under
and around the shipping container.

3. Upon receipt of the Pump and pump components, an initial inspection must be made to ensure that all
protective coatings and/or devices have not been compromised during shipping and handling.
If discrepancies are found, corrective action must be taken to ensure adequate protection of the
equipment during storage.
Particular attention must be paid to:
(a) All bright steel surfaces, journal and machined; such as shafts, end flanges.
(b) All shaft sleeve and bearing surfaces.
(c) All the roller bearing.
(d) All machined surfaces protected with paint

4. It is recommended that all electric motors be stored indoors. The motors are to be stored and protected
in accordance with the requirements of the motor manufacture. Some motors may have low voltage
internal heaters that are to be energized during storage.
If indoor store is not possible, it is necessary that these pumps and components be covered by a tarp
which is loose enough to let the component breathe. In areas of high relative humidity, it may be
necessary to use a desiccant to keep it free of moisture.
Note: WEG will provide the Motor Storage Instructions on all motors supplied by us.
Some motors may have low voltage internal heaters that are to be energized during storage.

SHIJIAZHUANG KINGDA PUMP INDUSTRY GROUP CO., LTD


LONG-TERM STORAGE INSTRUCTIONS
TOROMOCHO PROJECT
R05323-P-001A, REV A

Covered or Indoor Storage


The pumps should be covered or Indoor Storage. Covered storage will consist of any structure with a roof
to protect pumps and pump components from direct sunshine and rain. Indoor storage will consist of a
closed-in structure that will protect from sun, rain, wind and dust.
It is recommended that all electric drive motors should be stored indoors. The motors are to be stored and
protected in accordance with the requirements of the motor manufacture.
If proper indoor storage is not available, then the sensitive components must be covered with a well
drained and ventilated tarp or tent structure.

Attention during Storage


1. If the storage time is not more than 1 month, It is suggested that the pump should rotate by 1/4 turn
by manual every 1 week.

2. If the storage time is longer than 1 month, its recommended that preservative oil is painted on the
inside of the pump. The preservative oil should be replaced every 12 month. (The preservative oil film
must be cleaned before the trial run of the pump).
It is suggested that the pump should rotate by 1/4 turn by manual every 1 week.
For the pumps with packing, if the storage time is too long, replace the old packing.

3. Check all the components every 3 months; if rusted or oxidized, clean the surface and repaint the
preservative oil.

PARTICULAR ATTENTION must be paid to following:


1. Machined surface of rotating parts, as shaft, shaft sleeve, etc.
2. All the roller bearings, adequate lubricating oil should be filled in it to minimize the chance of oxidization
or rust.
3. The temperature of storage environment should not be less than 5 centigrade. It is to prevent the left
water to cracking the water jacket freezingly in the low temperature condition.
4. Measure the insulating resistance of stator with megameter periodically to check if the motor is not
affected with dampness.
5. The end of cable should be packed with adhesive butyl tape to avoid the moisture entering into the
cable.
6. To avoid the quick aging, keep the cable, winding wire and rubber parts away from the direct sunlight,
heat and hot flame.
7. The technical documents should be safely kept from moisture.

SHIJIAZHUANG KINGDA PUMP INDUSTRY GROUP CO., LTD


LONG-TERM STORAGE INSTRUCTIONS
TOROMOCHO PROJECT
R05323-P-001A, REV A

Storage/Maintenance
Period

Task

Action
Re-establish the integrity of all protective coatings and covering devices. Check

Initial receipt of pumps

Inventory

and pump components

Inspection

and

for damage to the surface finish (paint) that may allow rust or corrosion and
repaint as necessary.
-Report any shipping damages to the freight company.
-Report any shortages to Kingda.

After three (3) Months


of Storage

After six (6) Months of


Storage

Re-inspect all pump components, making sure no rust or oxidation is starting to


Inspection

form on machined surfaces. If rust or oxidation is found, the surface(s) must be


cleaned and a protective coating applied.
Re-inspect all pump components, making sure no rust or oxidation is starting to

Inspection

form on machined surfaces. If rust or oxidation is found, the surface(s) must be


cleaned and a protective coating applied.

The customer shall maintain a Periodic Inspection and Maintenance Log documenting condition and
efforts to maintain the protection of the Pump and components.

TOROMOCHO PROJECT
RECOMMENDED SPARE PARTS LIST
PO Number: R05323-P-001A

Equipment Name: Hard Metal Slurry Pumps

Date:20th, May 2011

Vendor:Shijiazhuang Kingda Pump Industry Group Co., Ltd


Vendor Contact: Ms.Wendy WANG Phone:+86 311 80908109 Fax:+86 311 80908116 Email: w_zhao72@163.com

STOCKHOLDINGS

MANUFACTURER'S DATA

Rubber+Fiber
KB04
KB04
KB04
KB04
NBR
NBR
NBR
Natural Rubber
PTFE
3Cr13
Rubber+Fiber
KB04
KB04
KB04
KB04
NBR
NBR
Natural Rubber
Natural Rubber
Natural Rubber
PTFE
4Cr13
Rubber+Fiber
KB04
KB04
KB04
KB04
NBR
NBR
NBR
NBR
Natural Rubber
NBR
2Cr13
3Cr13

245-PP-004
245-PP-005
245-PP-006
245-PP-106
M150KSH-EB/T

245-PP-008
245-PP-108
M50KSG-DB/T

260-PP-065
260-PP-065
M75KSG-EB/T

10

4000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
4000
4000
4000
4000
4000
4000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
4000
4000
4000
4000
4000
4000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
4000
4000
4000
4000
4000
4000

100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100

8
1
1
1
1
3
1
2
1
4
1
6
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
4
1
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1

14

15

64
12
12
12
12
36
8
16
8
32
8
24
6
6
6
6
12
6
4
8
4
16
4
16
6
6
6
6
6
6
4
4
8
4
4
4

N
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
N
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y
Y

64
12
12
12
12
36
8
16
8
32
8
24
6
6
6
6
12
6
4
8
4
16
4
16
6
6
6
6
6
6
4
4
8
4
4
4

16

17
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No

MSDS Applicable

13

to

12

Total Quantity
Ordered

11

18

19

20

21

Re-Order Point

8V-2500
M150KSH-F-01
M150KSH-F-05
M150KSH-F-02
M150KSH-F-06
SBB002-F109
K021-F6-L
K007-F8
K020-F6
SBB004-F111
K010-F
5V-1800
K001-DH2
K005-DH2
K002-DH2
K006-DH2
SBB002-D109
SBB002-EP
K021-C2-LP
K007-DH2
K020-C2
SBB004-D111
K010-D
8V-2500
M75KSHH-EB/T-03J
M75KSHH-EB/T-04
K002-EH3
4/3E-HH-02
SBB002-E109
SBB002-EH122
SBB002-F064
K021-EH3-L
K007-F8
K020-EH3
GRJ-100
8/6E-HH-01

Minimum

8V-2500
M150KSH-F-01
M150KSH-F-05
M150KSH-F-02
M150KSH-F-06
SBB002-F109
K021-F6-L
K007-F8
K020-F6
SBB004-F111
K010-F
5V-1800
K001-DH2
K005-DH2
K002-DH2
K006-DH2
SBB002-D109
SBB002-EP
K021-C2-LP
K007-DH2
K020-C2
SBB004-D111
K010-D
8V-2500
M75KSHH-EB/T-03J
M75KSHH-EB/T-04
K002-EH3
4/3E-HH-02
SBB002-E109
SBB002-EH122
SBB002-F064
K021-EH3-L
K007-F8
K020-EH3
GRJ-100
8/6E-HH-01

Maximum

V-Belt
Impeller
Throat Bush
Volute Liner
Frame Plate Liner Insert
O Ring
Discharge Joint Ring
Volute Liner Seal
Intake Joint Ring
Packing
Shaft Sleeve
V-Belt
Impeller
Throat Bush
Volute Liner
Frame Plate Liner Insert
O Ring
O Ring
Discharge Joint Ring
Volute Liner Seal
Intake Joint Ring
Packing
Shaft Sleeve
V-Belt
Impeller
Throat Bush
Volute Liner
Frame Plate Liner Insert
O Ring
O Ring
O Ring
Discharge Joint Ring
Volute Liner Seal
Intake Joint Ring
Mechanical Seal
Shaft Sleeve

Original
Manufacturers
Name and
Identification
Numbers
(see note 3)

Quality & Inspection


Clauses

strip
piece
piece
piece
piece
set
set
set
piece
set
piece
strip
piece
piece
piece
piece
set
set
set
set
piece
set
piece
strip
piece
piece
piece
piece
set
set
set
set
set
piece
set
piece

Unit Price
(US Dollar)

Inventory Number

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36

Mean Time
Between
Lead Time Quantity
Failure ARO (Days) Installed
MTBF
(Hours)

Storage Requirements

Parent Equipment
Number (List all
applicable tag
numbers)

Capital (Yes / No)

Material
Specification or
Certification
Reference

One Year Operation

Manufacturers
Drawing or Ref. No.

Start-Up

PARTS DESCRIPTION

EOM Part No.


(see note 2)

Commissioning

UNIT OF MEASURE

ITEM NUMBER

be

Required on Site Dates


Commissioning & Start-Up
USD . .
One Year Operation
USD ..

22

23

24

indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor

Remark:
1. Prices keep valid for 30 days since the date of issue.

Kingda-P001A Spare Parts List Unpriced.xls SPL Form

2012/2/2 10:21

Toromocho Project
Lubrication Schedule
Vendor: Shijiazhuang Kingda Pump Industry Group Co., Ltd

Date: 28th October, 2010

Equipment Name: Hard Metal Slurry Pumps

PO No.: R05323-P-001A

Equipment No.

245-PP-004/005/006/106

245-PP-008/108

260-PP-065/165

Pump Model

M150KSH-EB/T

M50KSG-DB/T

M75KSG-EB/T

Pump Speed
(RPM)

Lubricant Type

Lubricant
Manufacturer

Lubricated
Position

Filled Qty
(per each bearing)
(in g)

Replacement
Frequency
(in hours)

lithium grease #2 or #3

pump end

71

1200-630

lithium grease #2 or #3

motor end

71

1200-630

lithium grease #2 or #3

pump end

28

1300

lithium grease #2 or #3

motor end

28

1300

lithium grease #2 or #3

pump end

44

800-750

lithium grease #2 or #3

motor end

44

800-750

810~1050

1350

1200~1280

Tormocho Project
LUBRICATION SCHEDULE
PO Number: R05323-P-001
Vendor :SHIJIAZHUANG KINGDA PUMP
page 1 of 1
EQUIP NO.

245-PP-004
245-PP-005
245-PP-006
245-PP-106

DESCRIPTION, WHERE USED

Front bearing NU322-C3

Equipment: Standard End Suction Pumps


Vendor contact Name : Wang zhao(Wendy)
E-mail :w_zhao72@163.com
LUBRICANT TYPE

POLYREX EM
(polyurea grease

Rear bearing 6319-C3


Front bearing NU319-C3

245-PP-008/108
Rear bearing 6316-C3
Front bearing NU319-C3
260-PP-065/165
Rear bearing 6316-C3

QUANTITY MANUFACTURER

60g

POLYREX EM
(polyurea grease

FREQUENCY OF LUBRICATION &


REMARKS
14875 h

MOBIL
45g

POLYREX EM
(polyurea grease

Date : 16 11 2010
Phone:86-0311-80908102
Fax :86-0311-80908116

20000 h

45g

11859 h
MOBIL

34g

20000 h

45g

11859 h
MOBIL

34g

20000 h

ELECTRIC MOTOR WIRING DIAGRAM

SINGLE SPEED 380V 60HZ MOTOR:

WEG INDSTRIAS S/A

INDEX
Item No.

Description

Datasheets (Pump & Motor), Performance Curve

Installation Drawing

Assembly Drawing

Lifting Diagram

ITP

Ultrasonic Flaw Detection Specification For Shaft Parts

Welding Process Specification

Material Report For Main Parts

Ultrasonic Flaw Detection Report

10

Inspection Report For Parts

11

Inspection Record For Assembly

12

Inspection Record For Painting

13

Inspection Record For Packing

14

Hydraulic Pressure Test Report

15

Performance Test Procedure

16

Performance Test Details Sheet

17

Performance Test Report

18

Vibration Report

19

Noise Report

20

Pump IOM

21

Motor IOM

22

Long Term Storage Instructions

23

Spare Parts List for Operation and 1 Year (Un-priced)

24

Pump Lubrication Schedule

25

Motor Lubrication Schedule

26

Packing List

27

Certification of Conformance

28

Motor Wiring Diagram

CERTIFIED FOR
CONSTRUCTION
By: Wang Zhao (Wendy)
Date: 25 October 2010
Mfr:
SHIJIAZHUANGKINGDA
PUMP

Inspection & Test Plan


Toromocho Project, PO No.: R05323-P-001A
Shijiazhuang Kingda Pump Industry Group Co., Ltd
Project Doc No.: KD-ITP, Rev.01, Date: 18th October, 2010

Inspection and Test Plan


PO No.: R05323-P-001A, Equipment Name: Hard Metal Slurry Pumps
Supervision
Acceptance

Review

Executive

Contractor

Doc.
Liability

No.

1.1

Test Item

Criteria

Methods

Doc.

Doc.

Time

Management

Acceptance of Contract Documents


Signed Contract and

Check the Contract and

Requirements

Vendors Sales

Requirements

Requirements

by the Contract

Department

Dimensional

Certified Drawings and

Drawings and Document

Drawings submitted

Vendors Sales

Drawings

Documents

Inspection

by Vendor

Department

Contract Inspection

Contractor/Owner

1.2

Owner
Time

Inspection

Signature

Acceptance

Time

Inspection &

Signature

Item

Contractor/Owner

Inspection on Raw Materials and Purchased Parts


JB/T8096-1998
GB9439-1998
(ASTM A48-2003)
GB1348-1998
(ASTM A536-2003)
GB2100-2002

Material Composition

(ASTM A743/743a-1993a)
Inspection

of

raw

Analysis and Mechanical


Visual inspection, Chemical test,

Comply with the

Spectrometer, General gauge

Standards

GB/T8263-1999

2.1
materials

Contractor
After arrival at

Quality Management

Factory

Dept.

Purchase

Prosperities Report,

(ASTM A532M-99)

Product Compliance

GB699-1988

Certificate

Dept.

(ASTM A36/A36M-2005)
SBB121.1-29-1997
SBB125.1-28-1997
SBB302.1-12-2008
SBB0158-2003

2.2

Contract Technical

Visual inspection, check Product

Comply with

Requirements

Compliance Certificate

Contract technical

Bearings

After arrival at

Quality

Contractor

Factory

Management

Purchase

Product Compliance

No. 239, Tianshan Street, Shijiazhuang City, Hebei Province, China


Tel: +86 311 80908109
Fax: +86 311 80908116
Email: w_zhao72@163.com

Inspection & Test Plan


Toromocho Project, PO No.: R05323-P-001A
Shijiazhuang Kingda Pump Industry Group Co., Ltd
Project Doc No.: KD-ITP, Rev.01, Date: 18th October, 2010
requirement
Comply with
2.3

Contract Technical

Visual inspection, check Product

Requirements

Compliance Certificate

WEG Motors

Dept.

Quality

Contractor

Management

Purchase

Dept.

Dept.

Quality

Contractor

Management

Production

Dept.

Dept.

After arrival at
Contract technical

Product Compliance
Factory

requirement
3

Dept.

Inspection and Test in Pump Production Process


SBB139-2001

Material Composition

Inspection Before
3.1
Casting

Comply with the


SBB131-1998

Spectrometer

Analysis and Mechanical

Before Pouring

Standards
Prosperities Report

SBB122-2000
SBB139-2001
SBB122-2000

Spectrometer,

SBB131-1998

Carbon-Sulfur Analyzer,

Material Composition
Comply with the

3.2

Castings

Standards
GB1348-1988

Contractor
After

Quality Management

heat treatment

Dept.

Production

Analysis and Mechanical

Chemical Test, General Gauge

Prosperities Report

Dept.

(ASTM A536-2003)

3.3

Quality

Contractor

Management

Production

Dept.

Dept.

During

Quality

Contractor

Machining

Management

Production

Process

Dept.

Dept.

Quality

Contractor

Management

Production

Dept.

Dept.

Quality

Contractor

Management

Production

Dept.

Dept.

SBB131-1998

Hardness Tester,

Comply with the

Heat Treatment

After

SBB165-2009

Universal Tester

Standards

Report

heat treatment

Heat Treatment

Comply with the


SBB2105-87
Inspection in

General Tools,

Standards and

Machining Dimension

Special Tools

Drawing

Inspection Record

SBB061-2003

3.4
Machining Process

Drawing Requirements
Requirements

Impeller Static
3.5

SBB061-2003

4.1

Shafft Inspection

YB-T036.T-92

Impeller Static Blancing

Static Balance

Standard

Report

Test

Balancing Test Frame

Balancing,

3.6

Comply with the

Comply with the

Shaft Ultrasonics

Shaft Inspection

Standard

Detection Report

Test

Ultrasonic Detection

Assembly, Test, Painting and Packing

Assembly

SBB2103-2000

Comply with the

Clearance Inspection

Standards and

Record in Assembly

General Gauge

Quality

Management

Contractor

After Assembly

No. 239, Tianshan Street, Shijiazhuang City, Hebei Province, China


Tel: +86 311 80908109
Fax: +86 311 80908116
Email: w_zhao72@163.com

Dept.

Production

Inspection & Test Plan


Toromocho Project, PO No.: R05323-P-001A
Shijiazhuang Kingda Pump Industry Group Co., Ltd
Project Doc No.: KD-ITP, Rev.01, Date: 18th October, 2010
Drawing

SBB064-2004

Dept.

Requirements
Drawing Requirements
GB/T5656-94,
Hydraulic
4.2

Contractor
Visual Inspection,

Comply with the

Hydraulic Pressure Test

After Assembly,

Quality Management

Pressure gauge

standards

Report

Witness Point

Dept.

Production

SBB064-1998,
Pressure Test
(HI 1.6-2000/API610)

Dept.

Contract Technical
Requirements
GB3216-2005
(HI 1.6-2000/

Comply with the

ASME B73.1M/B73.2M)

Standards and

Pump Performance

After Assembly,

Quality

JB/T8097-1999

Contract Technical

Running Test Report

Witness Point

Dept.

GB3214-91,

Requirements

Performance
4.3

Contractor

Noise

Management
Production

Pump Test Station

Vibration

Dept.
GB10890,
GB10889
SBB064-2004
Contract Technical

Comply with the


Contractor

4.4

Requirements SBB097-2008

Visual Inspection,

Standards and

Assembly Inspection

SBB0159-1998

Coating Thickness Meter

Contract Technical

Record

Painting

Quality

Management
Production

After Painting
Dept.

Dept.
JB/T4297-1992

Requirements

Contract Technical
Comply with the
Requirements

Contractor
Standards and

4.5

Packing

SBB0157-1997

Assembly Inspection

Visual Inspection

Quality

Contract Technical

Management
Production

After Packing
Dept.

Record

SBB0167-2009

Dept.
Requirements

GB/T13384-1992
5

Relese for Shippment


Release for
Release for

5.1

Contract requirements

As per Contract Requirements

shipment from

Hold Point

shipment
Owner

No. 239, Tianshan Street, Shijiazhuang City, Hebei Province, China


Tel: +86 311 80908109
Fax: +86 311 80908116
Email: w_zhao72@163.com

ULTRASONIC FLAW DETECTION


SPECIFICATION
FOR
SHAFT PARTS

TOROMOCHO PROJECT

Supplier:

SHIJIAZHUANG KINGDA PUMP INDUSTRY GROUP CO., LTD

Reviewed And Approved:

Date:

November, 2011

SHIJIAZHUANG KINGDA PUMP INDUSTRY GROUP CO., LTD


ULTRASONIC FLAW DETECTION SPECIFICATION
Doc No.: WPS-UD-2011, Date: Nov, 2011, Rev 00

GENERAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION


FOR ULTRASONIC FLAW DETECTIOIN FOR SHAFT PARTS
1. General Provision
1.1 Application Scope
This Specification applies for the testing of internal incontinuity of forgings sourced by Kingda by using A
Type Pulse Reflection Ultrasonic Detection method.
This Specification is not applied to work piece of austenite coarse grained.
1.2 Acceptance Standard
GB/T 4162 Forged And Rolled Steel Bars - Method For Ultrasonic Testing
GB/T 7736 Ultrasonic Inspecting Method For Macro-Structure And Imperfection Of Steel
1.3 If special requirements, inspection and acceptance will be carried as per Standards in relative
agreements, drawing and process.
1.4 Requirements for Inspectors
The inspectors should have Ultrasonic Flaw Detection Technology Certification, and the Inspector who will
sign the Report must be qualified for II Grade or Above Certification.
2. Detection Equipment And Instruments
2.1 Ultrasonic Flaw Detector
The ultrasonic flaw detector should be tested for its fuction as per the methods specified in JB/T
10061-1999, and its quota should be meet following:
a). Surplus Sensitivity: N36dB
b). Vertical Linearity Tolerance: D6%
c). Horizontal Linearity Tolerance: 1%
d). Dynamic Range: 30dB.
2.2 Probe
Usually straight beam probe is selected for detection; angle beam probe is selected for assistant detection.
The operation frequency of probe must meet the requirements to penetrate and explore the work piece,
nominal frequency of 2-5MHz is used, and probe crystal diameter or side length is 10-25mm.
2.3 Coupling Medium
Coupling medium whichever can give good coupling effect and is not harmful to body and work piece
should be selected.
The same coupling medium must be used for adjustment, calibration and inspection of equipments.
NO. 239, TIANSHAN STREET, SHIJIAZHUANG CITY, HEBEI PROVINCE, CHINA

SHIJIAZHUANG KINGDA PUMP INDUSTRY GROUP CO., LTD


ULTRASONIC FLAW DETECTION SPECIFICATION
Doc No.: WPS-UD-2011, Date: Nov, 2011, Rev 00

2.4 Test Block


When test forged parts, the test block should be selected according to probe and condition of surface to be
detected, for example, CSI standard test block.
Equipment can also be adjusted according to test block as per GB/T 4162 or GB/T 7736.
3. Detection
3.1 Detection Method
Detection method is generally P-wave reflection, SH-wave reflection can be added if necessary.

A: Necessary detecting direction


B: Detecting direction which needs to be negotiated
Detection At Axial And Circumferential Direction For Shaft Parts
3.2 Detection Time
Usually the detection should be carried after entry of source parts into plant or after heat treatment.
If there any special requirements, the detection should be carried as per special time.
3.3 Detection Procedure
3.3.1 Treatment on Surface of Work Piece
Usually the roughness of surface of work piece should be R06.3m; Roughness may be enlarged for
coarse surface, but not more than 12.5m.
The flaws as mill scale, dirties, paint and pit which can influence the acoustic coupling must be removed or
machined.
3.3.2 Adjustment of Instrument
3.3.2.1 Adjustment of Scan Speed
Generally it is required that forward base of first bottom wave should be not more than 80% of width of
oscilloscope screen in order to observe the situation of other signals after first bottom wave.
3.3.2.2 Adjustment of Sustained Sensitivity
For the work piece with thickness of position tested 3N, bottom wave adjustment method can be used;
For the work piece with thickness of position tested 3N or the surface is very rough, test pad adjustment
NO. 239, TIANSHAN STREET, SHIJIAZHUANG CITY, HEBEI PROVINCE, CHINA

SHIJIAZHUANG KINGDA PUMP INDUSTRY GROUP CO., LTD


ULTRASONIC FLAW DETECTION SPECIFICATION
Doc No.: WPS-UD-2011, Date: Nov, 2011, Rev 00

method can be used.


When the surface shape and roughness of test pad is different from the work piece, coupling compensation
and attenuation compensation methods can be used.
3.3.2.3 Adjustment of Scan Sensitivity
6dB should be amplified based on the inspection sensitivity in order to easily find the defects, but estimation
on the defects should be based on the inspection sensitivity level.
3.4 Inspection Frequency
3.4.1 If no special requirement, the sample test should be made as per SBB302.1-2008.
3.4.2 If any special requirements, the test should be made as per requirements.
3.4.3 For the tested work piece, whole detecting should be made.
3.5 Scan Detection
3.5.1 Scan Type
Usually whole scan should be used.
3.5.2 Scan Speed
In order to ensure the defects can be clearly found, the scan speed should not more than 150mm/s.
3.5.3 Scan Distance
It is required that 15% overlapping should be done between two scans.
3.6 Calibration of Instruments
After detection, the instrument should be calibrated for sensitivity; if the sensitivity can not meet the
requirements, calibration should be done.
4. Estimation of Defects
Usually defects will be estimated according to the reflection and bottom reflection results, including defect
position and size, if necessary, the nature of defects can be estimated.
4.1 Estimation of Defect Position
To determine the surface position of defect according to the probe work position;
To determine he depth of defects according to that tested in oscilloscope screen.
4.2 Estimation of Defect Size
4.2.1 For flat defect of small wafer size, equivalent size of defect should be estimated according to the echo
margin shown in oscilloscope screen.
4.2.2 For flat defect of large wafer size, the length and area of defect should be estimated by 6dB or half
wave height method.
NO. 239, TIANSHAN STREET, SHIJIAZHUANG CITY, HEBEI PROVINCE, CHINA

SHIJIAZHUANG KINGDA PUMP INDUSTRY GROUP CO., LTD


ULTRASONIC FLAW DETECTION SPECIFICATION
Doc No.: WPS-UD-2011, Date: Nov, 2011, Rev 00

4.2.3 For the defect of volume type, circumferential direction detection method can be used.
5. Quality Estimation
Estimation should be made as per GB/T 4162 and GB/T 7736; if any, special requirements can be followed.
After the detection, if disputes, it can be confirmed by low-power etch test.
6. Inspection Record And Report
6.1 Inspection report include: specification, grade, heat number, standard, quality grade and quantity,
issued by who and date, etc.
6.2 Inspection record should include position of defect, size of equivalent, distance and length of defects,
and drop of bottom wave, etc.

NO. 239, TIANSHAN STREET, SHIJIAZHUANG CITY, HEBEI PROVINCE, CHINA

SHIJIAZHUANG KINGDA PUMP INDUSTRY GROUP CO., LTD


WELDING PROCESS SPECIFICATION FOR REPAIR OF CASTINGS
Doc No.: WPS-KD-2011, Date: Oct, 2011, Rev 00

Process Specification of Welding


1. Preparation Before Welding
1.1 Operator must be very well acquainted with the drawings, process specification and relative
documents.
1.2 Operator must carefully check the material grades and dimensions of parts and casting
which are going to be welded.
1.3 Calibers and scales must be marked with inspection certificate. The tools and auxiliary
devices must be reliable.
1.4 The welding machine must be in good condition, grounding and good in insulation.
1.5 Select welding materials as per specification.
1.6 Welding rods must be complete dry, if the rods are wet, make dry treatment as following
table:
Dry Methods for Welding Rod
Type of Rod

Dry Temperature ()

Dry Time (hour)

acid-type

70150

11.5

alkaline-type

250350

12

Note: usually, the acid rod may not be dried before using, the alkaline rod (including S.S. rod) must be dried
treatment before using.

2. Welding
2.1 Clear water, oil stain, rust and burrs within 20mm to 30mm at two sides of weld seam and
bevel before welding.
2.2 For the parts to be beveled, the shape and dimension of bevel should conform to GB985-88
Standard.
2.3 Select welding rod as following Specification Table:
Selection of Welding Rod
Thickness of Welding Part (mm)

Diameter of Rod (mm)

3.2

412

3.24.0

12

4.0

2.4 Welding Current Selection of Common Welding Rod as following:


Reference Current (A)
NO. 239, TIANSHAN STREET, SHIJIAZHUANG CITY, HEBEI PROVINCE, CHINA

SHIJIAZHUANG KINGDA PUMP INDUSTRY GROUP CO., LTD


WELDING PROCESS SPECIFICATION FOR REPAIR OF CASTINGS
Doc No.: WPS-KD-2011, Date: Oct, 2011, Rev 00
Rod Dia.

2.5

3.2

4.0

5.0

E4303

7090

90130

160220

220270

E4303

7090

90130

160190

180230

(mm)
Welding Grade

Note: upper limit for thick plate; the current of horizontal welding is about 10% less than downward welding.

2.5 General Principle for Welding Procedure


2.5.1 It must not produce rigid constraint force against the others of welding seam at the
beginning welding.
2.5.2 One end of each seam should be kept shrink freely at welding.
2.5.3 If the seam length is 1000mm for manual arc welding, generally continuous straight
welding method is used; back-step welding or section back-step welding may be used when
length is 1000mm.
2.6 Generating the arc: it is forbidden to generate the arc on the machined surface and locating
surface; the arc should be generated on the run-on plate and then transit to workpiece.
2.7 Arc Manipulation
2.7.1 Screw type is suitable for the first layer with any welding position and thin plate welding.
2.7.2 Wave type is suitable for the surface welding of downward welding, horizontal welding,
and overhead welding.
2.7.3 8 shape type is suitable for downward and surface welding.
2.7.4 Zigzag type is suitable for horizontal welding.
2.8 Welding: before welding, the current should be regulated on the test plate till the current is
suitable.
2.8.1 Downward welding: the welding seam is at on horizontal level. arc manipulation should be
steady and fully fill the arc crater.
2.8.2 Vertical welding: the welding seam is vertical to the level ground. When vertical welding,
short arc small current should be used, dont swing the rod bigly.
2.8.3 Overhead welding and horizontal welding: welding seam is horizontal or overhead
position. Shortest arc and smallest current should be kept to ensure fused drop transmitted to
metal.
2.9 Correction and Cleaning of Weldment
NO. 239, TIANSHAN STREET, SHIJIAZHUANG CITY, HEBEI PROVINCE, CHINA

SHIJIAZHUANG KINGDA PUMP INDUSTRY GROUP CO., LTD


WELDING PROCESS SPECIFICATION FOR REPAIR OF CASTINGS
Doc No.: WPS-KD-2011, Date: Oct, 2011, Rev 00

2.9.1 Make the correction on the deforms produced in welding with flame correction or
mechanical correction.
2.9.2 Clean spatters, slags and flashes after welding.
2.9.3 The key parts and rigid parts should be distressing tempering treatment after welding.
3. Quality Requirements
3.1 Inspect the weldments for surface appearance and quality as per drawing and specification.
3.2 Welding seam should conform to Welding Seam Quality Standard.

NO. 239, TIANSHAN STREET, SHIJIAZHUANG CITY, HEBEI PROVINCE, CHINA

SHIJIAZHUANG KINGDA PUMP INDUSTRY GROUP CO., LTD


WELDING PROCESS SPECIFICATION FOR REPAIR OF CASTINGS
Doc No.: WPS-KD-2011, Date: Oct, 2011, Rev 00

Process Specification for Weld Repair of Iron Casting


1. Permission Condition for Welding Repair
1.1 When the castings need to be welded repair, it must be approved by Quality Management
Department.
1.2 The permissive condition for the casting welded repair should conform to SBB122 <Pump
Casting Technical Conditions>, drawing and requirements in Contract.
2. Selection of Welding Method
Generally arc welding is used for casting weld repair, arc welding is divided into cold welding
and heat welding.
Application Range: Generally, welding repair will be used at non-machined position which has
low requirement for stress or strength or for defects found in and after machining or fine
machining. Because the correction of heat treatment after weld repair can not be used, in the
condition that its function (quality and precision) will not be influenced by the deformation or
stress caused by partial heating, cold arc welding may be used; when the heating material will
easily crack, heat arc welding can be used.
For iron casting, cold arc welding usually is used.
3.

Preparation before Welding

3.1 Clean up the impurities at defect of casting with shovel, chisel, grinding wheel or other
methods, make it to be V shape with 60-80 or X bevel to expose the metal, sharp angle must
be rounded. All existing web cracks were arrested by drilling 4-8mm holes at the ends of the
cracks.
3.2 Remove the oil dirty at and around the defects with solution or flame.
3.3 Brush muddy water all around defect to avoid weld drop attach the machined surface.
3.4 Use Z308 pure nickel rod (3.2, 4.2), this rod is required to be kept for 1 hour at temperature of
80-120.
3.5 Generally, preheating is not required for cold arc welding; if preheating required, written
approval must be obtained from Quality Department.
4. Welding Repair
4.1 Selection of Rod Diameter and Welding Current
Rod Diameter (mm)

Welding Current (A)

NO. 239, TIANSHAN STREET, SHIJIAZHUANG CITY, HEBEI PROVINCE, CHINA

SHIJIAZHUANG KINGDA PUMP INDUSTRY GROUP CO., LTD


WELDING PROCESS SPECIFICATION FOR REPAIR OF CASTINGS
Doc No.: WPS-KD-2011, Date: Oct, 2011, Rev 00

3.2

70-100

4.2

100-140

4.2 The seams should be successively welded layer by layer. Welding length of single layer is
10-15mm, beat the welding seam with 0.5-1.0 kg hammer to make the seam to be spot shape;
after the temperature of welded position is cooled down to 100, then proceed to welding.
When the welding repair is multi-layer, repeat the operation as single layer welding.
5. Cleaning After Welding
Trim the welding seam on the machined and nonmachined surface with grinding wheel, and
clear the weld drop on the casting and machined surface.
6. Inspection After Welding
6.1 For the requirements of relieving of stress, make inspection after the heat treatment.
6.2 Inspect the grinded effect of welded position to check if it can meet the requirements for
welding repair.
6.3 If the welding position is on non machined surface, check if the welded position is as smooth
as casting itself.
6.4 If the welding position is on the machined surface, check if the welded junction can meet
the requirements of machining.
6.5 Besides required NDT, usually visual inspection is just needed to conform if the weld repairs
meet the quality requirements, defects are left after welding.
6.6 For the casting sustaining the liquid pressure or air pressure, the air tight hydrostatic test
or gas inspection.

NO. 239, TIANSHAN STREET, SHIJIAZHUANG CITY, HEBEI PROVINCE, CHINA


Performance Test Procedure of Centrifugal Pump

1.
2.
3.
1. Preparation before Test
1.1 Define items to be tested;
1.2 Define test criteria and acceptance standard
1.3 Define test field and select test bed

1.
2.
3.
4.
2. Install Pump on Test Bed
2.1 Install pump, motor (if any, gear box), pump intake pipe and discharge pipe;
2.2 Connect pressure gauge, flow meter and electrical meters;
2.3 Connect shaft seal water, cover the motor with water-proof facilities;
2.4 Connect power supply cable with motor, make trial running, and paste
light-sensitive paper for speed.

1.
2.
3.
4.
3. Test
3.1 Start the test, check rise in bearing temperature, leakage of shaft seal, vibration,
and noise;
3.2 Record pressure of suction and discharge, flow rate, current, voltage, power,
speed, etc;
3.3 Draft performance curve;
3.4 Make judgment on the test result.


Test Details Sheet

1 / Pump Details

R05323-P-001A

P.O. No.:

260-PP-065

Equipment No.
1036143-0001-07

Kingda Contract No.

NJA065

Doc. No.

M75KSG-EB/T

Pump Model

2 /Motor Details

WEG

Make

1010904701

Serial No.
447T

Motor Model

260-PP-065-M1

Motor No.
90KW

Motor Rating

1780

Motor Speed

3 /Test Details

17:30

Pump Started

18:30

Pump Stopped
43

Bearing Temp.

2011.11.09

Test Date
19

Ambient Temp.

19

Water Temp.

4 /Performance Test Data Tolerance & Standard


/Parameter

/Flow

/Head

/Efficiency

/Standard: ANSI/HI 1.6-B

5 Mechanical Run Tolerance & Standard


5.1 /Vibration

/Standard: JB/T8097-1999
/As per Order Spec.: 85dbA/Max 85

5.2 /Noise Level


dB(A)
/Standard: JB/T8096-1998
5.3 /Rise in Temp. Acceptance
/Measured Temp.

SERIES (M/R) KSH/KSG SLURRY PUMP

INSTALLATION, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE

MANUAL

SHIJIAZHUANG KINGDA PUMP INDUSTRY GROUP CO.,LTD


2010

Series (M/R) KSH/KSG Slurry Pump


Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual
Shijiazhuang Kingda Pump Industry Group Co.,Ltd

Content

1. General Introduction....2

2. Construction.3

3. Installation..6

4. Operation..12

5. Maintenance.17

6. Possible Failures, Cause and Solutions...20

Series (M/R) KSH/KSG Slurry Pump


Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual
Shijiazhuang Kingda Pump Industry Group Co.,Ltd

1. GENERAL INTRODUCTION
Series (M/R) KSH/KSG Pump is also called High Efficiency Slurry Pump. Because these pumps
are fitted with thick wear-resistant parts and heavy frame, so they are suitable to pump the slurry
of highly abrasion, high or low content and high head. During the max permissible working
pressure range, these pumps can be operated in serial. They also can transport the corrosive
slurries.
TYPE DEMONSTRATION:

Frame Type/Lubrication Type


Pump Type
Pump Discharge Diameter. (mm)
Metal Lined/Rubber Lined
Example: M200KSH (/KSG)-FA (/B)
M/R

M for Metal Liner, R for Rubber Liner

200

Discharge Diameter is 200 mm

KSH

Kingda Heavy-duty Slurry Pump

KSG

Kingda High-head Slurry Pump

Frame Type

A/B

A for oil lubrication, B for grease lubrication

Series (M/R) KSH/KSG Slurry Pump


Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual
Shijiazhuang Kingda Pump Industry Group Co.,Ltd

2. CONSTRUCTION
2.1 Pump Head (See Figure 1 and Figure 2)
Both Series (M/R) KSH/KSG metal-lined and rubber-lined pump have construction of
double-casing. They have the replaceable wear-resistant metal liner or rubber liner (including the
impeller, liner, frame plate, etc). Pump casing and cover are made of ductile cast iron; their
construction is vertically split and connected with the bolts. The casing is connected with the
frame with the bolt. When the suction of the pump is installed horizontally, the discharge can be
orientated in any 8 positions at 45 intervals. The front and rear cover plates of impeller have the
back vanes to decrease the leakage and raise the service life of the pumps. Viewing the pump
from the drive side, it should rotate clockwise.

Figure 1 Construction Drawing of MKSH/MKSG (Metal-lined)


Discharge diameter<40mm, open type impeller; Discharge diameter>40mm, enclosed type impeller.
1

Frame

Pump Cover

Cover Plate

Impeller

Liner

Pump Casing

Frame Plate

Packing Box

Series (M/R) KSH/KSG Slurry Pump


Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual
Shijiazhuang Kingda Pump Industry Group Co.,Ltd

Figure 2 Construction Drawing of RKSH/RKSG (Rubber-lined)


Discharge diameter<40mm, open type impeller; Discharge diameter>40mm, enclosed type impeller.
1

Frame

Pump Cover

Cover Plate (R)

Impeller

Cover Liner

Pump Casing

Frame Liner

Packing Box

2.2 Shaft Seal


There three types of shaft seals, packing seal, expeller seal and mechanical seal.
(1) Packing Seal: simple construction and easy maintenance. Shaft seal water is required. For the
condition which does not need the expeller seal, the packing seal can be used.
(2) Expeller Seal: Expeller seal can be used on the single stage pump or the first stage pump in
serial when the suction positive pressure is not more than the discharge pressure by 10%. The
expeller seal does not require the shaft seal water, and the slurry will not be diluted, which can
reach good sealing effect.
(3) Mechanical Seal: Mechanical seal features for highly wear resistant and shock resistance. It
can get non-leak sealing effect under various bad conditions, and be easily installed and

Series (M/R) KSH/KSG Slurry Pump


Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual
Shijiazhuang Kingda Pump Industry Group Co.,Ltd

replaced.
2.3 Transmission Part
During the bearing assembly of (M/R) KSH/KSG Pump, the pump has large diameter, high
stiffness and short cantilever, which will not bend and vibrate under the bad working conditions.
According to the different transmitted power, heavy single-row or double-row tapered roller
bearings can be selected. These bearings can stand the max axial and radial load of the pump. Oil
lubrication is used for the bearing. Seal cover, labyrinth bush, water-proof cover and guard cover
are fitted at the both sides of the bearing body, to prevent the impurities and water from entering
into the bearing and ensure the normal and safe operation of the bearing.

Series (M/R) KSH/KSG Slurry Pump


Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual
Shijiazhuang Kingda Pump Industry Group Co.,Ltd

3. INSTALLATION
3.1 Installation of Bearing Assembly (See Figure 3 and 4)
Heat the bearing inner ring before assembly, the temperature is not allowed to be over 120 and
the inner ring must contact the shaft shoulder closely. For the double row tapered roller bearing,
the inner ring, the outer ring and position bush is a package, not allowed to exchange with the
respective parts of the like bearings. For frame A, B, C, D, E, F, G, the bearing is single row
tapered roller type; when in assembly, adjust the pad at the bearing end cover to ensure the axial
clearance. The axial clearance should be in accordance with the following table:
Frame

FG

Axial Clearance (mm)

0.05-0.15

0.1-0.2

0.15-0.25

0.18-0.28

0.4-0.6

0.5-0.6

For frame R, S, ST, T, TU, U, the bearing at the pump end is double row tapered roller type and
motor end is cylindrical roller bearing, there is no need to adjust the axial clearance for these
bearings.
Proper grease has been filled when assembling the bearing. The seal at the bearing end is
labyrinth ring or bush type; notice the relative arrangement of breach on the diametrical
direction when assembling the labyrinth ring.
Recommend using lithium base grease 2# or 3# and filled quantity as following:
Frame
B

R.

S.

T.

RS

ST

TU

Lubrication
Drive End (g)

30

50

100

200

500

1150

200

500

1150

Driven End (g)

30

50

100

200

500

1150

400

1000

2300

Series (M/R) KSH/KSG Slurry Pump


Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual
Shijiazhuang Kingda Pump Industry Group Co.,Ltd

Figure 3 Constructions Drawing of R, S, ST, TU, T, U Frame Bearing Assembly


1

Labyrinth Bush

Oil Cup

Bearing Body

End Cover

End Cover Seal Pad

Shaft

Figure 4

Bearing

Construction Drawing of A,B,C,D,E,F,G Frame Bearing Assembly

Labyrinth Bush

Oil Cup

Grease Blocker

Bearing Body

Bearing

Adjusting Pad

End Cover

Shaft

3.2 Installation of Shaft Packing Seal


Shaft packing seal assembly includes packing box, shaft sleeve, position bush, seal ring, packing,
packing pad, lantern ring, front lantern ring and packing gland. Packing seal assembly is divided
into lantern ring structure and front lantern ring structure. Front lantern ring structure is the
standard-installed type, and you can see Figure 5 (1) and Figure 5 (2) for the installation drawing.
Lantern ring structure should be used for the condition of suction, for example of installation way
7

Series (M/R) KSH/KSG Slurry Pump


Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual
Shijiazhuang Kingda Pump Industry Group Co.,Ltd

in Figure 6 (1) and (2). Take notice that the seal ring must be in the right position between shaft
sleeve and position bush, and the shaft sleeve and impeller.
Figure 5 (1) and Figure 6 (1) are the construction drawing for the pump of discharge diameter
less than 150mm;
Figure 5 (2) and Figure 6 (2) are the construction drawing for the pump of discharge diameter
more than 500mm.
Selection of the packing: when the working pressure of the pump is below 1MPa (10kgf/cm2),
asbestos fibers dip mica packing is usually used; asbestos fibers soaked PTFE packing is usually
used when the pressure is higher than 1MPa (10kgf/cm2) or pumping the corrosive slurry.

Figure 5(1) Packing Seal Construction

Figure 6(1) Packing Seal Construction

Standard Type

For Suction-Up Condition

Shaft Sleeve

Packing

Shaft Sleeve

Packing

Packing Box

Front Lantern Ring

Packing Box

Lantern Ring

Seal Ring

Locating Bush

Seal Ring

Locating Bush

Packing Pad

Series (M/R) KSH/KSG Slurry Pump


Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual
Shijiazhuang Kingda Pump Industry Group Co.,Ltd

Figure 5(2) Packing Seal Construction

Figure 6(2) Packing Seal Construction

Standard Type

For Suction-Up Condition

Shaft Sleeve

Packing

Shaft Sleeve

Packing

Packing Box

Front Lantern Ring

Packing Box

Lantern Ring

Packing Pad

3.3 Installation of Expeller Seal


Expeller seal assembly includes expeller, release cover shaft sleeve, lantern ring, packing pad,
packing, packing gland, etc. Every part must be installed at right position as in Figure 7.

Figure 7 Seal Construction of Expeller


1

Packing Gland

Release Cover

Expeller

Shaft Sleeve

Series (M/R) KSH/KSG Slurry Pump


Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual
Shijiazhuang Kingda Pump Industry Group Co.,Ltd
5

Seal Ring

Packing

Lantern Ring

Packing Pad

3.4 Installation of Mechanical Seal


Mechanical seal assembly includes Cartridge type mechanical seal, seal box, seal ring, etc.
Strictly install the mechanical seal according to the Manual. See Figure 8 for construction.

Figure 8 Construction of Mechanical Seal


1

Seal Box

Seal Ring

Mechanical Seal

3.5 Installation of Pump Head


Firstly fit the pump body on the frame, then put the shaft seal assembly into the pump body; fit
the rear guard plate and impeller with rear hanging pipe and rear set nut; fit the liner with the
hanging beam and use the bolts to press the liner against the pump body; fit the front guard the
plate into the pump cover, bolt the pump cover, front plate together with the pump body and
fasten all the bolts and nuts. For rubber liner pump, the front liner should be firstly put into the
pump cover and fasten the bolts, then assembly the pump body and pump cover; coat the soapy
water and rubber lubricant at the contact surface for the easy assembly; take notice that the seal
pads should be put at the right position and compressed; to assure the correct position and easy
assembly, the rear guard plate and rear liner hang pipe *302, rear guard plate and rear liner
position nut *302 and liner hanging beam *304 can be used. Following Figures show the
10

Series (M/R) KSH/KSG Slurry Pump


Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual
Shijiazhuang Kingda Pump Industry Group Co.,Ltd

methods.
The pump with ST, T and TU has release ring; before dismantling, the three hex bolts should be
removed and screw them into thither bolt hole on the release ring to jack the three pressure pad
on the shaft to loose the impeller.

Figure 9
1. Rear Guard Plate and Rear Liner Hang Pipe x302
2. Rear Guard Plate and Rear Liner Setting Nut x303
3. Liner Hang Beam x304

11

Series (M/R) KSH/KSG Slurry Pump


Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual
Shijiazhuang Kingda Pump Industry Group Co.,Ltd

4. OPERATION
4.1 Startup
Check the whole machine unit as following procedure before start up:
(1): The pump should be installed on the solid base to bear the whole pump weight to absorb the
vibration and fasten all the foundation bolts.
(2): The pipeline and valves should be separately supported. There is seal pad at the pump flange.
Notice that the pump metal liner may be higher than flange surface when fastening the bolts, and
the bolts should be not over-fastened to avoid damaging the seal pad.
(3): Rotate the pump shaft in accordance with the pump rotation direction, the shaft should drive
the impeller without the friction; if not, the impeller clearance should be adjusted.
(4): Check the motor rotation direction to make sure it can drive the pump rotate toward the
arrow. Reverse rotation may cause the impeller screw stripped and damage the pump, so its
forbidden.
(5): For direct coupling drive, the pump shaft and motor shaft should be strictly centered. The
pump shaft and motor shaft should be in parallel for the belt transmission and adjust the pulley
position to make it vertical to the belt. For the pulley unit of SPA Type and
and

SPB
SPC

SPA
SPB

Type, SPB Type

Type, the adjustment of the pulley should reach the requirements of 1=2 in Figure 10.

(6): A short removable pipe should be fit at the suction of the pump, its length is enough to
disassemble the pump cover, replace the wearing parts and inspect the pump. See the Outline
Dimensional Drawing for the length of this short pipe.
(7): Check shaft seal: for the pumps of expeller seal, when the oil cup is fit with the release gland,
the lubricating grease should be filled through the oil cup; and Sodium-calcium grease is

12

Series (M/R) KSH/KSG Slurry Pump


Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual
Shijiazhuang Kingda Pump Industry Group Co.,Ltd

recommended.
For the pumps of packing seal, firstly turn on the shaft sealing water system to check if the water
quantity and pressure is proper before the startup of the pump; adjust the packing gland set
screw to regulate the tension of the packing; adjust shaft seal water (that the leak quantity at the
packing gland is drop by drop); if too tight, the shaft sleeve will heat easily and power will be
consumed more; if too loose, the leak quantity will be very large. The shaft seal water pressure
usually is higher than pump discharge pressure by 3.5X10-2MPa (0.35kgf/cm2). See following
table for shaft seal water quantity:
Frame Type

E.F

R.RS

S.ST

T.TU

Shaft Seal Water Quantity (L/s)

0.15

0.25

0.35

0.55

0.70

1.2

0.70

1.2

1.6

2.1

(8) Adjustment for the Belt Pretightening Force


We recommend following method for reference:
(8.1) First calculate thee pretightening force Q:
Q=

510(2.5 C 1 ) P C 2
+ mv 2 (Newton)
C1 Z V

(8.2) Then find the e value on the curve according to the pretightening force and belt type;
e . L
(8.3) Find f through formula f=100 ;

(8.4) Find R value of respective V-belt in Table 1, and adjust the center distance of both pulleys
according to the methods in Figure 11 to reach the required pretightening force. Usually, if the
overall reduction is no more than f when loading the Newton force, it reaches the required
pretightening force Q.
In the formula:
Q: the minimum pretightening force of each belt in the static state, unit is Newton;
13

Series (M/R) KSH/KSG Slurry Pump


Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual
Shijiazhuang Kingda Pump Industry Group Co.,Ltd

f:

Overall reduction of belt, unit is mm

C1: Angle coefficient is about 0.9


C2: Operation coefficient is about 1.4
L: Center distance of pulleys
P: Motor Rated Power, KW
Z: V-Belt Quantity
V: linear velocity, m/s
m: Centrifugal force coefficient (see Figure 1)
e: Reduction e of each 100mm hang length, see Figure 11.
Table 1
Type

SPA

SPB

SPC

SPZ

R (N)

60

90

120

30

0.12

0.20

0.38

0.08

Adjust the V-belt till the final pretightening force is the minimum when the load is at max; when
several belts are used at the same time, the circumference of each belt should be basically the
same to assure the equal force.

Figure 10

14

Series (M/R) KSH/KSG Slurry Pump


Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual
Shijiazhuang Kingda Pump Industry Group Co.,Ltd

Figure 11

After adjustment of the V-belt, check if the impeller can rotate normally again; if possible, start
the pump with clear water (before it begins to pump the slurry); turn on the suction pipe valve,
start the motor, check the pressure and flow quantity at the suction and discharge, check the
leakage at the packing. If the packing heats, loose the packing gland bolts to make the leakage
bigger; adjust the leakage to the specified value till the packing run-in with the shaft.
4.2 Operation
(1): Periodically check the pressure and flow quantity of shaft seal water, and adjust the packing
gland and replace the packing during the operation to assure small quantity of clean water
passing through the shaft.

15

Series (M/R) KSH/KSG Slurry Pump


Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual
Shijiazhuang Kingda Pump Industry Group Co.,Ltd

(2): Periodically check the frame. If the bearing heats at the beginning of the operation, shut
down the pump till the bearing become cool, then run it. If the bearing heats seriously and
temperature keep rising, the frame must be disassembled and examined for the cause. Usually
the impurity contained in the lubricating oil can cause the heating, so the bearing oil should be
proper and clean, and replaced periodically.
(3): The pump performance will become poorer and the efficiency will become lower with the
larger and larger clearance between impeller and front guard plate. So adjust the impeller timely
to keep the proper clearance to make the pump run in high efficiency. When the wear situation of
the pump is too bad to meet the requirements of the system, the wear parts should be replaced.
4.3 Shutdown of Pump
Let the pump to transport the clear water for some before the shutdown to clean the slurry left
inside the pump, then stop the pump, valve, packing seal water or mechanical seal water in order.

16

Series (M/R) KSH/KSG Slurry Pump


Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual
Shijiazhuang Kingda Pump Industry Group Co.,Ltd

5. MAINTENANCE
For the safe run of pump, attention must be paid to the normal maintenance as following aspects:
5.1 Maintenance of shaft seal:
For the packing seal pump, periodically check the water pressure and water quantity of shaft
packing seal. Always keep small quantity of clear water flow along with the shaft, periodically
adjust the packing gland, check and replace the packing. The shaft seal water pressure and
quantity should in accordance with the above requirements. Periodically fill the oil into the oil cup
for the expeller seal pump to lubricate the inside packing.
5.2 Adjustment of impeller:
To assure the high-efficiency of the pump, the clearance between the impeller and the front guard
plate; the clearance between impeller and front guard plate of metal liner pump should be
0.5-1mm, the clearance between the impeller and front liner should be equal to that between
impeller and rear liner.
Before adjusting the clearance, the pump should be stopped firstly, then loose the bolts of
bearing assembly and screw the nut of adjusting bolts to make the bearing assembly move
forward, at the same time, rotate the pump as per the arrow by hands till the impeller friction
with the front guard plate; for the metal liner pump, loose the nut (which was fastened) by half
circle, then fasten the nut on the adjusting bolt to make the bearing assembly move backward,
the clearance between the impeller and front guard plate should be 0.5-1mm; for the rubber liner
pump, adjust the nut of the adjusting bolts to make the bearing assembly to move forward to
contact with the front guard sleeve, then move the bearing assembly back to contact with the
back liner, and measure the total movement distance, make the half of this distance as the

17

Series (M/R) KSH/KSG Slurry Pump


Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual
Shijiazhuang Kingda Pump Industry Group Co.,Ltd

clearance of the impeller and front liner; assure the correct clearance of impeller and front and
back liner by adjusting bearing assembly position through the adjusting bolts.
After the adjustment, check if the impeller can rotate normally before startup, if bearing
assembly compress bolts and adjusting bolts are tightened; then start the pump.
5.3 Lubricating of Bearing
Correct assembly, proper lubricating and in-time maintenance will make the service life of
bearing assembly longer. Periodically check the bearing assembly, bearing and lubricant and
interval should not be over than 12 month. Fill the lubricating grease at regular intervals in
operation, the filling interval and filling quantity are relative to the pump speed, bearing size,
continuous operation time, shutdown and startup times, environmental condition and
temperatures; excess grease will cause the heating of bearing. Refer to following table for proper
lubricating schedule:
5.4 Standby pump should be rotated by 1/4 circle by hands to make the bearing stand static load
and vibration evenly

18

Series (M/R) KSH/KSG Slurry Pump


Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual
Shijiazhuang Kingda Pump Industry Group Co.,Ltd

Lubrication Schedule (in hours)

Frame

Grease

Type

Quantity

12

18

28

44

71

Bearing Speed

200

7000

300

400

600

(rpm)

800

1000

1200

1800

2000

3000

2400

1800

1500

1000

3600

2400

1800

1600

1200

900

2500

2000

1500

1200

800

500

500

5000

3600

2200

1600

1100

800

4200

2000

1800

1200

700

400

3000

2000

1400

1000

600

3800

28000

1500

900

500

300

400

R.RS

102

S.ST

132

T.TU

304

4800

3000

1800

900

621

4000

2400

1500

500

R.RS

61

8000

4800

3500

2800

2200

Motor

S.ST

74

8000

6000

3600

2400

1600

1200

End

T.TU

133

8000

7000

4500

2500

1500

192

7000

6000

4000

2000

400

100

1500

900

Pump

End

Note: Above Schedule is only applied for the normal working condition.
During the bearing assembly, the internal plug is to fill the bearing grease, and the external oil
cup is to clean the labyrinth seal. Besides the regular filling of grease, its also to fill the grease to
the oil cup to keep the labyrinth seal clean.

19

Series (M/R) KSH/KSG Slurry Pump


Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual
Shijiazhuang Kingda Pump Industry Group Co.,Ltd

6. POSSIBLE FAILURES, CAUSE AND SOLUTIONS


Failure

Cause

Solutions

Leak at the suction pipe or packing

Block the leak

Wrong rotation direction

Change the rotation direction

Impeller is broken

Replace the new impeller

Suction pipe is blocked

Remove the block

Packing gland is to tight and packing heats

Loose the packing gland bolts

Friction inside the pump

Adjust the clearance

Bearing is broken

Replace the bearing

Transmission belt is too tight

Adjust the belt

Too large flow quantity

Adjust the pump running conditions

High rotation speed, large proportion

Adjust the rotation and proportion

Misalignment or nonparallel of motor shaft and

Adjust the motor shaft and pump shaft

h f
Excessive or too little of bearing lubricating oil

Oil

Impurities is contained in the lubricating oil

Replace the new lubricating oil

Bearing is broken

Replace the new bearing

Misalignment or nonparallel of motor shaft and

Adjust the motor shaft and pump shaft

h f
Shaft is bent

Replace a new shaft

Friction inside the pump or the imbalance of

Decrease the friction and replace a new

ll
Foreign matter inside the bearing

ll
Clean the bearing

Unreasonable assembly of bearing

Replace the bearing or reassemble the

Serious abrasion of packing

b
Replace the new packing

Serious abrasion of shaft sleeve

Replace the new shaft sleeve

Seal water is not clean

Replace the clean seal water

Bearing is broken

Change new bearing

Impeller is not in balance

Change new impeller

Air entered into suction pipe, block

Remove the air and block

Uneven flow, pump empty

Improve the feeding condition

Bad foundation

Strength the foundation

Not pump the liquid

Shaft Power is to high

Overheat of bearing

Service life of bearing is short

Serious leakage at the packing

Abnormal noise and excessive vibration


of pump

quantity

should

be

as

per

20

WEG EXPORTADORA S.A.


Av. Prefeito Waldemar Grubba, 3000
89256-900 - Jaragua do Sul - SC - BRAZIL
Phone 55 (47) 3372-4000 - Fax 55 (47) 3372-4060
http://www.weg.com.br

0280.1515/03.2006

Transforming Energy
into Solutions

INSTALLATION,
OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
FOR INDUCTION
MOTORS
Frame sizes 143/5T to 586/7

THIS MANUAL IS INTENDED TO SUPPLY IMPORTANT


TOPICS THAT MUST BE FOLLOWED DURING
TRANSPORTATION, INSTALLATION, OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE OF WEG MOTORS. THEREFORE, WE
RECOMMEND READING CAREFULLY THIS MANUAL
BEFORE INSTALLING AND OPERATING THE MOTOR.
TO ENSURE PHYSICAL INTEGRITY TO THE
OPERATION AND MATERIAL PROTECTION, ALL
INFORMATION INCLUDED IN THIS MANUAL MUST
BE STRICTLY FOLLOWED.

Purchasing date:

Suppliers name

INDEX
1.
2.
3.
4.

5.

6.
7.

8.

9.

HANDLI NG AND TRANSPORTATION


RECEIVING INSPECTION
STORAGE
INSTALLATION
4.1 - Safety
4.2 - Operating Conditions
4.3 - Foundation
4.4 - Drain Holes
4.5 - Balance
4.6 - Alignment
4.7 - Couplings
4.8 - Electrical Connection
4.9 - Starting Methods
4.10 - Protection Device
4.11 - Start-Up
MAINTENANCE
5.1 - Lubrication
5.1.1 - Machines without Grease Nipples
5.1.2 - Machines Fitted with Grease Fitting
5.1.3 - Compatibility of MOBIL Polirex EM
grease with other types of grease
5.2 - Assembly and Disassembly
SPARE PARTS
VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE MOTORS
7.1 - Standard Motors
7.2 - Inverter Duty Motors
7.3 - Bearing Insulation
ADDITIONAL INSTRUCTIONS
8.1 - Hazardous Area Motors
8.1.1 - General
8.1.2 - Installation
8.1.3 - Checking and maintenance
8.1.4 - Explosion Proof Motor Repairs
WARRANTY TERMS

Invoice/Order number:

Customers name and phone:

Failure description:

Fecha de compra:
1 - HANDLING AND TRANSPORTATION

MOTORS MUST NOT BE LIFTED BY THE SHAFT,


BUT BY THE EYEBOLTS SPECIFIC FOR SUCH
PURPOSE

Nombre del proveedor:


Lifting devices, when supplied, are designed only to support
the motor. If themotor has two lifting devices then a double chain
must be used to lift it.
Lifting and lowering must be done gently without any shocks, to
avoid bearing damaged.
Nmero de la factura o pedido:

Nombre y nmero telefnico del cliente:

DURING TRANSPORTATION, MOTORS FITTED


WITH ROLLER OR ANGULAR CONTACT
BEARINGS ARE PROTECTED AGAINST BEARING
DAMAGES WITH A SHAFT LOCKING DEVICE

THIS LOCKING DEVICE MUST BE USED ON ANY


FURTHER MOTOR TRANSPORTATION, EVEN
WHEN THIS MEANS TO UNCOUPLE THE MOTOR
FROM THE DRIVEN MACHINE

2. RECEIVING INSPECTION
When receiving the motor, check if any damage has occurred
during transportation.

Descripcin de la falla:

If anything has been noticed, notify immediately the carrier, the


insurance company and WEG.
Failure in giving notice to the carrier, to the insurance company
and to WEG may result in loosing product warranty.
Do not remove the existing protecting grease from the shaft end,
nor the stoppers or plugs that close the terminal box holes, if any.
These protection items must be kept in place until the final
installation has been concluded.
After being removed from the package, a complete visual
inspection on the motor should be made:

Check if any damage has occured during transportation.


Check nameplate data.
Rotate shaft with the hand to make sure it is running freely.
Make sure the motor was not exposed to excessive dirt and
moisture during transportation and storage.
3 - STORAGE
If motors are not immediately installed, they must be stored in
dry areas, free of dust, vibrations, gases, corrosive smokes, under
constant temperature and in normal position free from other
materials.
Motor storage temperature must remain between 41F (5C) to
140F (60C), with relative humidity not exceeding 50%.
If motors are stored for more than two years, bearings must be
replaced or the lubrication grease must be totally removed after
cleaning.
Single-phase motors when kept in stock for 2 years or more
must have their capacitors replaced (if any).
WEG recommends to rotate the shaft (by hands) at least once a
month, and to measure the insulation resistance before installing
it, if motors are stored for more than 6 months or when subject
to high humidity areas.
If motor is fitted with space heaters, it is recommended to switch
them on during storage period if the relative humidity exceeds
50%.
If motor remains in stock for a long period without having the
space heaters switched-on or when installed but not in operation,
moisture/water inside the motor may condense. On these cases,
water must be drained by removing the threaded drain plugs.
When drainage is done, switch-on the space heaters and make
sure the motor is completely dry,then reinstall the drain plugs to
ensure proper Degree of Protection (see figure 1).
The space heaters should NEVER be energized while motor is
running.

9. TERMINOS DE GARANTIA
WEG ofrece garanta contra defectos de fabricacin o de
materiales para sus productos, por un perodo de 18 meses,
contados a partir de la fecha de la emisin de la factura por
parte de fb rica o del distribuidor/revendedor, teniendo como
lmite 24 meses de la fecha de fabricacin independiente de
la fecha de instala cin del motor, siempre y cuando hayan
sido satisfechos los siguientes requisitos:
- Transporte, manoseo y almacenamiento adecuados;
- Instalacin correcta y en condiciones ambientales
especficas y sin presencia de ga ses corrosivos;
- Operacin dentro de los lmites de la capacidad del motor;
- Realizacin peridica del debido mantenimiento preventivo;
- Realizacin de reparaciones y/o modificaciones al producto
original efectuada solo por los agentes autorizados de la Red
de Asistencia Tcnica WEG;
- Entregar el producto a l proveedor en el caso de ocurrir una
falla con reclamacin de garanta en un perodo mnimo
suficiente para identificar la causa de la anomala y su
conveniente reparacin;
- Dar aviso inmediato a WEG, por parte del cliente, de los
defectos detec tados y que los mismos sean posteriormente
analizados por WEG como causados por defectos de
fabricacin.
La garant a no incluye los servicios de desmontaje d el motor
en las instalaciones del cliente, costos de transporte del
producto y gastos de traslado, alojamiento y alimentacin del
personal de Asistencia Tcnica cuand o sean solicitados por
el cliente.
Los servicios en garanta sern prestados exclusivamente en
talleres de Asistencia Tcnica Autorizada WEG o en la propia
fbrica.
Se excluyen de esta garanta los componentes cuya vida til,
en uso normal, sea inferior al perodo de garanta otorgado
por WEG las reparaciones o substituc iones de piezas o
product os, a criterio de WEG o su Asistencia Tcnica
Autorizada, no prorrogar el plazo de garanta original.
La presente garanta se limita al producto entregado, no siendo
responsable WEG por daos a personas, a terceros, a otros
equipos e instalaciones, utilidades que se dejen de obtener
o cualquier otro dao emergente o consecuente.

P Las superficies de encaje de los motores a prueba de explosin


no deben ser mecanizadas y no es permitido utilizar entre ellas
ningn tipo de vedamiento, no descrito o suministrado por el
fabricante. Los encajes deben ser solamente limpios y para evitar
corrosin o penetracin de agua, los encajes pueden ser
engrasados con una fina manta de grasa de silicona.
P Verificar si los componentes estn exentos de rebabas, golpes
y suciedad.
P Observar si las piezas estn en perfectas condiciones.
P Lubricar superficialmente las guas de las tapas con aceite
protector para facilitar el montaje.
P Utilizar solamente martillo de material blando en la colocacin
de las piezas.
P Verificar si todos los tornillos estn bien apretados.
P Utilizar sonda calibrada para verificar asiento de la caja de
conexiones (menor de 0,05mm).

8.1.4 Reparos De Motores A Prueba De Explosin


Figure 1
El reparo de repuestos, directamente involucrados en la
proteccin contra riesgo de una explosin, debe ser realizado
sin cualquier modificacin al diseo original del motor.

Insulation Resistance Checking

Despus del reparo, estos repuestos deben ser chequeados y


cuando concluido, el taller de asistencia tcnica debe hacer una
declaracin de todas las operaciones realizadas en el motor
especfico.

Disconnect motor from power supply before making any


insulation resistance measurement.
To avoid electric discharge risks, discharge the terminals right
after performing the measurement.

Para maiores informaciones, en Mxico favor comunicarse a:

Measure the insulation resistance before operating the motor


and/or when there is any sign of moisture in the winding.
The resistance measured at 77F (25C) must be:

WEG Mxico, S.A de C.V.


Carretera Jorobas-Tula Km 3.5,
Mz.5, Lote 1, entre Lote 4 y 5
Fracc. Parque Indistrial Huehuetoca,
Huehuetoca Estado de Mx., C.P 54680
Tel: (55) 5321-4243 y 61; Fax: (55) 5321-4262 y 94
e-mail: wegmex@weg.com.mx

Ri (20 x U) / (1000 + 2P) [M]


(measured with a MEGGER at 500 V d.c.)
where U = voltage (V); P = power (kW).
If the insulation resistance detected is less than 2 mega ohms, the
winding must be dried according to the following procedure:
Warm it up in an oven at a minimum temperature of 176F (80C)
increasing 41F (5C) every hour until reaching 105C (221F),
remaining under this temperature for at lea st one hour.

Check if the stator insulation resistance remains constant within


accepted values. If not, stator must be reimpregnated. If necessary,
replace bearings and seals.
Note:
1) All drains (if any) must be removed while drying.
2 - Measured the insulation resistance in ambient temperature. If
different than 25C it should be corrected using the following
formula:
R(25C) = [( K+25 ) / ( K + T a )] . R (Ta)
Where:
R(25C) insulation resistance related to 25C ambient temperature
K
constant value 234.5 for copper
Ta ambient temperature where the resistance was measured
R(Ta) resistance value measured in ambient temperature Ta

4. INSTALLATION
4.1 - Safety
All personnel involved with electrical installations, either
handling, lifting, operation, start up, maintenance or repair must
be well informed and updated concerning safety standards and
principles that govern the work and carefully follow them.
For practical reasons, it is not possible to include in this Manual
detailed informati on that covers all constructive variables, nor
covering all possible assembl y, operation or maintenance
alternatives.
For this reason, the present Manual only includes required
information that allows qualified and trained personnel to carry
out the work.
If you still have further doubts about this, specially in reference
to specific product information, WEG is willing to provide such
information via its network of authorized service agents and/or
distributors.
In order to allow WEG to provide prompt service, within technical
standards, the motor serial number that is available on the
identification nameplate should be supplied.
Use always appropriate tools for installation and removal.

I
I

LA INSTALACION DE MOTORES PARA AMBIENTES


PELIGROSOS DEBE SER EJECUTADA POR
PERSONAL ESPECIALIZADO
LA ESPECIFICACION DEL LOCAL DE
INSTALACION ES DE RESPONSABILIDAD DEL
CLIENTE, QUE TAMBIEN DETERMINARA LAS
CARACTERISTICAS AMBIENTALES

Cuando se utiliza el prensa cables en la entrada de los cables, lo


mismo debe ser apropiado para el motor y para el tipo de terminal,
el prensa cables debe ser montado, completamente apretado de
manera a adquirir la presin necesaria arriba de los anillos de
vedamiento, bien como:
Evitar la transmisin de vibraciones mecnicas para los
terminales del m otor.
Garantizar la proteccin mecnica IP para la caja de
conexiones.
8.1.3 Chequeo y Mantenimiento
El mantenimiento debe ser ejecutado por talleres tcnicos
autorizados y acreditados por WEG.
Talleres y personal si n autorizacin que realicen reparacin en
los motores para ambientes peligrosos, sern totalmente
responsables por el trabajo ejecutado y los daos ocurridos en
su servicio.
En la ejecucin del mantenimiento, instalacin y relubricacin, se
deben seguir las siguientes orientaciones:
Las conexiones deben estar correctamente cerradas para evitar
elevacin de resistencia, consecuentemente sobrecalentamiento
del contacto
Aislamiento distancia-aire y distancia-superficie entre los
conductores, requeridos por las normas, deben ser respectados
Todos tornillos utilizados en el montaje de las partes del motor
y caja de conexin, deben ser completamente apretados
Vedamientos y repuestos para entrada de los cables sern
hechos utilizando materiales suministrados por el fabricante, de
manera a garantizar el tipo de proteccin original

7.3 Aislamiento del rodamiento


Los motores Inverter Duty en las carcasas 504/5T y 586/7T* son
suministrados con sistema de puesta a tierra entre el eje y la carcasa
en el lado delantero. Tambin, bajo pedido puede ser suministrado
con rodamientos aislados.
Para otras lneas, en las carcasas 504/5T y 586/7T* cuando usados
con convertidor de frecuencia es necesario sistema de puesta a
tierra entre el eje y la carcasa o rodamientos aislados.
* Otros tamaos de carcasas, bajo consulta.
8 INSTRUCCIONES ADICIONALES

8.1 Motores Para Areas de Riesgo

8.1.1 General
Adems de las recomendaciones arriba, las siguientes tambin
deben ser observadas:
Motores para reas de riesgo son fabricados de acuerdo con
normas especficas para estos ambientes.
Motores suministrados para reas de riesgo (reas clasificadas)
deben ser instalados en rea que estn de acuerdo con las
especificadas en la tarjeta de identificacin del motor.
Notas:
Motores Divisin I son tambin adecuados para la Divisin II
Motores de una especificada clase de temperatura son tambin
adecuados para ambientes con combustible de una clase de
temperatura mayor (ejemplo, motores T4 son adecuados para
ambientes de clase T3, T2, T1).
8.1.2 Instalacin
La instalacin debe seguir procedimientos elaborados por la
legislacin local vigente.

MAKE SURE THAT ELECTRIC MOTORS ARE SWITCHED


OFF BEFORE STARTING ANY MAINTENANCE SERVICE

All rotating parts such as pulleys, couplings, outside fans, shaft,


etc. must be protected against accidental contact.
Motors must be protected against unexpected starts.
When performing any maintenance service, disconnect the motor
from the power supply. Make sure all accessories have been
switched off and disconnected.
In order to prevent from penetrating dust and/or water into the
terminal box, cable glands or threaded pipe in the lead holes
passage must be installed. They must be of equal or higher IP
rating than the motor.

LEAD CONNECTION INSULATION INSIDE THE


TERMINAL BOX MUST BE DONE WITH AN INSULATING
MATERIAL COMPATIBLE WITH MOTOR THERMAL
CLASS WHICH IS SHOWN ON THE MOTOR
NAMEPLATE

If installation and safety instructions are not followed accordingly,


warranty may be void.
4.2 - Operating Conditions
In general electric motors are designed for operation up to an
altitude of 1000m above sea level for an ambient temperature
ranging from -4F (-20C) to 104F (40C). Any variation is stated
on the nameplate.
The recommended installation distance between air inlet from
the motor and the wall should be at least of the air inlet diameter.
A person should have enough room to carry out cleaning services.
Machines that are cooled with ambient a ir, air inlet screens must
be cleaned at regular intervals so as to ensure free air circulation.
Warm air can not return to the motor.
For vertically mounted motors with air inlet on top, the air
opening must be protected by a proper cover so as to avoid
dropping of foreign materials on the motors.
Considering that direct sun heat causes increase in
temperature, externally installed motors should be always
protected against weathering.

ODP MOTORS Open motors (IP21, IP23) are machines designed


for operation in clean, dry areas, with enough air circulation for
proper cooling. These motors should never be used in areas with
flammable materials. Open motors may cause sparks and release
cast particles under any eventual insulation failure (short-circuit).
TEFC MOTORS Totally enclosed motors are machines suitable to
operate in areas with moisture, dirt and/or corrosive materials either
in enclosed or open environments.

4.3 - Foundation
Motors provided with feet must be installed on solid foundations
to avoid excessive vibrations.
All motors must be fully fixed and aligned.
The purchaser is fully responsible for the foundation.
Metal parts must be painted to avoid corrosion.
The foundation must be uniform and sufficiently strong to support
any shock. It must be designed in such a way to stop any vibration
originated from resonance.

EL NO CUMPLIMIENTO DE ESTAS
RECOMENDACIONES Y CRITERIOS CAUSA LA
PERDIDA DE GARANTIA DEL MOTOR

7.2 Motores Inverter Duty


Motores con tensiones superiores a 575V e igual o menor que
690V y alimentados por convertidor de frecuencia no necesitan
filtros caso sigan las especificaciones abajo:
Informado por el fabricante del convertidor.

COMPARE THE CURRENT, VOLTAGE, FREQUENCY,


SPEED, OUTPUT AND OTHER VALUES REQUIRED BY
THE APPLICATION WITH MOTOR NAMEPLATE
INFORMATION

Observar tensin de
alimentacin del conjunto
ventilacin forzada.

(*)

Note: Considering that rotation direction is important for correct


operation, then check it carefully before connecting motor to the
load.
4.4 - Drain Holes
Make sure drains are placed at the lower motor position when the
mounting configuration differs from that specified on the motor
purchase o rder.

4.5 Balance

WHEN SPECIAL BALANCE IS REQUIRED,


CONTACT THE FACTORY

EL NO CUMPLIMIENTO
DE ESTAS
RECOMENDACIONES Y
CRITERIOS CAUSA LA
PERDIDA DE GARANTIA
DEL MOTOR

Favor informar tambin el nmero de serie del motor de la


tarjeta de identificacin.
7 MOTORES PARA USO CON CONVERTIDOR DE FRECUENCIA

All motors are dynamically balanced at the factory with half key.
Transmission elements such as pulleys, couplings etc must be
dynamically balanced with half key before installation.

7.1 Lnea de motores Standard


Always use appropriate tools for installation and removal.
Motores con tensiones hasta 575V y accionados por
Convertidor de Frecuencia no requieren filtros cuando
adoptados los criterios a seguir:
Notas:

(*)

Informado por el fabricante del convertidor.

1) Trajeta de
identificacin
mostrando tensin
380-415V / 660-690V 50Hz y 440-460V - 60Hz
y alimentados por
convertidor en tensin
660-690V - 50Hz o 480V
- 60Hz requiere el uso
de filtros.
2) Motores en las
carcasas 504/5T y 586/
7T* cuando usados
con converti dor,
necesitan uso de
rodamientos aislados.

4.6 Alignment

ALIGN THE SHAFT ENDS AND USE FLEXIBLE


COUPLING, WHENEVER POSSIBLE

Make sure that the motor mounting devices do not allow


modifications on the alignment and further damages to the
bearings.
When assembling a half-coupling, make sure to use suitable
equipment and tools to protect the bearings.
Suitable assembly of half-coupling:
Specially in cases of direct couplings, motor shaft must be
aligned axially and radially with the driven machine shaft.
Incorrect alignment can lead to bearing damage, vibrations or
even cause shaft rupture.
Correct alignment can be ensured with the use of dial gauges,
as shown in figures 4.6.1, 4.6.2 and 4.6.3.
If considering a complete shaft turn, misalignment should not
exceed 0.05 mm.

* Otros tamaos de
carcasas, bajo consulta.

Fig. 4.6.1 - Axial reading (parallelism)

Notas:
Aunque la grasa Polyrex EM (Mobil) sea compatible con
los tipos de grasa mencionados arriba, no recomendamos la
mezcla con cualquier tipo de grasa.
Si Ud. necesita utilizar otro tipo de grasa diferente de las
recomendadas arriba, primeramente contacte con WEG.

LA UTILIZACION DE MOTORES NORMALES EN


LOCALES Y/O APLICACIONES ESPECIALES DEBE
ESTAR PRECEDIDA DE UNA CONSULTA AL
FABRICANTE DE GRASAS Y/O A WEG

Fig. 4.6.2 Radial reading (concentricity)

5.2 - Desmontaje Y Montaje

Fig. 4.6.3 Axial and radial reading combined

The axial alignment (E dimension) between half couplings


should be performed in accordance with manufacturers
recommendations.

El desmontaje y montaje del motor deber ser hecho por


personal calificado, utilizando solamente herramientas y
mtodos adecuados.
Las garras del extractor de rodamientos debern estar
aplicadas sobre la pista interna o sobre la tapa interior.
Es esencial que el montaje de los rodamientos sea ejecutado
en condiciones de rigurosa limpieza, para asegurar un buen
funcionamiento y evitar daos. En el caso de colocar
rodamientos nuevos, stos debern ser retirados de su embalaje
solamente en el momento previo de su montaje al mo tor.
Antes de instalar un rodamiento nuevo, es necesario verificar
si el alojamiento de l mismo en el eje se encuentra exento de
rebabas o seales de golpes.
Para montaje del rodamiento caliente sus partes internas con
equipamiento apropiado por induccin o utilice herramientas
apropiadas.

If required, WEG can offer its personnel duly trained as well as a


laser equipment to make motor and driven machine alignment/
leveling.

6. PARTES Y PIEZAS (REPUESTOS)

Expansion effect of the components may change the alignment/


leveling conditions during performance.

Al solicitar piezas para reposicin, es conveniente indicar la


designacin completa del motor, as como el cdigo del mismo
que aparece marcado en la tarjeta de identificacin.

AVISO:
Las tablas arriba son recomendadas especficamente para
relubricacin con grasa Polyrex EM (Mobil) y temperaturas
absolutas de operacin del rodamiento de:
70C (158F) para motores carcasas 254/6T hasta 324/6T.
85C (185F) para motores carcasas 364/5T hasta 586/7T.
Para cada 15C (59F) arriba de ese lmite, los intervalos de
lubricacin deben ser reducidos a la mitad. Los rodamientos
sellados (ZZ) son lubricados para una determinada vida til,
una vez operando bajo condiciones de temperatura de 70C
(158F).
Los periodos de relubricacin informados arriba son para
los casos de aplicacin con grasa Polyrex EM (Mobil)
Motores montados de forma vertical deben tener su intervalo
de relubricacin reducido a la mitad cuando comparados con
motores en la posicin horizontal.
Para aplicaciones con altas o bajas temperaturas, variacin
de velocidad, etc. el tipo de grasa e intervalos de relubricacin
son informados en una tarjeta de identificacin adicional fijada
al motor.

I
I

RECOMENDAMOS EL USO DE RODAMIENTOS


DE ESFERAS PARA MOTORES ACOPLADOS
DIRECTAMENTE A LA CARGA

PELIGRO:
GRASA EN EXCESO PUEDE PROVOCAR
SOBRECALENTAMIENTO DE LOS RODAMIENTOS,
RESULTANDO UN DAO TOTAL

5.1.3 Compatibilidad de la grasa Polirex EM (Mobil) con


otros tipos de grasa:
Conteniendo espesante polyurea y aceite mineral, la grasa
Polyrex EM (Mobil) es compatible con otros tipos de grasa las
cuales contengan:
Base de litio o complejo de litio o polyurea y aceite mineral
altamente refinado.
Aditivo inhibidor contra corrosin, herrumbre y aditivos
antioxidantes.

4.7 Couplings
When using pulley or belt drive (coupling), follow the
instruction given below:
Remove shaft-locking device (if any) before installing the motor.
Belts must be tighten just enough to avoid slippage when
running, according to the specifications stated on the belt
supplier recommendation.
To make the installation of the pulley on the shaft easier, it is
recommended to heat up the pulley at 176F (80C) and have
it mounted at hot, using suitable tools.
To avoi d bearing and shaft end damage, mounting and
dismounting of pulleys must be made with suitable tools.
While mounting and dismounting a pulley, never make pressure
or knocks on the bearings.
Always use flexible couplings; rigid couplings require special
bearing arrangement as well as axial and radial alignment of
the shafts.
WARNING:
EXCESSIVE BELT/CHAIN TENSION WILL DAMAGE
THE BEARINGS AND LEAD TO A PROBABLE
SHAFT RUPTURE
The couplings used must be suitable to withstand radial and
axial vibrations during operation. Special care must be taken to
avoid that the allowable load and speed limits given in the catalog
are not exceeded.
4.8 Electrical Connection
Make sure the motor is connected to the correct power supply.
The cable gauges and the protection devices must be designed
based on motor rated current.

~
WARNING

The capacitor on single-phase motors can


retain a charge which appears across the
motor terminals, even when the motor has
reached standstill condition. So, avoid
touching them at such condition

A WRONG CONNECTION CAN


BURN OUT THE MOTOR.

Voltage and connection are indicated on the motor nameplate.


The acceptable voltage variation is 10%;
the acceptable frequency variation is +3% and -5% and the
total acceptable variation for voltage and frequency is 10%.
Note: For rated voltage range (Tru Metric Line), the acceptable
variation is 5% according to IEC 60034-1.
4.9 - Starting Methods
The motor is rather started through direct starting. In case this
is not possible, use compatible start methods to the motor load
and voltage.
When applying reduced voltage-starting method, remember
that the starting torque will also reduce.
P 3 leads single voltage and 9 leads dual voltage motors can be
started as follows:
- Full Voltage Direct online
- Auto-Transformer starting
- Electronic Soft-Starting
- VFD Starting subject to verification and application analisys.
- Series - Parallel starting (only for 9 leads)
P 6 leads single and dual voltage motors and 12 leads dual
voltage motors can be connected as follows:
- Full Voltage Direct online

La frecuencia adecuada para realizar las inspecciones depender


del tipo de motor y de las condiciones de aplicacin.

I
INTERVALOS DE RELUBRICACION GRASA POLIREX EM (MOBIL)

~
WARNING

Voltage may be connected at motor standstill


inside the terminal box for heating elements
or direct winding heating

PARA LUBRICACION, USE EXCLUSIVAMENTE


PISTOLA ENGRASADORA MANUAL

NO REUTILIZAR PIEZAS DAADAS O CON DESG ASTE.


SUBSTITUIR POR NUEVAS, ORIGINALES DE FABRICA

La frecuencia adecuada para realizar las inspecciones


depender del tipo de motor y de las condiciones de
aplicacin.
5.1 Lubricacin
PROCEDER DE ACUERDO C ON LOS INTERVALOS
DE REENGRASE RECOMENDADOS. ESTO ES VITAL
PARA LA OPERACION DEL MOTOR

5.1.1 - Motores sin grasera


Los motores hasta la carcasa 215T normalmente no llevan grasera.
En estos casos el reengrase deber ser efectuado conforme al
plan de mantenimiento preventivo existente, teniendo en cuenta
los siguientes aspectos:
P
P
P
P
P

Desarmar cuidadosamente los motores.


Retirar toda la grasa.
Lavar los rodamientos con querosina o gasolina.
Secar los rodamientos
Reengrasar el rodamiento inmediatamente.

5.1.2 - Motores con grasera


Se recomienda efectuar el reengrase durante el funcionamiento
del motor, de modo que permita la renovacin de la grasa en el
alojamiento del rodamiento. Si esto no fuera posible debido a la
presencia de piezas giratorias cerca de la entrada de grasa (poleas,
acoplamientos, etc.) que puedan poner en riesgo la integridad
fsica del operador, se procede de la siguiente manera:
P Limpiar las proximidades del agujero de la grasera.
P Inyectar aproximadamente la mitad de la cantidad total de
grasa estimada y poner en marcha el motor durante 1 minuto
aproximadamente en rotacin nominal. Desconectar nuevamente
el motor y colocar la grasa restante.
P La inyeccin de toda la grasa con el motor parado puede
llevar a la penetracin de parte del lubricante al interior del motor,
a travs del agujero de paso de eje en las tapas de rodamientos
interiores.

- WYE/DELTA starting
- Auto-Transformer starting
- Electronic Soft-Starting
- VFD Starting subject to verification and application analisys.
- Series - Parallel starting (only for 12 leads)
Rotation direction is clockwise when motor is viewed from
Drive Endshields side and if the phases are connected
according to sequence L1, L2, L3. This sequence and power
system must be positive.
To change the rotation direction, reverse two of the connecting
leads.
Note: For single-phase motors connections, please check the
motor nameplate.

THE CONNECTION TO THE POWER SUPPLY


MUST BE DONE BY QUALIFIED PERSONNEL AND
WITH FULL ATTENTION TO ASSURE SAFE AND
PERMANENT CONNECTION. AFTER
CONNECTING THE MOTOR, CHECK FOR ANY
STRANGE BODY INSIDE THE TERMINAL BOX. THE
CABLE INLETS NOT IN USE MUST BE CLOSED

Make sure to use correct cable gauge, based on the rated


current stamped on the motor nameplate.

BEFORE ENERGIZING THE TERMINALS, CHECK IF


THE GROUNDING IS MADE ACCORDING TO THE
APPLICABLE STANDARDS. THIS IS ESSENTIAL TO
AVOID ACCIDENTS

4.10 Protection Device


When the motor is supplied with protective or monitor
temperature device such as thermostats, thermistors, thermal
protector etc, connect their terminals to the corresponding
devices on the control panel. If this procedure is not followed
accordingly,warranty will be void.
Do not change protection devices settings as they may not
operate.

4.11 Puesta en Marcha (Start-Up)

L1 L2 L3

P1 P2

I
L1 L2 L3

P1 P2

3x

3x

RELEASE DEVICE

LA CUA DEBE ESTAR COMPLETAMENTE


ASEGURADA O POR EL CONTRARIO RETIRADA
ANTES DE PONER EN MARCHA EL MOTOR

a) El motor debe arrancar y funcionar de manera suave. En el


caso de que esto no ocurra, desconecte el motor y verifique
nuevamente el sistema de montaje y de conexiones antes de
nueva puesta en marcha.

THERMISTORS LEADS

b) En el caso de vibraciones excesivas, verifique se los


tornillos de fijacin estn sueltos o se la vibracin es originada
por mquinas adyacentes. Se debe hacer una verificacin
peridica de la vibracin.

4.11 - Start-Up

IF THE MOTOR IS RUN BARE SHAFT, THE KEY MUST


BE FASTENED OR REMOVED BEFORE STARTING

a) The motor must start and opera te smoothly. In case this


does not occur, turn it off and check all connections and the
mounting before starting it again.
b) In case there is excessive vibration, check if the fixing screws
are correctly fastened.
Check also if the vibration comes from a neighbor machine.
Periodical vibration check must be done.
c) Run the motor under rated load for a short period of time
and compare if the running current is in accordance to the
nameplate current.
5 . MAINTENANCE
Any service on electric machines should only be carried out
when it is completely stopped and all phases disconnected
from the power supply.

WARNING:
SAFETY CHECK LIST

c) Mantener el motor en marcha bajo carga nominal durante


un pequeo periodo de tiempo y comparar la corriente de
operacin con la corriente informada en la tarjeta de
identificacin.
5 - MANTENIMIENTO
Cualquier servicio realizado en mquinas elctricas solamente
debe ser hecho cuando las mismas estn completamente
paradas y todas las fases desconectadas de la red de
transmisin.

PELIGRO:
CONTROL DE SEGURIDAD (CHECK LIST).

Inspeccin General
Inspeccionar el motor peridicamente.
Mantener limpio el motor y asegurar libre flujo de aire.
Verifique los vedamientos (sellos) y efecte la sustitucin
en caso que sea necesario.
Verifique el ajuste de las conexiones del motor as como
los tornillos de sustentacin.
Verifique el estado de los rodamientos siempre
observando: aparicin de fuertes ruidos, vibraciones,
temperatura excesiva y condiciones de la grasa.
Cuando se detecte un cambio en las condiciones de trabajo
normales del motor, analice el motor y reemplace las piezas
requeridas.

LA CONEXION A LA RED DE ALIMENTACION


ELECTRICA DEBE SER EFECTUADA POR PERSONAL
CALIFICADO CON MUCHA ATENCION PARA
ASEGURAR UN CONTACTO SEGURO Y
PERMANENTE. DESPUES DE HABER CONECTADO
EL MOTOR, VERIFIQUE QUE NINGUN CUERPO
EXTRAO PERMANEZCA EN EL INTERIOR DE LA
CAJA DE CONEXIONES. TODA ENTRADA DE CABLES
A LA CAJA QUE NO ESTE SIENDO UTILIZADA, DEBE
SER CERRADA

Asegrese de utilizar el dimetro correcto para el cable de


alimentacin, tomando como base la corriente nominal
indicada en la tarjeta de identificacin del motor.

ANTES DE CONECTAR EL MOTOR, VERIFIQUE


QUE LA PUESTA A TIERRA FUE REALIZADA DE
ACUERDO CON LAS NORMAS VIGENTES. ESTE
DETALLE ES FUNDAMENTAL PARA EVITAR
ACCIDENTES

4.10 Dispositivos de proteccin


Cuando el motor es suministrado con dispositivos de proteccin
o monitoreo de temperatura, tales como, termostatos, termistores,
protectores trmicos, etc., conecte sus terminales a los dispositivos
correspondientes en el panel de control. Caso este procedimiento
no sea seguido correctamente, puede invalidar la garanta.
No altere el reglaje de los dispositivos de proteccin, porque los
mismos pueden se tornar inoperantes.
Diagrama del Dispositivo de Proteccin

L1 L2 L3

P1 P2
L1

3x

L2

P1 P2

L3

3x
CABLES DE
LOS TERMISTORES

DISPOSITIVODE
PROTECCIN

General Inspection
Check motor perio dically.
Keep motor clean and ensure free air flow.
Check seals and replace them, if required.
Check connections as well as supporting screws.
Check bearing condition and pay attention to: Any excessive
noise, vibration, bearing temperature and grease condition.
When a change, under normal conditions is detected, check
the motor and replace required parts.

DO NOT REUSE DAMAGED OR WORN PARTS.


REPLACE THEM BY NEW ONES SUPPLIED BY THE
FACTORY

Periodical inspection depends on motor type and on


application conditions.
5.1 Lubrication

FOLLOW REGREASING INTERVALS. THIS IS


FUNDAMENTAL FOR PROPER MOTOR OPERATION

5.1.1 - Machines withou t Grease Nipples


Motors up to frame size 215T are normally fitted without grease
fittings. In these cases the regreasing shall be done during
preventive maintenance service paying attention to the following
aspects:
Take motor apart carefully.
Take all the grease out.
Wash the bearing with kerosene or diesel.
Dry the bearings
Regrease the bearing immediately.
5.1.2 - Motors Fitted with Grease Fitting
It is strongly recommended to grease the machine while running.
This allows the grease renewal in the bearing housing. When
this is not possible due to rotating parts by the grease device
(pulleys, bushing, etc) that offer some risk to physical integrity
of the operator, proceed as follows:
Clean the area near the grease nipple.
Put approximately half of the total grease and run the motor for
1 minute at full speed.

Then turn off the motor and pump in the rest of the grease.
The injection of all the grease with the motor in standstill can
make the grease penetrate into the motor, through the bearing
housing inner seal.
Inspections intervals depend on motor type and on application
conditions.

USE ONLY MANUAL GREASE GUN FOR


LUBRICATION

La tensin y forma de conexin estn indicadas en la tarjeta de


identificacin del motor.
La variacin aceptable de tensin es de 10%,
La variacin aceptable en la frecuencia es de +3 y 5% y la variacin
total aceptable de la tensin y frecuencia es de 10%.
Nota: Para rango de tensin nominal (Lnea Tru Metric), la variacin
aceptable es 5% de acuerdo con la IEC60034-1.
4.9 - Sistema de arranque

RECOMMENDED RELUBRICATION INTERVALS POLYREX EM GREASE


MOBIL)
(

Es preferible que el motor arranque en forma directa. En el caso


de que esto no sea posible, utilizar mtodos de arranque
alternativos que sean compatibles con la carga y tensin del motor.
Cuando aplicar el sistema de arranque con tensin reducida,
acuerde que el par de arranque tambin reducir.
Los motores 3 cables tensin nica y 9 cables doble tensin
pueden ser arrancados como sigue:
- Arranque directo a plena tensin
- Arranque con auto transformador
- Arrancador Suave (Soft-Starter)
- Arranque con Convertidor de frecuencia bajo verificacin y
anlisis de aplicacin.
- Arranque Serie-Paralelo (solamente para 9 cables)
Los motores 6 cables tensin nica y doble y 12 cables doble
tensin pueden ser conectados como sigue:
- Arranque directo a plena tensin
- Arranque estrella-triangulo
- Arranque con auto transformador
- Arrancador Suave (Soft-Starter)
- Arranque con Convertidor de frecuencia bajo verificacin y
anlisis de aplicacin.
- Arranque Serie- Paralelo (solamente para 12 cables)
El sentido de giro es el horario, mirando el motor desde el extremo
del eje y conectando las fases en la secuencia L1, L2 y L3. Esta
secuencia y la alimentacin deben ser positivas.
Para cambiar el sentido de giro, invertir dos de los cables de
alimentacin.
Nota: Para motores con conexin monofsica, favor verificar la
tarjeta de i dentificacin del motor.

requieren rodamientos especiales, bien como alineacin axial


y radial de los ejes.
ATENCION:
UNA EXCESIVA TENSIN EN LAS CORREAS
DAAR LOS RODAMIENTOS Y HASTA PUEDE
PROVOCAR LA RUPTURA DEL EJE.
Los acoplamientos utilizados deben soportar vibraciones
radiales y axiales durante la operacin. Deben ser tomados
cuidados especiales para evitar que no sean excedidas las
cargas permitidas y limites de velocidad de catlogo.
4.8 Conexin elctrica
Se debe asegurar que el motor sea conectado correctamente
en la red de transmisin.
Los dimetros de los cables y los dispositivos de proteccin
deben ser diseados de acuerdo con la corriente nominal
del motor.

~
PELIGRO

~
PELIGRO

Con el motor parado, puede existir energa


elctrica en el interior de la caja de
conexiones, para las resistencias de
calentamiento o inclusive para el bobinado.

Los capacitores de los motores monofsicos


pueden retener energa elctrica, mismo con
el motor parado. no tocar los capacitores y los
terminales del motor sin verificar que no exista
tensin en los mismos.

TODA CONEXION EFECTUADA DE FORMA


INCORRECTA PUEDE QUEMAR EL MOTOR

Note:
The table above is specifically intended for relubrification with
MOBIL Polyrex EM grease and bearing absolute operating
temperature of:
70C (158F) for 254/6T to 324/6T frame size motors
85C (185F) for 364/5T to 586/7T frame size motors
For every 15C (59F) above these limits, relubrification intervals
must be reduced by half. Shielded bearing (ZZ) are lubricated
for bearing life as lo ng are they operate under conditions and
temperature of 70C (158F).
Relubrication periods given above are for those cases
applying MOBIL Polyrex EM grease.
When motors are used on the vertical position, their
relubrication interval is reduced by half if compared to horizontal
position motors.
On applications with high or low temperatures, speed variation
etc., the type of grease and relubrication intervals is given on an
additional nameplate attached to the motor.

I
I

WE RECOMMENDED TO USE BALL


BEARINGS FOR MOTORS DIRECTLY
COUPLED TO THE LOAD

WARNING:
EXCESS OF GREASE CAN CAUSE BEARING
OVERHEATING RESULTING IN COMPLETE DAMAGE.

5.1.3 - Co mpatibility of MOBIL Polirex EM grease with other


types of grease
Containing polyurea thickener and mineral oil, the MOBIL Polyrex
EM grease is compatible with other types of grease that contain:
Lithium base or complex of lithium or polyurea and highly
refined mineral oil.
Inhibitor additive against corrosion, rust and anti-oxidant
additive.
Note:
Although MOBIL Polyrex EM is compatible with the types of
grease given above, we do not recommend mixing it with any
other types of grease.
If you intend to use a type of grease different than those

recommended above, first contact WEG.

BEFORE USING STANDARD MOTORS IN SPECIFIC


AREAS OR ON SPECIAL APPLICATIONS, FIRST
CONTACT THE GREASE MANUFACTURER OR WEG

5.2 - Assembly and Disassembly


Disassembly and assembly must be done by qualified personnel
using only suitable tools and appropriate methods.
The bearing extractor grips must be applied over the side face
of the inner ring to be disassembled or over an adjacent part.
It is essential to assemble bearings under clean conditions to
ensure good operation and to avoid damages. New bearings
shall only be taken out from their packages when assembling
them.
Before installing a new bearing it is required to check the shaft
fitting for any sharp edge or strike signals.
For bearing assembly warm their inner parts with suitable
equipment inductive process or use suitable tools.
6. SPARE PARTS
When ordering spare parts, please specify the full type designation
and product code as stated on the motor nameplate. Please also
inform the motor serial number stated on the nameplate.
7 - VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE MOTORS

7.1 - Standard Motors Line


Motors with voltages up to 575V do not require filters if follow
the criteria bellow:

Fig. 4.6.3 Lectura Axial y Radial combinado

La alineacin axial (dimensin E) entre mitad de acoplamientos


deben ser ejecutados de acuerdo con las especificaciones del
fabricante.
Bajo consulta, WEG puede ofrecer su personal entrenado y
tambin equipamiento lser para hacer la alineacin/nivelacin
del motor y de la mquina accionada.
La expansin de los componentes puede cambiar las condiciones
de alineacin/nivelacin durante el desempeo.
4.7 Acoplamientos
Cuando se utilice un acoplamiento por medio de correas y
poleas, se debe seguir las informaciones abajo:
- Remover el dispositivo de bloqueo del eje (caso existir) antes
de instalar el motor.
- Las correas deben ser estiradas apenas lo suficiente como
para evitar deslizamiento en el funcionamiento, de acuerdo con
las recomendaciones del fabricante de las correas.
- Para facilitar la instalacin de la polea en el eje, se recomienda
calentar la polea hasta 176F (80C) y montar an caliente,
utilizando herramientas apropiadas.
- Para evitar daos en los rodamientos y punta del eje, el
montaje y desmontaje de las poleas debe s er hecho con
herramientas apropiadas.
- Mientras el montaje y desmontaje de una polea, nunca haga
presin o golpes en los rodamientos.
- Siempre utilice acoplamientos flexibles, acoplamientos rgidos

Fig. 4.6.1 Lect ura Axial (en paralelo)

Fig. 4.6.2 Lect ura radial (concentricidad)

* Other frame sizes, under request.

Note:
1) Motors with nameplate showing voltage 380-415V / 660-690V - 50Hz and 440-480V 60Hz, and fed by VFD on voltage 660-690V - 50Hz or 480V - 60Hz require filters.
2) Motors in frame sizes 504/5T and 586/7T* when uded with VFDs, require insulated
bearings.

Montaje correcto del acoplamiento:


Especialmente en los casos donde se utiliza acoplamiento directo,
el eje debe ser alineado axialmente y radialmente con el eje de la
mquina accionada.
Una alineacin incorrecta puede daar el rodamiento, vibraciones
y hasta provocar ruptura del eje.
Una alineacin correcta puede ser asegurada con el uso de
calibradores, de acuerdo con las figuras 4.6.1, 4.6.2 y 4.6.3.
Considerando un giro completo del eje, la desalineacin no debe
exceder 0.05mm.

IF SUCH RECOMMENDATIONS AND CRITERIA


ARE NOT FOLLOWED ACCORDINGLY, MOTOR
WARRANTY WILL BE VOID

7.2 - Inverter Duty Motors Line


Motors with voltages above 575V and equal or below 690V and fed
by VFD do not require filters when following the criteria below:

La base debe ser uniforme y lo suficientemente robusta para


soportar fuertes choques. Debe ser diseada de manera que
impida las vibraciones originadas por resonancias.
Nota: Considerando que el sentido de rotacin es importante
para un funcionamiento correcto, verificar el sentido de rotacin
antes de acoplar la carga al motor.
4.4 - Agujeros de drenaje
Asegrese que los agujeros de drenaje del motor se siten en
su parte inferior, cuando la forma de montaje del motor difiera
de la especificada en la compra del mismo.
4.5 Balanceo

P Check power supply voltage of the forced cooling set.

BALANCEOS ESPECIALES DEBEN SER


SOLICITADOS PREVIAMENTE A LA
FABRICA

Los motores WEG son balanceados dinmicamente en la planta


con Media Cua
Los elementos de transmisin, tales como, poleas,
acoplamientos, etc., deben ser balanceados dinmicamente con
media cua antes de ser instalados.
Utilice siempre herramientas apropiadas tanto en la instalacin
como en el desacople de los motores.
4.6 Alineacin

ALINEAR LAS PUNTAS DEL EJE, Y UTILICE


SIEMPRE QUE FUERA POSIBLE
ACOPLAMIENTOS FLEXIBLES

Cercirese de que los dispositivos de montaje del motor no


permitan alteraciones en la alineacin y otros daos en los
rodamientos.
Cuando se proceda el montaje del acoplamiento deben ser
usados los medios adecuados y las herramientas necesarias
para no daar los rodamientos.

la entrada de aire. Una persona debe tener espacio suficiente


para mantener servicios de limpieza.
Mquinas que son enfriadas a travs del aire ambiente, deben
limpiar las entradas de aire en intervalos regulares para asegurar
la libre circulacin de aire.
Aire caliente no puede retornar al mo tor.
Para motores montados en la vertical con las entradas de aire
al topo, las entradas de aire deben ser protegidas con
sombrerete para evitar la cada de cuerpos extraos en el motor.
- Considerando que el calor directo del sol causa aumento
de temperatura, los motores instalados externamente deben
siempre ser protegidos contra la intemperie.

COMPARE LOS VALORES DE CORRIENTE,


TENSION, FRECUENCIA, VELOCIDAD, POTENCIA
Y OTROS VALORES EXIGIDOS POR LA
APLICACION, CON LOS DATOS CONTENIDOS EN
LA TARJETA DE IDENTIFICACION

Motores ODP Motores abiertos (IP21, IP23, etc.):


Son motores para uso en locales limpios, secos, con
circulacin de aire suficiente para su refrigeracin. Este tipo
de motor no debe ser utilizado en la presencia de materiales
inflamables o combustibles. Motores abiertos pueden emitir
llama/chispa o metal fundido en una eventual falla del
aislamiento (cortocircuito).
Motore s TCVE (Total mente Cerrado Ventilacin
Externa): Son motores aptos a trabajar en reas con
humedad polvo y materiales corrosivos, en ambientes cerrados
y tambin abiertos.
4.3 - Cimentacin del motor
Los motores con pies (patas) debern ser instalados sobre
apoyos rgidos para evitar excesivas vibraciones.
Todos los motores deben se r apropiadamente fijados y
alineados.
El cliente es totalmente responsable de estos apoyos.
Las partes metlicas debern estar pintadas para evitar la
corrosin.

IF SUCH RECOMMENDATIONS AND CRITERIA


ARE NOT FOLLOWED ACCORDINGLY, MOTOR
WARRANTY WILL BE VOID

7.3 Bearing insulation


Inverter Duty Motors line in frame sizes 504/5T and 586/7T* are
supplied with ground system between the shaft and frame on
Drive Endshield. Also, on request can be supplied with insulated
bearings.
For other lines, in frame sizes 504/5T and 586/7T* when used
with VFDs it is required ground system between the shaft and
frame or insulated bearings.
(*) Other frame sizes, under request.
8 - ADDITIONAL INSTRUCTIONS
8.1 - Hazardous Area Motors
8.1.1 General
Besides the recommendations given above, these
recommendations must be also followed.
Motors for hazardous area are manufactured according to
specific Standards for such environments.
Motors supplied for hazardous area (classified areas) must be
installed in areas that comply with those specified on the motor
nameplate.
Notes:
- Motors of Division I are also suitable for Division II.
- Motors of a given class of temperature are suitable also for
combustible environments of a greater class of temperature
(example, T4 motors are suitable for environments of class T3,
T2, T1).
8.1.2 Installation
A complete installation must follow procedures given by local
legislation in effect.

THE INSTALLATION OF HAZARDOUS AREA


MOTORS MUST BE CARRIED OUT BY SKILLED
PEOPLE

THE SPECIFICATION OF THE MOTOR


INSTALLATION SITE IS FOR CUSTOMERS
RESPONSIBILITY, WHO WILL ALSO DETERMINE
THE ENVIRONMENT CHARACTERISTICS

When cable entrance is made by a cable gland, this must be


suitable to the unit and to the type of cable; the cable gland has
to be assembled, completely screwed in order to get the necessary
pressure on the sealing rings, so as to:
- Avoid transmission of mechanical vibrations to the motor
terminals.
- Guarantee mechanical protection IP to the terminal box.
8.1.3 Checking and Maintenance
Maintenance must be carried out by repair shops authorized
and accredited by WEG.
Repair shops and people without WEGs authorization who will
perform any service on hazardous area motors will be fully
responsible for such service as well as for any consequential
damage.
When performing maintenance, installation or relubrication,
follow these instructions:
Electric connections must be correctly locked to avoid
resistance-increases, with consequent contact overheating.
Insulation air-distance and surface-distance between
conductors, required by the Standards, must be respected.
All screws, used to assemble parts motor and terminal box,
must be completely screwed.
Seals and components replacement for cable entrance would
be made using spare parts, supplied from the manufacturer,in
order to guarantee the original type of protection.
Explosion Proof motors joint surfaces have not to be machined
and it is not allowed to insert, between them, any kind of seals,
not foreseen or suppli ed by the manufacturer. Joint surfaces
have just to be cleaned and, in order to avoid corrosion or water

Utilice siempre herramientas apropiadas para la instalacin y


desmontaje.

VERIFIQUE QUE LOS MOTORES ELECTRICOS


ESTEN DESCONECTADOS ANTES DE INICIAR
CUALQUIER TRABAJO DE MANTENIMIENTO

Todas las partes girantes, tales como poleas, acoplamientos,


ventiladores externos, eje, etc., deben estar protegidos contra
toques accidentales.
Los motores deben estar protegidos contra arranques
accidentales.
Al realizar servicios de mantenimiento en el motor, desconecte
la red de alimentacin. Verifique si todos los accesorios fueron
desconectados de la red de alimentacin y desligados.
Para impedir la penetracin de polvo o agua en el interior de
la caja de conexin, es necesario instalar prensa cables o
electroductores roscados en las salidas de los cables. Los
mismos deben tener grado IP igual o mayor que el m otor.

EL AISLAMIENTO DE LOS CABLES, ADENTRO DE


LA CAJA DE CONEXIONES DEL MOTOR, DEBEN
SER HECHOS CON MATERIALES COMPATIBLES
CON LA CLASE TERMICA DEL MOTOR QUE ESTA
MOSTRADA EN LA TARJETA DE IDENTIFICACION

Se las instrucciones de instalacin y seguridad no son seguidas


correctamente, se puede perder la garanta.
4.2 - Condiciones de Operacin
Los motores elctricos, en general, son diseados para
instalacin y operacin a una altitud hasta 1000m sobre el nivel
del mar con temperaturas ambientes de -20C (-4F) a 40C
(104F).
Variaciones respecto a los valores mencionados deben estar
indicadas en la tarjeta de identificacin.
La distancia de instalacin recomendada entre las entradas de
aire del motor y la pared no debe ser inferior del dimetro de

del estator bobinado. Caso necesario, cambiar los rodamientos


y retenedores.
Nota:
1) Los agujeros de drenaje (cuando existan) deben ser retirados
durante el secado.
2) La resistencia de aislamiento debe ser medida en temperatura
ambiente. Caso sea diferente de 25C debe ser corregida utilizando
la siguiente formula:
R(25C) = [( K+25 ) / ( K + T a )] . R (Ta)
Donde:
R(25C) resistencia del aislamiento relativa a 25C temperatura
ambiente
K
valor constante 234.5 para el cobre
Ta temperatura ambiente donde la resistencia fue medida
R(Ta) valor de la resistencia medida en temperatura ambiente Ta
4. INSTALACION
4.1 - Seguridad
Los profesionales que trabajan en instalaciones elctricas, sea
en el manejo, montaje, operacin, puesta en marcha o en el
mantenimiento, debern estar permanentemente informados y
actualizados sobre las normas y requisitos vigentes en materia
de seguridad y cuidadosamente ponerlas en prctica.
Por motivos prcticos, no es posible incluir en este Manual
informacin detallada de todas las variables constructivas,
tampoco todas las posibilidades de montaje, operacin o
alternativas de mantenimiento.
Debido a esto, este Manual solamente incluye la informacin
requerida que recomienda que estos servicios sean efectuados
solamente por personal calificado y entrenado.
Caso Ud. aun tenga alguna duda a este respecto, especialmente
respecto a informacin especifica del producto, WEG
suministrar esta informacin a travs de su red de servicio
autorizado y/o distribuidores.
Para permitir que WEG tenga un pronto servicio, dentro de las
normas tcnicas, el nmero de serie del motor que se encuentra
en la tarjeta de identificacin debe ser informado.

penetration; they can beoiled by means of a thin coat of silicon


grease.
Check if all components are free of edges, knocks or dirt.
Make sure all parts are in perfect conditions.
Lubricate the surfaces of the endshield fittings with protective
oil to make the assembly easier.
Use only rubber hammer to fit the parts.
Check the correct bolts fastening.
Use clearance calibrator f or correct connection terminal box
fitting (less than 0.05mm).
8.1.4 Explosion Proof Motor Repairs
Repair of parts, directly involved in the protection against risk of
an explosion, must be done without any modification to the
original motor design.
After the repair, these parts must be submitted to a check and
when concluded, the repair shop must issue a statement, about
all operations performed on a specific mo tor.

9. WARRANTY TERMS
WEG warrants its products against defect s in workmanship
and materials for eighteen (18) months from the invoice date
issued by the factory, authorized distributor or agent limited to
twenty four (24) months from manufacturing date independent
of installation date as long as the following items are fulfilled
accordingly:
- Proper transportation, handling and storage;
- Correct installation based on the specified ambient
environmental conditions;
- Operation under motor capacity limits;
- Observation of the periodical maintenance services;
- Repair and/or replacement effected only by personnel duly
authorized in writing by WEG;
- The failed product be available t o the supplier and/or repair
shop for a required period to detect the cause of the failure
and corresponding repair;
- Immediate notice by the purchaser about failures occurred
and that these are accepted by WEG as manufacturing defects.
This warranty does not include disassembly services at the
purchaser facilities, transportation costs with product, tickets,
accommodation and meals for technical personnel when
requested by t he customer.
The warranty service will be only carried out at WEG Authorized
Repair Shops or at WEGs facilities.
Components whose useful life, under normal use, is shorter
than the warranty period are not covered by these warranty
terms.
The repair and/or replacement of parts or components, when
affected b y WEG and/or any WEG Authorized Repair Shop, will
not give warranty extension.
This constitutes WEGs only warranty in connection with this
sale and the company will have no obligation or liability
whatsoever to people, third parties, other equipment or
installations, including without limitation, any claims for
consequential damage s or labor costs.

Las resistencias de calentamiento nunca deben ser energizadas


mientras el motor este operando.

Posicin del Dreno

Figura 1

Dreno

Medicin de la resistencia del aislamiento


Desconectar el motor de la red de energa antes de hacer
cualquier medicin de la resistencia del aislamiento.
Para evitar riesgo de descarga elctrica, descargue los
terminales despus de la medicin.
Mida la resistencia del aislamiento antes de poner el motor en
servicio y/o cuando haya indicios de humedad en el bobinado.
La resistencia, medida a 25C (77F), debe ser:
Ri (20 x U) / (1000 + 2P) [M]
(Medido con MEGGER a 500 V c.c.);
Donde U = tensin (V); P = potencia (kW).
Si la resistencia del aislamiento medida es inferior a 2 M, el
bobinado deber ser secado de acuerdo con lo que sigue:
Calentar el estator bobi nado en un horno partiendo de una
temperatura de 80C (176F) y elevando 5C (41F) por hora
hasta llegar a los 105C (221F); esta ltima temperatura debe
permanecer durante un perodo mnimo de una hora.
Medir se la resistencia del aislamiento del bobinado permanece
constante y con valores dentro de los mnimos recomendados;
caso contrario, se deber proceder a una nueva impregnacin

Verifique si ocurrieron daos durante el transporte.


Verifique los datos de la tarjeta de identificacin.
Gire el eje con la mano para verificar si est girando libremente.
Asegurar que el motor no tenga sido expuesto a polvo o
humedad durante el transporte a almacenamiento.
3. ALMACENAMIENTO

Transformando Energa
en Soluciones

Si los motores no fueran inmediatamente instalados, deben ser


almacenados en un local seco, libre de polvo, vibraciones, gases
y vapores corrosivos; dotado de temperatura uniforme,
colocndolos en posicin normal y sin apoyar sobre ellos otros
objetos.
La temperatura de almacenaje de los motores debe quedar entre
41F (5C) y 140F (60C), con humedad relativa no excediendo
a 50%.
En el caso de motores con ms de dos aos de almacenaje, se
debe proceder al cambio de rodamientos o a la substitucin
total de la grasa lubricante despus de la limpieza de los mismos.
En los motores monofsicos almacenados durante dos aos o
ms, se debe adems cambiar los capacitores (cuando existan).
WEG recomienda girar el eje del motor (manualmente) al menos
una vez al mes y medir la resistencia del aislamiento antes de
instalarlo, en caso de motores almacenados ms de 6 meses o
cuando estn sometidos a ambientes con alta humedad.
Caso el motor dispone de resistencias de calentamiento, estas
debern ser conectadas durante el periodo de almacenaje caso
la humedad relativa exceder 50%.
Caso el motor permanecer almacenado por un largo periodo
sin tener las resistencias de calentamiento conectadas o cuando
estn instaladas pero no en operacin, humedad/agua en la
parta interna del motor pueden condensar.En estos casos, la
agua debe ser drenada removiendo los drenos (tapones)
roscados. Despus del drenaje hecho, conecte las resistencias
de calentamiento y asegure que el motor este completamente
seco, entonces reinstale los tapones (drenos) para asegurar el
grado de proteccin correcto. (Vea figura 1).

MANUAL DE INSTALACION,
OPERACION Y
MANTENIMIENTO PARA
MOTORES DE INDUCCION
Carcasas 143/5t hasta 586/7

LA INTENCION DE ESTE MANUAL ES PROVEER


INFORMACIONES IMPORTANTES QUE DEBEN SER
SEGUIDAS DURANTE TRANSPORTE, INSTALACION,
OPERACION Y MANTENIMIENTO DE LOS MOTORES
WEG. ENTONCES, RECOMENDAMOS LEER
ATENTAMENTE ESTE MANUAL ANTES DE LA
INSTALACION Y OPERACION DEL MOTOR.
PARA ASEGURAR INTEGRIDAD FISICA DE LA
OPERACION Y PROTECCION MATERIAL, TODA LA
INFORMACION INCLUIDA EN ESTE MANUAL DEBERA
SER EXTREMAMENTE SEGUIDA
INDICE

1.
2.
3.
4.

MANEJO Y TRANSPORTE
VERIFICACION EN LA RECEPCION
ALMACENAMIENTO
INSTALACION
4.1 - Seguridad
4.2 - Condiciones de operacin
4.3 - Fundaciones del motor
4.4 - Agujeros de Drenaje
4.5 - Balanceo
4.6 - Alineacin
4.7 - Acoplamientos
4.8 - Conexin elctrica
4.9 - Mtodos de arranque
4.10 - Dispositivo de proteccin
4.11 - Puesta en Marcha
5. MANTENIMIENTO
5.1 - Lubricacin
5.1.1 - Motores sin grasera
5.1.2 - Motores con grasera
5.1.3 - Compatibilidad de la grasa MOBIL Polirex EM
con otros tipos de grasa
5.2 - DESM ONTAJE Y MONTAJE
6. PARTES Y PIEZAS - REPUESTOS
7. MOTORES PARA USO CON CONVERTIDOR DE
FRECUENCIA
7.1 - Motores Standard
7.2 - Motores Inverter Duty
7.3 - Aislamiento de rodamientos
8. INFORMACIONES ADICIONALES
8.1 - Motores para reas de Riesgo
8.1.1 - General
8.1.2 - Instalacin
8.1.3 - Chequeo y Mantenimiento
8.1.4 - Reparos en Motores a Prueba de Explosin
9. TERMINOS DE GARANTIA

1 MANEJO Y TRANSPORTE

LOS MOTORES NO DEBEN SER IZADOS POR EL


EJE, UTILIZE LOS CANCAMOS DE SUSPENSION,
ESPECIFICOS PARA ESTE PROPOSITO

Equipamientos de alzamiento, cuando suministrados, son


proyectados solamente para la sustentacin del motor.
Si el motor por su diseo constructivo tiene dos cncamos de
suspensin, use dispositivos que permitan el izamiento por
ambos elementos al mismo tiempo.
El izamiento as como el descenso del motor deben ser realizados
en forma suave, sin golpes, caso contrario los rodamientos
pueden sufrir daos.

LOS MOTORES CON RODAMIENTOS DE RODILLOS O


DE CONTACTO ANGULAR ESTAN PROTEGIDOS,
DURANTE EL TRANSPORTE, CONTRA DAOS POR
MEDIO DE UN DISPOSITIVO DE BLOQUEO DEL EJE

LOS DISPOSITIVOS DE BLOQUEO DEBEN SER


UTILIZADOS SIEMPRE QUE SE TRANSPORTE
EL MOTOR, AUNQUE ESTO IMPLIQUE
TENERLO QUE DESACOPLAR NUEVAMENTE
DE LA MAQUINA ACCIONADA
2. VERIFICACION EN LA RECEPCION

En la recepcin del motor, verifique si ocurrieron daos durante


el transporte.
En el caso de verificar cualquier dao, avisar inmediatamente la
transportadora, la compaa aseguradora y WEG. No avisar la
transportadora, la compaa aseguradora y WEG puede resulta
en la prdida de la garanta del producto.
No remueva la grasa de proteccin de la punta de eje, tampoco los
tapones que cierran los agujeros de la caja de conexiones, caso
existir. Estos tems de proteccin deben ser mantenidos hasta que
la instalacin completa sea concluida. Despusde la remocin de
su embalaje, una completa inspeccin visual debe ser hecha en

SHIJIAZHUANG KINGDA PUMP INDUSTRY GROUP CO., LTD


TOROMOCHO PROJECT
HARD METAL SLURRY PUMP

LONG-TERM STORAGE INSTRUCTIONS

Hard Metal Slurry Pumps

R05323-P-001A

SHIJIAZHUANG KINGDA PUMP INDUSTRY GROUP Co., Ltd


1st September, 2010

SHIJIAZHUANG KINGDA PUMP INDUSTRY GROUP CO., LTD


LONG-TERM STORAGE INSTRUCTIONS
TOROMOCHO PROJECT
R05323-P-001A, REV A

LONG-TERM STORAGE INSTRUCTIONS


The pumps are shipped fully protected for the commercial shipping and handling that is required for a
given order. Upon receipt, it is necessary that the customer, or an agent of the customer, conduct a
thorough inspection of all pumps and components for completeness of delivery and possible handling
damage. Some small spare parts may be packed separately, if you find damage or loss, please contact
with Kingda and Freight Company immediately.

All shortages should be immediately reported to Kingda.

Note: Any components damaged in shipment should be noted and a claim filed by the responsible
shipping party with the freight company.

Kinda does not warrant any pump or pump components which become damage due to a failure
which adhere to the instructions listed below.

SHIJIAZHUANG KINGDA PUMP INDUSTRY GROUP CO., LTD


LONG-TERM STORAGE INSTRUCTIONS
TOROMOCHO PROJECT
R05323-P-001A, REV A

Outdoor Storage
1. Site selection for outdoor storage of pump and pump components as following:
1.1: Level, well-drained, firm surface, clean, and dry location.
1.2: The environment for pump storage must be dry, dust-free, and well-ventilated. Avoid damage the
bearing because of vibration. The vibration of the storage place is less than 0.2mm/S.
1.3: Isolated or barricaded from possibility of physical damage from transport vehicles, earth working
equipment, and other site erected equipment.
1.4: The inlets and outlets of pumps should be plugged to prevent sundries entering pump cavity.
Accessible for periodic inspection and maintenance.
2. All the pump or pump baseplate should be supported under each corner of its base to allow it to
breathe. Supports (steel beams or wood timbers) of significant size and strength should be placed under
each corner.
All components shipped in crates and pallets must be located and supported such that air can flow under
and around the shipping container.
3. Upon receipt of the Pump and pump components, an initial inspection must be made to ensure that all
protective coatings and/or devices have not been compromised during shipping and handling.
If discrepancies are found, corrective action must be taken to ensure adequate protection of the
equipment during storage.
Particular attention must be paid to:
(a) All bright steel surfaces, journal and machined; such as shafts, end flanges.
(b) All shaft sleeve and bearing surfaces.
(c) All the roller bearing.
(d) All machined surfaces protected with paint
4. It is recommended that all electric motors be stored indoors. The motors are to be stored and protected
in accordance with the requirements of the motor manufacture. Some motors may have low voltage
internal heaters that are to be energized during storage.
If indoor store is not possible, it is necessary that these pumps and components be covered by a tarp
which is loose enough to let the component breathe. In areas of high relative humidity, it may be
necessary to use a desiccant to keep it free of moisture.
Note: WEG will provide the Motor Storage Instructions on all motors supplied by us.
Some motors may have low voltage internal heaters that are to be energized during storage.

SHIJIAZHUANG KINGDA PUMP INDUSTRY GROUP CO., LTD


LONG-TERM STORAGE INSTRUCTIONS
TOROMOCHO PROJECT
R05323-P-001A, REV A

Covered or Indoor Storage


The pumps should be covered or Indoor Storage. Covered storage will consist of any structure with a roof
to protect pumps and pump components from direct sunshine and rain. Indoor storage will consist of a
closed-in structure that will protect from sun, rain, wind and dust.
It is recommended that all electric drive motors should be stored indoors. The motors are to be stored and
protected in accordance with the requirements of the motor manufacture.
If proper indoor storage is not available, then the sensitive components must be covered with a well
drained and ventilated tarp or tent structure.

Attention during Storage


1. If the storage time is not more than 1 month, It is suggested that the pump should rotate by 1/4 turn
by manual every 1 week.
2. If the storage time is longer than 1 month, its recommended that preservative oil is painted on the
inside of the pump. The preservative oil should be replaced every 12 month. (The preservative oil film
must be cleaned before the trial run of the pump).
It is suggested that the pump should rotate by 1/4 turn by manual every 1 week.
For the pumps with packing, if the storage time is too long, replace the old packing.
3. Check all the components every 3 months; if rusted or oxidized, clean the surface and repaint the
preservative oil.

PARTICULAR ATTENTION must be paid to following:


1. Machined surface of rotating parts, as shaft, shaft sleeve, etc.
2. All the roller bearings, adequate lubricating oil should be filled in it to minimize the chance of oxidization
or rust.
3. The temperature of storage environment should not be less than 5 centigrade. It is to prevent the left
water to cracking the water jacket freezingly in the low temperature condition.
4. Measure the insulating resistance of stator with megameter periodically to check if the motor is not
affected with dampness.
5. The end of cable should be packed with adhesive butyl tape to avoid the moisture entering into the
cable.
6. To avoid the quick aging, keep the cable, winding wire and rubber parts away from the direct sunlight,
heat and hot flame.
7. The technical documents should be safely kept from moisture.

SHIJIAZHUANG KINGDA PUMP INDUSTRY GROUP CO., LTD


LONG-TERM STORAGE INSTRUCTIONS
TOROMOCHO PROJECT
R05323-P-001A, REV A

Storage/Maintenance
Period

Task

Action
Re-establish the integrity of all protective coatings and covering devices. Check

Initial receipt of pumps

Inventory

and pump components

Inspection

and

for damage to the surface finish (paint) that may allow rust or corrosion and
repaint as necessary.
-Report any shipping damages to the freight company.
-Report any shortages to Kingda.

After three (3) Months


of Storage

After six (6) Months of


Storage

Re-inspect all pump components, making sure no rust or oxidation is starting to


Inspection

form on machined surfaces. If rust or oxidation is found, the surface(s) must be


cleaned and a protective coating applied.
Re-inspect all pump components, making sure no rust or oxidation is starting to

Inspection

form on machined surfaces. If rust or oxidation is found, the surface(s) must be


cleaned and a protective coating applied.

The customer shall maintain a Periodic Inspection and Maintenance Log documenting condition and
efforts to maintain the protection of the Pump and components.

TOROMOCHO PROJECT
RECOMMENDED SPARE PARTS LIST
PO Number: R05323-P-001A

Equipment Name: Hard Metal Slurry Pumps

Date:20th, May 2011

Vendor:Shijiazhuang Kingda Pump Industry Group Co., Ltd


Vendor Contact: Ms.Wendy WANG Phone:+86 311 80908109 Fax:+86 311 80908116 Email: w_zhao72@163.com

STOCKHOLDINGS

MANUFACTURER'S DATA

Rubber+Fiber
KB04
KB04
KB04
KB04
NBR
NBR
NBR
Natural Rubber
PTFE
3Cr13
Rubber+Fiber
KB04
KB04
KB04
KB04
NBR
NBR
Natural Rubber
Natural Rubber
Natural Rubber
PTFE
4Cr13
Rubber+Fiber
KB04
KB04
KB04
KB04
NBR
NBR
NBR
NBR
Natural Rubber
NBR
2Cr13
3Cr13

245-PP-004
245-PP-005
245-PP-006
245-PP-106
M150KSH-EB/T

245-PP-008
245-PP-108
M50KSG-DB/T

260-PP-065
260-PP-065
M75KSG-EB/T

10

4000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
4000
4000
4000
4000
4000
4000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
4000
4000
4000
4000
4000
4000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
4000
4000
4000
4000
4000
4000

100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100

8
1
1
1
1
3
1
2
1
4
1
6
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
4
1
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1

14

15

64
12
12
12
12
36
8
16
8
32
8
24
6
6
6
6
12
6
4
8
4
16
4
16
6
6
6
6
6
6
4
4
8
4
4
4

N
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
N
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y
Y

64
12
12
12
12
36
8
16
8
32
8
24
6
6
6
6
12
6
4
8
4
16
4
16
6
6
6
6
6
6
4
4
8
4
4
4

16

17
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No

MSDS Applicable

13

to

12

Total Quantity
Ordered

11

18

19

20

21

Re-Order Point

8V-2500
M150KSH-F-01
M150KSH-F-05
M150KSH-F-02
M150KSH-F-06
SBB002-F109
K021-F6-L
K007-F8
K020-F6
SBB004-F111
K010-F
5V-1800
K001-DH2
K005-DH2
K002-DH2
K006-DH2
SBB002-D109
SBB002-EP
K021-C2-LP
K007-DH2
K020-C2
SBB004-D111
K010-D
8V-2500
M75KSHH-EB/T-03J
M75KSHH-EB/T-04
K002-EH3
4/3E-HH-02
SBB002-E109
SBB002-EH122
SBB002-F064
K021-EH3-L
K007-F8
K020-EH3
GRJ-100
8/6E-HH-01

Minimum

8V-2500
M150KSH-F-01
M150KSH-F-05
M150KSH-F-02
M150KSH-F-06
SBB002-F109
K021-F6-L
K007-F8
K020-F6
SBB004-F111
K010-F
5V-1800
K001-DH2
K005-DH2
K002-DH2
K006-DH2
SBB002-D109
SBB002-EP
K021-C2-LP
K007-DH2
K020-C2
SBB004-D111
K010-D
8V-2500
M75KSHH-EB/T-03J
M75KSHH-EB/T-04
K002-EH3
4/3E-HH-02
SBB002-E109
SBB002-EH122
SBB002-F064
K021-EH3-L
K007-F8
K020-EH3
GRJ-100
8/6E-HH-01

Maximum

V-Belt
Impeller
Throat Bush
Volute Liner
Frame Plate Liner Insert
O Ring
Discharge Joint Ring
Volute Liner Seal
Intake Joint Ring
Packing
Shaft Sleeve
V-Belt
Impeller
Throat Bush
Volute Liner
Frame Plate Liner Insert
O Ring
O Ring
Discharge Joint Ring
Volute Liner Seal
Intake Joint Ring
Packing
Shaft Sleeve
V-Belt
Impeller
Throat Bush
Volute Liner
Frame Plate Liner Insert
O Ring
O Ring
O Ring
Discharge Joint Ring
Volute Liner Seal
Intake Joint Ring
Mechanical Seal
Shaft Sleeve

Original
Manufacturers
Name and
Identification
Numbers
(see note 3)

Quality & Inspection


Clauses

strip
piece
piece
piece
piece
set
set
set
piece
set
piece
strip
piece
piece
piece
piece
set
set
set
set
piece
set
piece
strip
piece
piece
piece
piece
set
set
set
set
set
piece
set
piece

Unit Price
(US Dollar)

Inventory Number

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36

Mean Time
Between
Lead Time Quantity
Failure ARO (Days) Installed
MTBF
(Hours)

Storage Requirements

Parent Equipment
Number (List all
applicable tag
numbers)

Capital (Yes / No)

Material
Specification or
Certification
Reference

One Year Operation

Manufacturers
Drawing or Ref. No.

Start-Up

PARTS DESCRIPTION

EOM Part No.


(see note 2)

Commissioning

UNIT OF MEASURE

ITEM NUMBER

be

Required on Site Dates


Commissioning & Start-Up
USD . .
One Year Operation
USD ..

22

23

24

indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor

Remark:
1. Prices keep valid for 30 days since the date of issue.

Kingda-P001A Spare Parts List Unpriced.xls SPL Form

2012/2/2 10:21

Toromocho Project
Lubrication Schedule
Vendor: Shijiazhuang Kingda Pump Industry Group Co., Ltd

Date: 28th October, 2010

Equipment Name: Hard Metal Slurry Pumps

PO No.: R05323-P-001A

Equipment No.

245-PP-004/005/006/106

245-PP-008/108

260-PP-065/165

Pump Model

M150KSH-EB/T

M50KSG-DB/T

M75KSG-EB/T

Pump Speed
(RPM)

Lubricant Type

Lubricant
Manufacturer

Lubricated
Position

Filled Qty
(per each bearing)
(in g)

Replacement
Frequency
(in hours)

lithium grease #2 or #3

pump end

71

1200-630

lithium grease #2 or #3

motor end

71

1200-630

lithium grease #2 or #3

pump end

28

1300

lithium grease #2 or #3

motor end

28

1300

lithium grease #2 or #3

pump end

44

800-750

lithium grease #2 or #3

motor end

44

800-750

810~1050

1350

1200~1280

Tormocho Project
LUBRICATION SCHEDULE
PO Number: R05323-P-001
Vendor :SHIJIAZHUANG KINGDA PUMP
page 1 of 1
EQUIP NO.
245-PP-004
245-PP-005
245-PP-006
245-PP-106
245-PP-008/108

260-PP-065/165

DESCRIPTION, WHERE USED

Front bearing NU322-C3


Rear bearing 6319-C3
Front bearing NU319-C3
Rear bearing 6316-C3
Front bearing NU319-C3
Rear bearing 6316-C3

Equipment: Standard End Suction Pumps


Vendor contact Name : Wang zhao(Wendy)
E-mail :w_zhao72@163.com
LUBRICANT TYPE

POLYREX EM
(polyurea grease

POLYREX EM
(polyurea grease
POLYREX EM
(polyurea grease

QUANTITY MANUFACTURER

60g

Date : 16 11 2010
Phone:86-0311-80908102
Fax :86-0311-80908116
FREQUENCY OF LUBRICATION &
REMARKS
14875 h

MOBIL
45g
45g
34g
45g
34g

20000 h
MOBIL

MOBIL

11859 h
20000 h
11859 h
20000 h

ELECTRIC MOTOR WIRING DIAGRAM

SINGLE SPEED 380V 60HZ MOTOR:

WEG INDSTRIAS S/A

INDEX
Item No.

Description

Datasheets (Pump & Motor), Performance Curve

Installation Drawing

Assembly Drawing

Lifting Diagram

ITP

Ultrasonic Flaw Detection Specification For Shaft Parts

Welding Process Specification

Material Report For Main Parts

Ultrasonic Flaw Detection Report

10

Inspection Report For Parts

11

Inspection Record For Assembly

12

Inspection Record For Painting

13

Inspection Record For Packing

14

Hydraulic Pressure Test Report

15

Performance Test Procedure

16

Performance Test Details Sheet

17

Performance Test Report

18

Vibration Report

19

Noise Report

20

Pump IOM

21

Motor IOM

22

Long Term Storage Instructions

23

Spare Parts List for Operation and 1 Year (Un-priced)

24

Pump Lubrication Schedule

25

Motor Lubrication Schedule

26

Packing List

27

Certification of Conformance

28

Motor Wiring Diagram

CERTIFIED FOR
CONSTRUCTION
By: Wang Zhao (Wendy)
Date: 25 October 2010
Mfr:
SHIJIAZHUANGKINGDA
PUMP

Inspection & Test Plan


Toromocho Project, PO No.: R05323-P-001A
Shijiazhuang Kingda Pump Industry Group Co., Ltd
Project Doc No.: KD-ITP, Rev.01, Date: 18th October, 2010

Inspection and Test Plan


PO No.: R05323-P-001A, Equipment Name: Hard Metal Slurry Pumps
Supervision
Acceptance

Review

Executive

Contractor

Doc.
Liability

No.

1.1

Test Item

Criteria

Methods

Doc.

Doc.

Time

Management

Acceptance of Contract Documents


Signed Contract and

Check the Contract and

Requirements

Vendors Sales

Requirements

Requirements

by the Contract

Department

Dimensional

Certified Drawings and

Drawings and Document

Drawings submitted

Vendors Sales

Drawings

Documents

Inspection

by Vendor

Department

Contract Inspection

Contractor/Owner

1.2

Owner
Time

Inspection

Signature

Acceptance

Time

Inspection &

Signature

Item

Contractor/Owner

Inspection on Raw Materials and Purchased Parts


JB/T8096-1998
GB9439-1998
(ASTM A48-2003)
GB1348-1998
(ASTM A536-2003)
GB2100-2002

Material Composition

(ASTM A743/743a-1993a)
Inspection

of

raw

Analysis and Mechanical


Visual inspection, Chemical test,

Comply with the

Spectrometer, General gauge

Standards

GB/T8263-1999

2.1
materials

Contractor
After arrival at

Quality Management

Factory

Dept.

Purchase

Prosperities Report,

(ASTM A532M-99)

Product Compliance

GB699-1988

Certificate

Dept.

(ASTM A36/A36M-2005)
SBB121.1-29-1997
SBB125.1-28-1997
SBB302.1-12-2008
SBB0158-2003

2.2

Contract Technical

Visual inspection, check Product

Comply with

Requirements

Compliance Certificate

Contract technical

Bearings

After arrival at

Quality

Contractor

Factory

Management

Purchase

Product Compliance

No. 239, Tianshan Street, Shijiazhuang City, Hebei Province, China


Tel: +86 311 80908109
Fax: +86 311 80908116
Email: w_zhao72@163.com

Inspection & Test Plan


Toromocho Project, PO No.: R05323-P-001A
Shijiazhuang Kingda Pump Industry Group Co., Ltd
Project Doc No.: KD-ITP, Rev.01, Date: 18th October, 2010
requirement
Comply with
2.3

Contract Technical

Visual inspection, check Product

Requirements

Compliance Certificate

WEG Motors

Dept.

Quality

Contractor

Management

Purchase

Dept.

Dept.

Quality

Contractor

Management

Production

Dept.

Dept.

After arrival at
Contract technical

Product Compliance
Factory

requirement
3

Dept.

Inspection and Test in Pump Production Process


SBB139-2001

Material Composition

Inspection Before
3.1
Casting

Comply with the


SBB131-1998

Spectrometer

Analysis and Mechanical

Before Pouring

Standards
Prosperities Report

SBB122-2000
SBB139-2001
SBB122-2000

Spectrometer,

SBB131-1998

Carbon-Sulfur Analyzer,

Material Composition
Comply with the

3.2

Castings

Standards
GB1348-1988

Contractor
After

Quality Management

heat treatment

Dept.

Production

Analysis and Mechanical

Chemical Test, General Gauge

Prosperities Report

Dept.

(ASTM A536-2003)

3.3

Quality

Contractor

Management

Production

Dept.

Dept.

During

Quality

Contractor

Machining

Management

Production

Process

Dept.

Dept.

Quality

Contractor

Management

Production

Dept.

Dept.

Quality

Contractor

Management

Production

Dept.

Dept.

SBB131-1998

Hardness Tester,

Comply with the

Heat Treatment

After

SBB165-2009

Universal Tester

Standards

Report

heat treatment

Heat Treatment

Comply with the


SBB2105-87
Inspection in

General Tools,

Standards and

Machining Dimension

Special Tools

Drawing

Inspection Record

SBB061-2003

3.4
Machining Process

Drawing Requirements
Requirements

Impeller Static
3.5

SBB061-2003

4.1

Shafft Inspection

YB-T036.T-92

Impeller Static Blancing

Static Balance

Standard

Report

Test

Balancing Test Frame

Balancing,

3.6

Comply with the

Comply with the

Shaft Ultrasonics

Shaft Inspection

Standard

Detection Report

Test

Ultrasonic Detection

Assembly, Test, Painting and Packing

Assembly

SBB2103-2000

Comply with the

Clearance Inspection

Standards and

Record in Assembly

General Gauge

Quality

Management

Contractor

After Assembly

No. 239, Tianshan Street, Shijiazhuang City, Hebei Province, China


Tel: +86 311 80908109
Fax: +86 311 80908116
Email: w_zhao72@163.com

Dept.

Production

Inspection & Test Plan


Toromocho Project, PO No.: R05323-P-001A
Shijiazhuang Kingda Pump Industry Group Co., Ltd
Project Doc No.: KD-ITP, Rev.01, Date: 18th October, 2010
Drawing

SBB064-2004

Dept.

Requirements
Drawing Requirements
GB/T5656-94,
Hydraulic
4.2

Contractor
Visual Inspection,

Comply with the

Hydraulic Pressure Test

After Assembly,

Quality Management

Pressure gauge

standards

Report

Witness Point

Dept.

Production

SBB064-1998,
Pressure Test
(HI 1.6-2000/API610)

Dept.

Contract Technical
Requirements
GB3216-2005
(HI 1.6-2000/

Comply with the

ASME B73.1M/B73.2M)

Standards and

Pump Performance

After Assembly,

Quality

JB/T8097-1999

Contract Technical

Running Test Report

Witness Point

Dept.

GB3214-91,

Requirements

Performance
4.3

Contractor

Noise

Management
Production

Pump Test Station

Vibration

Dept.
GB10890,
GB10889
SBB064-2004
Contract Technical

Comply with the


Contractor

4.4

Requirements SBB097-2008

Visual Inspection,

Standards and

Assembly Inspection

SBB0159-1998

Coating Thickness Meter

Contract Technical

Record

Painting

Quality

Management
Production

After Painting
Dept.

Dept.
JB/T4297-1992

Requirements

Contract Technical
Comply with the
Requirements

Contractor
Standards and

4.5

Packing

SBB0157-1997

Assembly Inspection

Visual Inspection

Quality

Contract Technical

Management
Production

After Packing
Dept.

Record

SBB0167-2009

Dept.
Requirements

GB/T13384-1992
5

Relese for Shippment


Release for
Release for

5.1

Contract requirements

As per Contract Requirements

shipment from

Hold Point

shipment
Owner

No. 239, Tianshan Street, Shijiazhuang City, Hebei Province, China


Tel: +86 311 80908109
Fax: +86 311 80908116
Email: w_zhao72@163.com

ULTRASONIC FLAW DETECTION


SPECIFICATION
FOR
SHAFT PARTS

TOROMOCHO PROJECT

Supplier:

SHIJIAZHUANG KINGDA PUMP INDUSTRY GROUP CO., LTD

Reviewed And Approved:

Date:

November, 2011

SHIJIAZHUANG KINGDA PUMP INDUSTRY GROUP CO., LTD


ULTRASONIC FLAW DETECTION SPECIFICATION
Doc No.: WPS-UD-2011, Date: Nov, 2011, Rev 00

GENERAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION


FOR ULTRASONIC FLAW DETECTIOIN FOR SHAFT PARTS
1. General Provision
1.1 Application Scope
This Specification applies for the testing of internal incontinuity of forgings sourced by Kingda by using A
Type Pulse Reflection Ultrasonic Detection method.
This Specification is not applied to work piece of austenite coarse grained.
1.2 Acceptance Standard
GB/T 4162 Forged And Rolled Steel Bars - Method For Ultrasonic Testing
GB/T 7736 Ultrasonic Inspecting Method For Macro-Structure And Imperfection Of Steel
1.3 If special requirements, inspection and acceptance will be carried as per Standards in relative
agreements, drawing and process.
1.4 Requirements for Inspectors
The inspectors should have Ultrasonic Flaw Detection Technology Certification, and the Inspector who will
sign the Report must be qualified for II Grade or Above Certification.
2. Detection Equipment And Instruments
2.1 Ultrasonic Flaw Detector
The ultrasonic flaw detector should be tested for its fuction as per the methods specified in JB/T
10061-1999, and its quota should be meet following:
a). Surplus Sensitivity: N36dB
b). Vertical Linearity Tolerance: D6%
c). Horizontal Linearity Tolerance: 1%
d). Dynamic Range: 30dB.
2.2 Probe
Usually straight beam probe is selected for detection; angle beam probe is selected for assistant detection.
The operation frequency of probe must meet the requirements to penetrate and explore the work piece,
nominal frequency of 2-5MHz is used, and probe crystal diameter or side length is 10-25mm.
2.3 Coupling Medium
Coupling medium whichever can give good coupling effect and is not harmful to body and work piece
should be selected.
The same coupling medium must be used for adjustment, calibration and inspection of equipments.
NO. 239, TIANSHAN STREET, SHIJIAZHUANG CITY, HEBEI PROVINCE, CHINA

SHIJIAZHUANG KINGDA PUMP INDUSTRY GROUP CO., LTD


ULTRASONIC FLAW DETECTION SPECIFICATION
Doc No.: WPS-UD-2011, Date: Nov, 2011, Rev 00

2.4 Test Block


When test forged parts, the test block should be selected according to probe and condition of surface to be
detected, for example, CSI standard test block.
Equipment can also be adjusted according to test block as per GB/T 4162 or GB/T 7736.
3. Detection
3.1 Detection Method
Detection method is generally P-wave reflection, SH-wave reflection can be added if necessary.

A: Necessary detecting direction


B: Detecting direction which needs to be negotiated
Detection At Axial And Circumferential Direction For Shaft Parts
3.2 Detection Time
Usually the detection should be carried after entry of source parts into plant or after heat treatment.
If there any special requirements, the detection should be carried as per special time.
3.3 Detection Procedure
3.3.1 Treatment on Surface of Work Piece
Usually the roughness of surface of work piece should be R06.3m; Roughness may be enlarged for
coarse surface, but not more than 12.5m.
The flaws as mill scale, dirties, paint and pit which can influence the acoustic coupling must be removed or
machined.
3.3.2 Adjustment of Instrument
3.3.2.1 Adjustment of Scan Speed
Generally it is required that forward base of first bottom wave should be not more than 80% of width of
oscilloscope screen in order to observe the situation of other signals after first bottom wave.
3.3.2.2 Adjustment of Sustained Sensitivity
For the work piece with thickness of position tested 3N, bottom wave adjustment method can be used;
For the work piece with thickness of position tested 3N or the surface is very rough, test pad adjustment
NO. 239, TIANSHAN STREET, SHIJIAZHUANG CITY, HEBEI PROVINCE, CHINA

SHIJIAZHUANG KINGDA PUMP INDUSTRY GROUP CO., LTD


ULTRASONIC FLAW DETECTION SPECIFICATION
Doc No.: WPS-UD-2011, Date: Nov, 2011, Rev 00

method can be used.


When the surface shape and roughness of test pad is different from the work piece, coupling compensation
and attenuation compensation methods can be used.
3.3.2.3 Adjustment of Scan Sensitivity
6dB should be amplified based on the inspection sensitivity in order to easily find the defects, but estimation
on the defects should be based on the inspection sensitivity level.
3.4 Inspection Frequency
3.4.1 If no special requirement, the sample test should be made as per SBB302.1-2008.
3.4.2 If any special requirements, the test should be made as per requirements.
3.4.3 For the tested work piece, whole detecting should be made.
3.5 Scan Detection
3.5.1 Scan Type
Usually whole scan should be used.
3.5.2 Scan Speed
In order to ensure the defects can be clearly found, the scan speed should not more than 150mm/s.
3.5.3 Scan Distance
It is required that 15% overlapping should be done between two scans.
3.6 Calibration of Instruments
After detection, the instrument should be calibrated for sensitivity; if the sensitivity can not meet the
requirements, calibration should be done.
4. Estimation of Defects
Usually defects will be estimated according to the reflection and bottom reflection results, including defect
position and size, if necessary, the nature of defects can be estimated.
4.1 Estimation of Defect Position
To determine the surface position of defect according to the probe work position;
To determine he depth of defects according to that tested in oscilloscope screen.
4.2 Estimation of Defect Size
4.2.1 For flat defect of small wafer size, equivalent size of defect should be estimated according to the echo
margin shown in oscilloscope screen.
4.2.2 For flat defect of large wafer size, the length and area of defect should be estimated by 6dB or half
wave height method.
NO. 239, TIANSHAN STREET, SHIJIAZHUANG CITY, HEBEI PROVINCE, CHINA

SHIJIAZHUANG KINGDA PUMP INDUSTRY GROUP CO., LTD


ULTRASONIC FLAW DETECTION SPECIFICATION
Doc No.: WPS-UD-2011, Date: Nov, 2011, Rev 00

4.2.3 For the defect of volume type, circumferential direction detection method can be used.
5. Quality Estimation
Estimation should be made as per GB/T 4162 and GB/T 7736; if any, special requirements can be followed.
After the detection, if disputes, it can be confirmed by low-power etch test.
6. Inspection Record And Report
6.1 Inspection report include: specification, grade, heat number, standard, quality grade and quantity,
issued by who and date, etc.
6.2 Inspection record should include position of defect, size of equivalent, distance and length of defects,
and drop of bottom wave, etc.

NO. 239, TIANSHAN STREET, SHIJIAZHUANG CITY, HEBEI PROVINCE, CHINA

SHIJIAZHUANG KINGDA PUMP INDUSTRY GROUP CO., LTD


WELDING PROCESS SPECIFICATION FOR REPAIR OF CASTINGS
Doc No.: WPS-KD-2011, Date: Oct, 2011, Rev 00

Process Specification of Welding


1. Preparation Before Welding
1.1 Operator must be very well acquainted with the drawings, process specification and relative
documents.
1.2 Operator must carefully check the material grades and dimensions of parts and casting
which are going to be welded.
1.3 Calibers and scales must be marked with inspection certificate. The tools and auxiliary
devices must be reliable.
1.4 The welding machine must be in good condition, grounding and good in insulation.
1.5 Select welding materials as per specification.
1.6 Welding rods must be complete dry, if the rods are wet, make dry treatment as following
table:
Dry Methods for Welding Rod
Type of Rod

Dry Temperature ()

Dry Time (hour)

acid-type

70150

11.5

alkaline-type

250350

12

Note: usually, the acid rod may not be dried before using, the alkaline rod (including S.S. rod) must be dried
treatment before using.

2. Welding
2.1 Clear water, oil stain, rust and burrs within 20mm to 30mm at two sides of weld seam and
bevel before welding.
2.2 For the parts to be beveled, the shape and dimension of bevel should conform to GB985-88
Standard.
2.3 Select welding rod as following Specification Table:
Selection of Welding Rod
Thickness of Welding Part (mm)

Diameter of Rod (mm)

3.2

412

3.24.0

12

4.0

2.4 Welding Current Selection of Common Welding Rod as following:


Reference Current (A)
NO. 239, TIANSHAN STREET, SHIJIAZHUANG CITY, HEBEI PROVINCE, CHINA

SHIJIAZHUANG KINGDA PUMP INDUSTRY GROUP CO., LTD


WELDING PROCESS SPECIFICATION FOR REPAIR OF CASTINGS
Doc No.: WPS-KD-2011, Date: Oct, 2011, Rev 00
Rod Dia.

2.5

3.2

4.0

5.0

E4303

7090

90130

160220

220270

E4303

7090

90130

160190

180230

(mm)
Welding Grade

Note: upper limit for thick plate; the current of horizontal welding is about 10% less than downward welding.

2.5 General Principle for Welding Procedure


2.5.1 It must not produce rigid constraint force against the others of welding seam at the
beginning welding.
2.5.2 One end of each seam should be kept shrink freely at welding.
2.5.3 If the seam length is 1000mm for manual arc welding, generally continuous straight
welding method is used; back-step welding or section back-step welding may be used when
length is 1000mm.
2.6 Generating the arc: it is forbidden to generate the arc on the machined surface and locating
surface; the arc should be generated on the run-on plate and then transit to workpiece.
2.7 Arc Manipulation
2.7.1 Screw type is suitable for the first layer with any welding position and thin plate welding.
2.7.2 Wave type is suitable for the surface welding of downward welding, horizontal welding,
and overhead welding.
2.7.3 8 shape type is suitable for downward and surface welding.
2.7.4 Zigzag type is suitable for horizontal welding.
2.8 Welding: before welding, the current should be regulated on the test plate till the current is
suitable.
2.8.1 Downward welding: the welding seam is at on horizontal level. arc manipulation should be
steady and fully fill the arc crater.
2.8.2 Vertical welding: the welding seam is vertical to the level ground. When vertical welding,
short arc small current should be used, dont swing the rod bigly.
2.8.3 Overhead welding and horizontal welding: welding seam is horizontal or overhead
position. Shortest arc and smallest current should be kept to ensure fused drop transmitted to
metal.
2.9 Correction and Cleaning of Weldment
NO. 239, TIANSHAN STREET, SHIJIAZHUANG CITY, HEBEI PROVINCE, CHINA

SHIJIAZHUANG KINGDA PUMP INDUSTRY GROUP CO., LTD


WELDING PROCESS SPECIFICATION FOR REPAIR OF CASTINGS
Doc No.: WPS-KD-2011, Date: Oct, 2011, Rev 00

2.9.1 Make the correction on the deforms produced in welding with flame correction or
mechanical correction.
2.9.2 Clean spatters, slags and flashes after welding.
2.9.3 The key parts and rigid parts should be distressing tempering treatment after welding.
3. Quality Requirements
3.1 Inspect the weldments for surface appearance and quality as per drawing and specification.
3.2 Welding seam should conform to Welding Seam Quality Standard.

NO. 239, TIANSHAN STREET, SHIJIAZHUANG CITY, HEBEI PROVINCE, CHINA

SHIJIAZHUANG KINGDA PUMP INDUSTRY GROUP CO., LTD


WELDING PROCESS SPECIFICATION FOR REPAIR OF CASTINGS
Doc No.: WPS-KD-2011, Date: Oct, 2011, Rev 00

Process Specification for Weld Repair of Iron Casting


1. Permission Condition for Welding Repair
1.1 When the castings need to be welded repair, it must be approved by Quality Management
Department.
1.2 The permissive condition for the casting welded repair should conform to SBB122 <Pump
Casting Technical Conditions>, drawing and requirements in Contract.
2. Selection of Welding Method
Generally arc welding is used for casting weld repair, arc welding is divided into cold welding
and heat welding.
Application Range: Generally, welding repair will be used at non-machined position which has
low requirement for stress or strength or for defects found in and after machining or fine
machining. Because the correction of heat treatment after weld repair can not be used, in the
condition that its function (quality and precision) will not be influenced by the deformation or
stress caused by partial heating, cold arc welding may be used; when the heating material will
easily crack, heat arc welding can be used.
For iron casting, cold arc welding usually is used.
3.

Preparation before Welding

3.1 Clean up the impurities at defect of casting with shovel, chisel, grinding wheel or other
methods, make it to be V shape with 60-80 or X bevel to expose the metal, sharp angle must
be rounded. All existing web cracks were arrested by drilling 4-8mm holes at the ends of the
cracks.
3.2 Remove the oil dirty at and around the defects with solution or flame.
3.3 Brush muddy water all around defect to avoid weld drop attach the machined surface.
3.4 Use Z308 pure nickel rod (3.2, 4.2), this rod is required to be kept for 1 hour at temperature of
80-120.
3.5 Generally, preheating is not required for cold arc welding; if preheating required, written
approval must be obtained from Quality Department.
4. Welding Repair
4.1 Selection of Rod Diameter and Welding Current
Rod Diameter (mm)

Welding Current (A)

NO. 239, TIANSHAN STREET, SHIJIAZHUANG CITY, HEBEI PROVINCE, CHINA

SHIJIAZHUANG KINGDA PUMP INDUSTRY GROUP CO., LTD


WELDING PROCESS SPECIFICATION FOR REPAIR OF CASTINGS
Doc No.: WPS-KD-2011, Date: Oct, 2011, Rev 00

3.2

70-100

4.2

100-140

4.2 The seams should be successively welded layer by layer. Welding length of single layer is
10-15mm, beat the welding seam with 0.5-1.0 kg hammer to make the seam to be spot shape;
after the temperature of welded position is cooled down to 100, then proceed to welding.
When the welding repair is multi-layer, repeat the operation as single layer welding.
5. Cleaning After Welding
Trim the welding seam on the machined and nonmachined surface with grinding wheel, and
clear the weld drop on the casting and machined surface.
6. Inspection After Welding
6.1 For the requirements of relieving of stress, make inspection after the heat treatment.
6.2 Inspect the grinded effect of welded position to check if it can meet the requirements for
welding repair.
6.3 If the welding position is on non machined surface, check if the welded position is as smooth
as casting itself.
6.4 If the welding position is on the machined surface, check if the welded junction can meet
the requirements of machining.
6.5 Besides required NDT, usually visual inspection is just needed to conform if the weld repairs
meet the quality requirements, defects are left after welding.
6.6 For the casting sustaining the liquid pressure or air pressure, the air tight hydrostatic test
or gas inspection.

NO. 239, TIANSHAN STREET, SHIJIAZHUANG CITY, HEBEI PROVINCE, CHINA


Performance Test Procedure of Centrifugal Pump

1.
2.
3.
1. Preparation before Test
1.1 Define items to be tested;
1.2 Define test criteria and acceptance standard
1.3 Define test field and select test bed

1.
2.
3.
4.
2. Install Pump on Test Bed
2.1 Install pump, motor (if any, gear box), pump intake pipe and discharge pipe;
2.2 Connect pressure gauge, flow meter and electrical meters;
2.3 Connect shaft seal water, cover the motor with water-proof facilities;
2.4 Connect power supply cable with motor, make trial running, and paste
light-sensitive paper for speed.

1.
2.
3.
4.
3. Test
3.1 Start the test, check rise in bearing temperature, leakage of shaft seal, vibration,
and noise;
3.2 Record pressure of suction and discharge, flow rate, current, voltage, power,
speed, etc;
3.3 Draft performance curve;
3.4 Make judgment on the test result.


Test Details Sheet

1 / Pump Details

R05323-P-001A

P.O. No.:

260-PP-165

Equipment No.
1036143-0001-07

Kingda Contract No.

NJA066

Doc. No.

M75KSG-EB/T

Pump Model

2 /Motor Details

WEG

Make

1010904702

Serial No.
447T

Motor Model

260-PP-165-M1

Motor No.
90KW

Motor Rating

1780

Motor Speed

3 /Test Details

9:00

Pump Started

10:10

Pump Stopped
45

Bearing Temp.

2011.11.10

Test Date
19

Ambient Temp.

19

Water Temp.

4 /Performance Test Data Tolerance & Standard


/Parameter

/Flow

/Head

/Efficiency

/Standard: ANSI/HI 1.6-B

5 Mechanical Run Tolerance & Standard


5.1 /Vibration

/Standard: JB/T8097-1999
/As per Order Spec.: 85dbA/Max 85

5.2 /Noise Level


dB(A)
/Standard: JB/T8096-1998
5.3 /Rise in Temp. Acceptance
/Measured Temp.

SERIES (M/R) KSH/KSG SLURRY PUMP

INSTALLATION, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE

MANUAL

SHIJIAZHUANG KINGDA PUMP INDUSTRY GROUP CO.,LTD


2010

Series (M/R) KSH/KSG Slurry Pump


Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual
Shijiazhuang Kingda Pump Industry Group Co.,Ltd

Content

1. General Introduction....2

2. Construction.3

3. Installation..6

4. Operation..12

5. Maintenance.17

6. Possible Failures, Cause and Solutions...20

Series (M/R) KSH/KSG Slurry Pump


Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual
Shijiazhuang Kingda Pump Industry Group Co.,Ltd

1. GENERAL INTRODUCTION
Series (M/R) KSH/KSG Pump is also called High Efficiency Slurry Pump. Because these pumps
are fitted with thick wear-resistant parts and heavy frame, so they are suitable to pump the slurry
of highly abrasion, high or low content and high head. During the max permissible working
pressure range, these pumps can be operated in serial. They also can transport the corrosive
slurries.
TYPE DEMONSTRATION:

Frame Type/Lubrication Type


Pump Type
Pump Discharge Diameter. (mm)
Metal Lined/Rubber Lined
Example: M200KSH (/KSG)-FA (/B)
M/R

M for Metal Liner, R for Rubber Liner

200

Discharge Diameter is 200 mm

KSH

Kingda Heavy-duty Slurry Pump

KSG

Kingda High-head Slurry Pump

Frame Type

A/B

A for oil lubrication, B for grease lubrication

Series (M/R) KSH/KSG Slurry Pump


Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual
Shijiazhuang Kingda Pump Industry Group Co.,Ltd

2. CONSTRUCTION
2.1 Pump Head (See Figure 1 and Figure 2)
Both Series (M/R) KSH/KSG metal-lined and rubber-lined pump have construction of
double-casing. They have the replaceable wear-resistant metal liner or rubber liner (including the
impeller, liner, frame plate, etc). Pump casing and cover are made of ductile cast iron; their
construction is vertically split and connected with the bolts. The casing is connected with the
frame with the bolt. When the suction of the pump is installed horizontally, the discharge can be
orientated in any 8 positions at 45 intervals. The front and rear cover plates of impeller have the
back vanes to decrease the leakage and raise the service life of the pumps. Viewing the pump
from the drive side, it should rotate clockwise.

Figure 1 Construction Drawing of MKSH/MKSG (Metal-lined)


Discharge diameter<40mm, open type impeller; Discharge diameter>40mm, enclosed type impeller.
1

Frame

Pump Cover

Cover Plate

Impeller

Liner

Pump Casing

Frame Plate

Packing Box

Series (M/R) KSH/KSG Slurry Pump


Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual
Shijiazhuang Kingda Pump Industry Group Co.,Ltd

Figure 2 Construction Drawing of RKSH/RKSG (Rubber-lined)


Discharge diameter<40mm, open type impeller; Discharge diameter>40mm, enclosed type impeller.
1

Frame

Pump Cover

Cover Plate (R)

Impeller

Cover Liner

Pump Casing

Frame Liner

Packing Box

2.2 Shaft Seal


There three types of shaft seals, packing seal, expeller seal and mechanical seal.
(1) Packing Seal: simple construction and easy maintenance. Shaft seal water is required. For the
condition which does not need the expeller seal, the packing seal can be used.
(2) Expeller Seal: Expeller seal can be used on the single stage pump or the first stage pump in
serial when the suction positive pressure is not more than the discharge pressure by 10%. The
expeller seal does not require the shaft seal water, and the slurry will not be diluted, which can
reach good sealing effect.
(3) Mechanical Seal: Mechanical seal features for highly wear resistant and shock resistance. It
can get non-leak sealing effect under various bad conditions, and be easily installed and

Series (M/R) KSH/KSG Slurry Pump


Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual
Shijiazhuang Kingda Pump Industry Group Co.,Ltd

replaced.
2.3 Transmission Part
During the bearing assembly of (M/R) KSH/KSG Pump, the pump has large diameter, high
stiffness and short cantilever, which will not bend and vibrate under the bad working conditions.
According to the different transmitted power, heavy single-row or double-row tapered roller
bearings can be selected. These bearings can stand the max axial and radial load of the pump. Oil
lubrication is used for the bearing. Seal cover, labyrinth bush, water-proof cover and guard cover
are fitted at the both sides of the bearing body, to prevent the impurities and water from entering
into the bearing and ensure the normal and safe operation of the bearing.

Series (M/R) KSH/KSG Slurry Pump


Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual
Shijiazhuang Kingda Pump Industry Group Co.,Ltd

3. INSTALLATION
3.1 Installation of Bearing Assembly (See Figure 3 and 4)
Heat the bearing inner ring before assembly, the temperature is not allowed to be over 120 and
the inner ring must contact the shaft shoulder closely. For the double row tapered roller bearing,
the inner ring, the outer ring and position bush is a package, not allowed to exchange with the
respective parts of the like bearings. For frame A, B, C, D, E, F, G, the bearing is single row
tapered roller type; when in assembly, adjust the pad at the bearing end cover to ensure the axial
clearance. The axial clearance should be in accordance with the following table:
Frame

FG

Axial Clearance (mm)

0.05-0.15

0.1-0.2

0.15-0.25

0.18-0.28

0.4-0.6

0.5-0.6

For frame R, S, ST, T, TU, U, the bearing at the pump end is double row tapered roller type and
motor end is cylindrical roller bearing, there is no need to adjust the axial clearance for these
bearings.
Proper grease has been filled when assembling the bearing. The seal at the bearing end is
labyrinth ring or bush type; notice the relative arrangement of breach on the diametrical
direction when assembling the labyrinth ring.
Recommend using lithium base grease 2# or 3# and filled quantity as following:
Frame
B

R.

S.

T.

RS

ST

TU

Lubrication
Drive End (g)

30

50

100

200

500

1150

200

500

1150

Driven End (g)

30

50

100

200

500

1150

400

1000

2300

Series (M/R) KSH/KSG Slurry Pump


Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual
Shijiazhuang Kingda Pump Industry Group Co.,Ltd

Figure 3 Constructions Drawing of R, S, ST, TU, T, U Frame Bearing Assembly


1

Labyrinth Bush

Oil Cup

Bearing Body

End Cover

End Cover Seal Pad

Shaft

Figure 4

Bearing

Construction Drawing of A,B,C,D,E,F,G Frame Bearing Assembly

Labyrinth Bush

Oil Cup

Grease Blocker

Bearing Body

Bearing

Adjusting Pad

End Cover

Shaft

3.2 Installation of Shaft Packing Seal


Shaft packing seal assembly includes packing box, shaft sleeve, position bush, seal ring, packing,
packing pad, lantern ring, front lantern ring and packing gland. Packing seal assembly is divided
into lantern ring structure and front lantern ring structure. Front lantern ring structure is the
standard-installed type, and you can see Figure 5 (1) and Figure 5 (2) for the installation drawing.
Lantern ring structure should be used for the condition of suction, for example of installation way
7

Series (M/R) KSH/KSG Slurry Pump


Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual
Shijiazhuang Kingda Pump Industry Group Co.,Ltd

in Figure 6 (1) and (2). Take notice that the seal ring must be in the right position between shaft
sleeve and position bush, and the shaft sleeve and impeller.
Figure 5 (1) and Figure 6 (1) are the construction drawing for the pump of discharge diameter
less than 150mm;
Figure 5 (2) and Figure 6 (2) are the construction drawing for the pump of discharge diameter
more than 500mm.
Selection of the packing: when the working pressure of the pump is below 1MPa (10kgf/cm2),
asbestos fibers dip mica packing is usually used; asbestos fibers soaked PTFE packing is usually
used when the pressure is higher than 1MPa (10kgf/cm2) or pumping the corrosive slurry.

Figure 5(1) Packing Seal Construction

Figure 6(1) Packing Seal Construction

Standard Type

For Suction-Up Condition

Shaft Sleeve

Packing

Shaft Sleeve

Packing

Packing Box

Front Lantern Ring

Packing Box

Lantern Ring

Seal Ring

Locating Bush

Seal Ring

Locating Bush

Packing Pad

Series (M/R) KSH/KSG Slurry Pump


Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual
Shijiazhuang Kingda Pump Industry Group Co.,Ltd

Figure 5(2) Packing Seal Construction

Figure 6(2) Packing Seal Construction

Standard Type

For Suction-Up Condition

Shaft Sleeve

Packing

Shaft Sleeve

Packing

Packing Box

Front Lantern Ring

Packing Box

Lantern Ring

Packing Pad

3.3 Installation of Expeller Seal


Expeller seal assembly includes expeller, release cover shaft sleeve, lantern ring, packing pad,
packing, packing gland, etc. Every part must be installed at right position as in Figure 7.

Figure 7 Seal Construction of Expeller


1

Packing Gland

Release Cover

Expeller

Shaft Sleeve

Series (M/R) KSH/KSG Slurry Pump


Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual
Shijiazhuang Kingda Pump Industry Group Co.,Ltd
5

Seal Ring

Packing

Lantern Ring

Packing Pad

3.4 Installation of Mechanical Seal


Mechanical seal assembly includes Cartridge type mechanical seal, seal box, seal ring, etc.
Strictly install the mechanical seal according to the Manual. See Figure 8 for construction.

Figure 8 Construction of Mechanical Seal


1

Seal Box

Seal Ring

Mechanical Seal

3.5 Installation of Pump Head


Firstly fit the pump body on the frame, then put the shaft seal assembly into the pump body; fit
the rear guard plate and impeller with rear hanging pipe and rear set nut; fit the liner with the
hanging beam and use the bolts to press the liner against the pump body; fit the front guard the
plate into the pump cover, bolt the pump cover, front plate together with the pump body and
fasten all the bolts and nuts. For rubber liner pump, the front liner should be firstly put into the
pump cover and fasten the bolts, then assembly the pump body and pump cover; coat the soapy
water and rubber lubricant at the contact surface for the easy assembly; take notice that the seal
pads should be put at the right position and compressed; to assure the correct position and easy
assembly, the rear guard plate and rear liner hang pipe *302, rear guard plate and rear liner
position nut *302 and liner hanging beam *304 can be used. Following Figures show the
10

Series (M/R) KSH/KSG Slurry Pump


Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual
Shijiazhuang Kingda Pump Industry Group Co.,Ltd

methods.
The pump with ST, T and TU has release ring; before dismantling, the three hex bolts should be
removed and screw them into thither bolt hole on the release ring to jack the three pressure pad
on the shaft to loose the impeller.

Figure 9
1. Rear Guard Plate and Rear Liner Hang Pipe x302
2. Rear Guard Plate and Rear Liner Setting Nut x303
3. Liner Hang Beam x304

11

Series (M/R) KSH/KSG Slurry Pump


Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual
Shijiazhuang Kingda Pump Industry Group Co.,Ltd

4. OPERATION
4.1 Startup
Check the whole machine unit as following procedure before start up:
(1): The pump should be installed on the solid base to bear the whole pump weight to absorb the
vibration and fasten all the foundation bolts.
(2): The pipeline and valves should be separately supported. There is seal pad at the pump flange.
Notice that the pump metal liner may be higher than flange surface when fastening the bolts, and
the bolts should be not over-fastened to avoid damaging the seal pad.
(3): Rotate the pump shaft in accordance with the pump rotation direction, the shaft should drive
the impeller without the friction; if not, the impeller clearance should be adjusted.
(4): Check the motor rotation direction to make sure it can drive the pump rotate toward the
arrow. Reverse rotation may cause the impeller screw stripped and damage the pump, so its
forbidden.
(5): For direct coupling drive, the pump shaft and motor shaft should be strictly centered. The
pump shaft and motor shaft should be in parallel for the belt transmission and adjust the pulley
position to make it vertical to the belt. For the pulley unit of SPA Type and
and

SPB
SPC

SPA
SPB

Type, SPB Type

Type, the adjustment of the pulley should reach the requirements of 1=2 in Figure 10.

(6): A short removable pipe should be fit at the suction of the pump, its length is enough to
disassemble the pump cover, replace the wearing parts and inspect the pump. See the Outline
Dimensional Drawing for the length of this short pipe.
(7): Check shaft seal: for the pumps of expeller seal, when the oil cup is fit with the release gland,
the lubricating grease should be filled through the oil cup; and Sodium-calcium grease is

12

Series (M/R) KSH/KSG Slurry Pump


Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual
Shijiazhuang Kingda Pump Industry Group Co.,Ltd

recommended.
For the pumps of packing seal, firstly turn on the shaft sealing water system to check if the water
quantity and pressure is proper before the startup of the pump; adjust the packing gland set
screw to regulate the tension of the packing; adjust shaft seal water (that the leak quantity at the
packing gland is drop by drop); if too tight, the shaft sleeve will heat easily and power will be
consumed more; if too loose, the leak quantity will be very large. The shaft seal water pressure
usually is higher than pump discharge pressure by 3.5X10-2MPa (0.35kgf/cm2). See following
table for shaft seal water quantity:
Frame Type

E.F

R.RS

S.ST

T.TU

Shaft Seal Water Quantity (L/s)

0.15

0.25

0.35

0.55

0.70

1.2

0.70

1.2

1.6

2.1

(8) Adjustment for the Belt Pretightening Force


We recommend following method for reference:
(8.1) First calculate thee pretightening force Q:
Q=

510(2.5 C 1 ) P C 2
+ mv 2 (Newton)
C1 Z V

(8.2) Then find the e value on the curve according to the pretightening force and belt type;
e . L
(8.3) Find f through formula f=100 ;

(8.4) Find R value of respective V-belt in Table 1, and adjust the center distance of both pulleys
according to the methods in Figure 11 to reach the required pretightening force. Usually, if the
overall reduction is no more than f when loading the Newton force, it reaches the required
pretightening force Q.
In the formula:
Q: the minimum pretightening force of each belt in the static state, unit is Newton;
13

Series (M/R) KSH/KSG Slurry Pump


Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual
Shijiazhuang Kingda Pump Industry Group Co.,Ltd

f:

Overall reduction of belt, unit is mm

C1: Angle coefficient is about 0.9


C2: Operation coefficient is about 1.4
L: Center distance of pulleys
P: Motor Rated Power, KW
Z: V-Belt Quantity
V: linear velocity, m/s
m: Centrifugal force coefficient (see Figure 1)
e: Reduction e of each 100mm hang length, see Figure 11.
Table 1
Type

SPA

SPB

SPC

SPZ

R (N)

60

90

120

30

0.12

0.20

0.38

0.08

Adjust the V-belt till the final pretightening force is the minimum when the load is at max; when
several belts are used at the same time, the circumference of each belt should be basically the
same to assure the equal force.

Figure 10

14

Series (M/R) KSH/KSG Slurry Pump


Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual
Shijiazhuang Kingda Pump Industry Group Co.,Ltd

Figure 11

After adjustment of the V-belt, check if the impeller can rotate normally again; if possible, start
the pump with clear water (before it begins to pump the slurry); turn on the suction pipe valve,
start the motor, check the pressure and flow quantity at the suction and discharge, check the
leakage at the packing. If the packing heats, loose the packing gland bolts to make the leakage
bigger; adjust the leakage to the specified value till the packing run-in with the shaft.
4.2 Operation
(1): Periodically check the pressure and flow quantity of shaft seal water, and adjust the packing
gland and replace the packing during the operation to assure small quantity of clean water
passing through the shaft.

15

Series (M/R) KSH/KSG Slurry Pump


Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual
Shijiazhuang Kingda Pump Industry Group Co.,Ltd

(2): Periodically check the frame. If the bearing heats at the beginning of the operation, shut
down the pump till the bearing become cool, then run it. If the bearing heats seriously and
temperature keep rising, the frame must be disassembled and examined for the cause. Usually
the impurity contained in the lubricating oil can cause the heating, so the bearing oil should be
proper and clean, and replaced periodically.
(3): The pump performance will become poorer and the efficiency will become lower with the
larger and larger clearance between impeller and front guard plate. So adjust the impeller timely
to keep the proper clearance to make the pump run in high efficiency. When the wear situation of
the pump is too bad to meet the requirements of the system, the wear parts should be replaced.
4.3 Shutdown of Pump
Let the pump to transport the clear water for some before the shutdown to clean the slurry left
inside the pump, then stop the pump, valve, packing seal water or mechanical seal water in order.

16

Series (M/R) KSH/KSG Slurry Pump


Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual
Shijiazhuang Kingda Pump Industry Group Co.,Ltd

5. MAINTENANCE
For the safe run of pump, attention must be paid to the normal maintenance as following aspects:
5.1 Maintenance of shaft seal:
For the packing seal pump, periodically check the water pressure and water quantity of shaft
packing seal. Always keep small quantity of clear water flow along with the shaft, periodically
adjust the packing gland, check and replace the packing. The shaft seal water pressure and
quantity should in accordance with the above requirements. Periodically fill the oil into the oil cup
for the expeller seal pump to lubricate the inside packing.
5.2 Adjustment of impeller:
To assure the high-efficiency of the pump, the clearance between the impeller and the front guard
plate; the clearance between impeller and front guard plate of metal liner pump should be
0.5-1mm, the clearance between the impeller and front liner should be equal to that between
impeller and rear liner.
Before adjusting the clearance, the pump should be stopped firstly, then loose the bolts of
bearing assembly and screw the nut of adjusting bolts to make the bearing assembly move
forward, at the same time, rotate the pump as per the arrow by hands till the impeller friction
with the front guard plate; for the metal liner pump, loose the nut (which was fastened) by half
circle, then fasten the nut on the adjusting bolt to make the bearing assembly move backward,
the clearance between the impeller and front guard plate should be 0.5-1mm; for the rubber liner
pump, adjust the nut of the adjusting bolts to make the bearing assembly to move forward to
contact with the front guard sleeve, then move the bearing assembly back to contact with the
back liner, and measure the total movement distance, make the half of this distance as the

17

Series (M/R) KSH/KSG Slurry Pump


Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual
Shijiazhuang Kingda Pump Industry Group Co.,Ltd

clearance of the impeller and front liner; assure the correct clearance of impeller and front and
back liner by adjusting bearing assembly position through the adjusting bolts.
After the adjustment, check if the impeller can rotate normally before startup, if bearing
assembly compress bolts and adjusting bolts are tightened; then start the pump.
5.3 Lubricating of Bearing
Correct assembly, proper lubricating and in-time maintenance will make the service life of
bearing assembly longer. Periodically check the bearing assembly, bearing and lubricant and
interval should not be over than 12 month. Fill the lubricating grease at regular intervals in
operation, the filling interval and filling quantity are relative to the pump speed, bearing size,
continuous operation time, shutdown and startup times, environmental condition and
temperatures; excess grease will cause the heating of bearing. Refer to following table for proper
lubricating schedule:
5.4 Standby pump should be rotated by 1/4 circle by hands to make the bearing stand static load
and vibration evenly

18

Series (M/R) KSH/KSG Slurry Pump


Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual
Shijiazhuang Kingda Pump Industry Group Co.,Ltd

Lubrication Schedule (in hours)

Frame

Grease

Type

Quantity

12

18

28

44

71

Bearing Speed

200

7000

300

400

600

(rpm)

800

1000

1200

1800

2000

3000

2400

1800

1500

1000

3600

2400

1800

1600

1200

900

2500

2000

1500

1200

800

500

500

5000

3600

2200

1600

1100

800

4200

2000

1800

1200

700

400

3000

2000

1400

1000

600

3800

28000

1500

900

500

300

400

R.RS

102

S.ST

132

T.TU

304

4800

3000

1800

900

621

4000

2400

1500

500

R.RS

61

8000

4800

3500

2800

2200

Motor

S.ST

74

8000

6000

3600

2400

1600

1200

End

T.TU

133

8000

7000

4500

2500

1500

192

7000

6000

4000

2000

400

100

1500

900

Pump

End

Note: Above Schedule is only applied for the normal working condition.
During the bearing assembly, the internal plug is to fill the bearing grease, and the external oil
cup is to clean the labyrinth seal. Besides the regular filling of grease, its also to fill the grease to
the oil cup to keep the labyrinth seal clean.

19

Series (M/R) KSH/KSG Slurry Pump


Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual
Shijiazhuang Kingda Pump Industry Group Co.,Ltd

6. POSSIBLE FAILURES, CAUSE AND SOLUTIONS


Failure

Cause

Solutions

Leak at the suction pipe or packing

Block the leak

Wrong rotation direction

Change the rotation direction

Impeller is broken

Replace the new impeller

Suction pipe is blocked

Remove the block

Packing gland is to tight and packing heats

Loose the packing gland bolts

Friction inside the pump

Adjust the clearance

Bearing is broken

Replace the bearing

Transmission belt is too tight

Adjust the belt

Too large flow quantity

Adjust the pump running conditions

High rotation speed, large proportion

Adjust the rotation and proportion

Misalignment or nonparallel of motor shaft and

Adjust the motor shaft and pump shaft

h f
Excessive or too little of bearing lubricating oil

Oil

Impurities is contained in the lubricating oil

Replace the new lubricating oil

Bearing is broken

Replace the new bearing

Misalignment or nonparallel of motor shaft and

Adjust the motor shaft and pump shaft

h f
Shaft is bent

Replace a new shaft

Friction inside the pump or the imbalance of

Decrease the friction and replace a new

ll
Foreign matter inside the bearing

ll
Clean the bearing

Unreasonable assembly of bearing

Replace the bearing or reassemble the

Serious abrasion of packing

b
Replace the new packing

Serious abrasion of shaft sleeve

Replace the new shaft sleeve

Seal water is not clean

Replace the clean seal water

Bearing is broken

Change new bearing

Impeller is not in balance

Change new impeller

Air entered into suction pipe, block

Remove the air and block

Uneven flow, pump empty

Improve the feeding condition

Bad foundation

Strength the foundation

Not pump the liquid

Shaft Power is to high

Overheat of bearing

Service life of bearing is short

Serious leakage at the packing

Abnormal noise and excessive vibration


of pump

quantity

should

be

as

per

20

WEG EXPORTADORA S.A.


Av. Prefeito Waldemar Grubba, 3000
89256-900 - Jaragua do Sul - SC - BRAZIL
Phone 55 (47) 3372-4000 - Fax 55 (47) 3372-4060
http://www.weg.com.br

0280.1515/03.2006

Transforming Energy
into Solutions

INSTALLATION,
OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
FOR INDUCTION
MOTORS
Frame sizes 143/5T to 586/7

THIS MANUAL IS INTENDED TO SUPPLY IMPORTANT


TOPICS THAT MUST BE FOLLOWED DURING
TRANSPORTATION, INSTALLATION, OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE OF WEG MOTORS. THEREFORE, WE
RECOMMEND READING CAREFULLY THIS MANUAL
BEFORE INSTALLING AND OPERATING THE MOTOR.
TO ENSURE PHYSICAL INTEGRITY TO THE
OPERATION AND MATERIAL PROTECTION, ALL
INFORMATION INCLUDED IN THIS MANUAL MUST
BE STRICTLY FOLLOWED.

Purchasing date:

Suppliers name

INDEX
1.
2.
3.
4.

5.

6.
7.

8.

9.

HANDLI NG AND TRANSPORTATION


RECEIVING INSPECTION
STORAGE
INSTALLATION
4.1 - Safety
4.2 - Operating Conditions
4.3 - Foundation
4.4 - Drain Holes
4.5 - Balance
4.6 - Alignment
4.7 - Couplings
4.8 - Electrical Connection
4.9 - Starting Methods
4.10 - Protection Device
4.11 - Start-Up
MAINTENANCE
5.1 - Lubrication
5.1.1 - Machines without Grease Nipples
5.1.2 - Machines Fitted with Grease Fitting
5.1.3 - Compatibility of MOBIL Polirex EM
grease with other types of grease
5.2 - Assembly and Disassembly
SPARE PARTS
VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE MOTORS
7.1 - Standard Motors
7.2 - Inverter Duty Motors
7.3 - Bearing Insulation
ADDITIONAL INSTRUCTIONS
8.1 - Hazardous Area Motors
8.1.1 - General
8.1.2 - Installation
8.1.3 - Checking and maintenance
8.1.4 - Explosion Proof Motor Repairs
WARRANTY TERMS

Invoice/Order number:

Customers name and phone:

Failure description:

Fecha de compra:
1 - HANDLING AND TRANSPORTATION

MOTORS MUST NOT BE LIFTED BY THE SHAFT,


BUT BY THE EYEBOLTS SPECIFIC FOR SUCH
PURPOSE

Nombre del proveedor:


Lifting devices, when supplied, are designed only to support
the motor. If themotor has two lifting devices then a double chain
must be used to lift it.
Lifting and lowering must be done gently without any shocks, to
avoid bearing damaged.
Nmero de la factura o pedido:

Nombre y nmero telefnico del cliente:

DURING TRANSPORTATION, MOTORS FITTED


WITH ROLLER OR ANGULAR CONTACT
BEARINGS ARE PROTECTED AGAINST BEARING
DAMAGES WITH A SHAFT LOCKING DEVICE

THIS LOCKING DEVICE MUST BE USED ON ANY


FURTHER MOTOR TRANSPORTATION, EVEN
WHEN THIS MEANS TO UNCOUPLE THE MOTOR
FROM THE DRIVEN MACHINE

2. RECEIVING INSPECTION
When receiving the motor, check if any damage has occurred
during transportation.

Descripcin de la falla:

If anything has been noticed, notify immediately the carrier, the


insurance company and WEG.
Failure in giving notice to the carrier, to the insurance company
and to WEG may result in loosing product warranty.
Do not remove the existing protecting grease from the shaft end,
nor the stoppers or plugs that close the terminal box holes, if any.
These protection items must be kept in place until the final
installation has been concluded.
After being removed from the package, a complete visual
inspection on the motor should be made:

Check if any damage has occured during transportation.


Check nameplate data.
Rotate shaft with the hand to make sure it is running freely.
Make sure the motor was not exposed to excessive dirt and
moisture during transportation and storage.
3 - STORAGE
If motors are not immediately installed, they must be stored in
dry areas, free of dust, vibrations, gases, corrosive smokes, under
constant temperature and in normal position free from other
materials.
Motor storage temperature must remain between 41F (5C) to
140F (60C), with relative humidity not exceeding 50%.
If motors are stored for more than two years, bearings must be
replaced or the lubrication grease must be totally removed after
cleaning.
Single-phase motors when kept in stock for 2 years or more
must have their capacitors replaced (if any).
WEG recommends to rotate the shaft (by hands) at least once a
month, and to measure the insulation resistance before installing
it, if motors are stored for more than 6 months or when subject
to high humidity areas.
If motor is fitted with space heaters, it is recommended to switch
them on during storage period if the relative humidity exceeds
50%.
If motor remains in stock for a long period without having the
space heaters switched-on or when installed but not in operation,
moisture/water inside the motor may condense. On these cases,
water must be drained by removing the threaded drain plugs.
When drainage is done, switch-on the space heaters and make
sure the motor is completely dry,then reinstall the drain plugs to
ensure proper Degree of Protection (see figure 1).
The space heaters should NEVER be energized while motor is
running.

9. TERMINOS DE GARANTIA
WEG ofrece garanta contra defectos de fabricacin o de
materiales para sus productos, por un perodo de 18 meses,
contados a partir de la fecha de la emisin de la factura por
parte de fb rica o del distribuidor/revendedor, teniendo como
lmite 24 meses de la fecha de fabricacin independiente de
la fecha de instala cin del motor, siempre y cuando hayan
sido satisfechos los siguientes requisitos:
- Transporte, manoseo y almacenamiento adecuados;
- Instalacin correcta y en condiciones ambientales
especficas y sin presencia de ga ses corrosivos;
- Operacin dentro de los lmites de la capacidad del motor;
- Realizacin peridica del debido mantenimiento preventivo;
- Realizacin de reparaciones y/o modificaciones al producto
original efectuada solo por los agentes autorizados de la Red
de Asistencia Tcnica WEG;
- Entregar el producto a l proveedor en el caso de ocurrir una
falla con reclamacin de garanta en un perodo mnimo
suficiente para identificar la causa de la anomala y su
conveniente reparacin;
- Dar aviso inmediato a WEG, por parte del cliente, de los
defectos detec tados y que los mismos sean posteriormente
analizados por WEG como causados por defectos de
fabricacin.
La garant a no incluye los servicios de desmontaje d el motor
en las instalaciones del cliente, costos de transporte del
producto y gastos de traslado, alojamiento y alimentacin del
personal de Asistencia Tcnica cuand o sean solicitados por
el cliente.
Los servicios en garanta sern prestados exclusivamente en
talleres de Asistencia Tcnica Autorizada WEG o en la propia
fbrica.
Se excluyen de esta garanta los componentes cuya vida til,
en uso normal, sea inferior al perodo de garanta otorgado
por WEG las reparaciones o substituc iones de piezas o
product os, a criterio de WEG o su Asistencia Tcnica
Autorizada, no prorrogar el plazo de garanta original.
La presente garanta se limita al producto entregado, no siendo
responsable WEG por daos a personas, a terceros, a otros
equipos e instalaciones, utilidades que se dejen de obtener
o cualquier otro dao emergente o consecuente.

P Las superficies de encaje de los motores a prueba de explosin


no deben ser mecanizadas y no es permitido utilizar entre ellas
ningn tipo de vedamiento, no descrito o suministrado por el
fabricante. Los encajes deben ser solamente limpios y para evitar
corrosin o penetracin de agua, los encajes pueden ser
engrasados con una fina manta de grasa de silicona.
P Verificar si los componentes estn exentos de rebabas, golpes
y suciedad.
P Observar si las piezas estn en perfectas condiciones.
P Lubricar superficialmente las guas de las tapas con aceite
protector para facilitar el montaje.
P Utilizar solamente martillo de material blando en la colocacin
de las piezas.
P Verificar si todos los tornillos estn bien apretados.
P Utilizar sonda calibrada para verificar asiento de la caja de
conexiones (menor de 0,05mm).

8.1.4 Reparos De Motores A Prueba De Explosin


Figure 1
El reparo de repuestos, directamente involucrados en la
proteccin contra riesgo de una explosin, debe ser realizado
sin cualquier modificacin al diseo original del motor.

Insulation Resistance Checking

Despus del reparo, estos repuestos deben ser chequeados y


cuando concluido, el taller de asistencia tcnica debe hacer una
declaracin de todas las operaciones realizadas en el motor
especfico.

Disconnect motor from power supply before making any


insulation resistance measurement.
To avoid electric discharge risks, discharge the terminals right
after performing the measurement.

Para maiores informaciones, en Mxico favor comunicarse a:

Measure the insulation resistance before operating the motor


and/or when there is any sign of moisture in the winding.
The resistance measured at 77F (25C) must be:

WEG Mxico, S.A de C.V.


Carretera Jorobas-Tula Km 3.5,
Mz.5, Lote 1, entre Lote 4 y 5
Fracc. Parque Indistrial Huehuetoca,
Huehuetoca Estado de Mx., C.P 54680
Tel: (55) 5321-4243 y 61; Fax: (55) 5321-4262 y 94
e-mail: wegmex@weg.com.mx

Ri (20 x U) / (1000 + 2P) [M]


(measured with a MEGGER at 500 V d.c.)
where U = voltage (V); P = power (kW).
If the insulation resistance detected is less than 2 mega ohms, the
winding must be dried according to the following procedure:
Warm it up in an oven at a minimum temperature of 176F (80C)
increasing 41F (5C) every hour until reaching 105C (221F),
remaining under this temperature for at lea st one hour.

Check if the stator insulation resistance remains constant within


accepted values. If not, stator must be reimpregnated. If necessary,
replace bearings and seals.
Note:
1) All drains (if any) must be removed while drying.
2 - Measured the insulation resistance in ambient temperature. If
different than 25C it should be corrected using the following
formula:
R(25C) = [( K+25 ) / ( K + T a )] . R (Ta)
Where:
R(25C) insulation resistance related to 25C ambient temperature
K
constant value 234.5 for copper
Ta ambient temperature where the resistance was measured
R(Ta) resistance value measured in ambient temperature Ta

4. INSTALLATION
4.1 - Safety
All personnel involved with electrical installations, either
handling, lifting, operation, start up, maintenance or repair must
be well informed and updated concerning safety standards and
principles that govern the work and carefully follow them.
For practical reasons, it is not possible to include in this Manual
detailed informati on that covers all constructive variables, nor
covering all possible assembl y, operation or maintenance
alternatives.
For this reason, the present Manual only includes required
information that allows qualified and trained personnel to carry
out the work.
If you still have further doubts about this, specially in reference
to specific product information, WEG is willing to provide such
information via its network of authorized service agents and/or
distributors.
In order to allow WEG to provide prompt service, within technical
standards, the motor serial number that is available on the
identification nameplate should be supplied.
Use always appropriate tools for installation and removal.

I
I

LA INSTALACION DE MOTORES PARA AMBIENTES


PELIGROSOS DEBE SER EJECUTADA POR
PERSONAL ESPECIALIZADO
LA ESPECIFICACION DEL LOCAL DE
INSTALACION ES DE RESPONSABILIDAD DEL
CLIENTE, QUE TAMBIEN DETERMINARA LAS
CARACTERISTICAS AMBIENTALES

Cuando se utiliza el prensa cables en la entrada de los cables, lo


mismo debe ser apropiado para el motor y para el tipo de terminal,
el prensa cables debe ser montado, completamente apretado de
manera a adquirir la presin necesaria arriba de los anillos de
vedamiento, bien como:
Evitar la transmisin de vibraciones mecnicas para los
terminales del m otor.
Garantizar la proteccin mecnica IP para la caja de
conexiones.
8.1.3 Chequeo y Mantenimiento
El mantenimiento debe ser ejecutado por talleres tcnicos
autorizados y acreditados por WEG.
Talleres y personal si n autorizacin que realicen reparacin en
los motores para ambientes peligrosos, sern totalmente
responsables por el trabajo ejecutado y los daos ocurridos en
su servicio.
En la ejecucin del mantenimiento, instalacin y relubricacin, se
deben seguir las siguientes orientaciones:
Las conexiones deben estar correctamente cerradas para evitar
elevacin de resistencia, consecuentemente sobrecalentamiento
del contacto
Aislamiento distancia-aire y distancia-superficie entre los
conductores, requeridos por las normas, deben ser respectados
Todos tornillos utilizados en el montaje de las partes del motor
y caja de conexin, deben ser completamente apretados
Vedamientos y repuestos para entrada de los cables sern
hechos utilizando materiales suministrados por el fabricante, de
manera a garantizar el tipo de proteccin original

7.3 Aislamiento del rodamiento


Los motores Inverter Duty en las carcasas 504/5T y 586/7T* son
suministrados con sistema de puesta a tierra entre el eje y la carcasa
en el lado delantero. Tambin, bajo pedido puede ser suministrado
con rodamientos aislados.
Para otras lneas, en las carcasas 504/5T y 586/7T* cuando usados
con convertidor de frecuencia es necesario sistema de puesta a
tierra entre el eje y la carcasa o rodamientos aislados.
* Otros tamaos de carcasas, bajo consulta.
8 INSTRUCCIONES ADICIONALES

8.1 Motores Para Areas de Riesgo

8.1.1 General
Adems de las recomendaciones arriba, las siguientes tambin
deben ser observadas:
Motores para reas de riesgo son fabricados de acuerdo con
normas especficas para estos ambientes.
Motores suministrados para reas de riesgo (reas clasificadas)
deben ser instalados en rea que estn de acuerdo con las
especificadas en la tarjeta de identificacin del motor.
Notas:
Motores Divisin I son tambin adecuados para la Divisin II
Motores de una especificada clase de temperatura son tambin
adecuados para ambientes con combustible de una clase de
temperatura mayor (ejemplo, motores T4 son adecuados para
ambientes de clase T3, T2, T1).
8.1.2 Instalacin
La instalacin debe seguir procedimientos elaborados por la
legislacin local vigente.

MAKE SURE THAT ELECTRIC MOTORS ARE SWITCHED


OFF BEFORE STARTING ANY MAINTENANCE SERVICE

All rotating parts such as pulleys, couplings, outside fans, shaft,


etc. must be protected against accidental contact.
Motors must be protected against unexpected starts.
When performing any maintenance service, disconnect the motor
from the power supply. Make sure all accessories have been
switched off and disconnected.
In order to prevent from penetrating dust and/or water into the
terminal box, cable glands or threaded pipe in the lead holes
passage must be installed. They must be of equal or higher IP
rating than the motor.

LEAD CONNECTION INSULATION INSIDE THE


TERMINAL BOX MUST BE DONE WITH AN INSULATING
MATERIAL COMPATIBLE WITH MOTOR THERMAL
CLASS WHICH IS SHOWN ON THE MOTOR
NAMEPLATE

If installation and safety instructions are not followed accordingly,


warranty may be void.
4.2 - Operating Conditions
In general electric motors are designed for operation up to an
altitude of 1000m above sea level for an ambient temperature
ranging from -4F (-20C) to 104F (40C). Any variation is stated
on the nameplate.
The recommended installation distance between air inlet from
the motor and the wall should be at least of the air inlet diameter.
A person should have enough room to carry out cleaning services.
Machines that are cooled with ambient a ir, air inlet screens must
be cleaned at regular intervals so as to ensure free air circulation.
Warm air can not return to the motor.
For vertically mounted motors with air inlet on top, the air
opening must be protected by a proper cover so as to avoid
dropping of foreign materials on the motors.
Considering that direct sun heat causes increase in
temperature, externally installed motors should be always
protected against weathering.

ODP MOTORS Open motors (IP21, IP23) are machines designed


for operation in clean, dry areas, with enough air circulation for
proper cooling. These motors should never be used in areas with
flammable materials. Open motors may cause sparks and release
cast particles under any eventual insulation failure (short-circuit).
TEFC MOTORS Totally enclosed motors are machines suitable to
operate in areas with moisture, dirt and/or corrosive materials either
in enclosed or open environments.

4.3 - Foundation
Motors provided with feet must be installed on solid foundations
to avoid excessive vibrations.
All motors must be fully fixed and aligned.
The purchaser is fully responsible for the foundation.
Metal parts must be painted to avoid corrosion.
The foundation must be uniform and sufficiently strong to support
any shock. It must be designed in such a way to stop any vibration
originated from resonance.

EL NO CUMPLIMIENTO DE ESTAS
RECOMENDACIONES Y CRITERIOS CAUSA LA
PERDIDA DE GARANTIA DEL MOTOR

7.2 Motores Inverter Duty


Motores con tensiones superiores a 575V e igual o menor que
690V y alimentados por convertidor de frecuencia no necesitan
filtros caso sigan las especificaciones abajo:
Informado por el fabricante del convertidor.

COMPARE THE CURRENT, VOLTAGE, FREQUENCY,


SPEED, OUTPUT AND OTHER VALUES REQUIRED BY
THE APPLICATION WITH MOTOR NAMEPLATE
INFORMATION

Observar tensin de
alimentacin del conjunto
ventilacin forzada.

(*)

Note: Considering that rotation direction is important for correct


operation, then check it carefully before connecting motor to the
load.
4.4 - Drain Holes
Make sure drains are placed at the lower motor position when the
mounting configuration differs from that specified on the motor
purchase o rder.

4.5 Balance

WHEN SPECIAL BALANCE IS REQUIRED,


CONTACT THE FACTORY

EL NO CUMPLIMIENTO
DE ESTAS
RECOMENDACIONES Y
CRITERIOS CAUSA LA
PERDIDA DE GARANTIA
DEL MOTOR

Favor informar tambin el nmero de serie del motor de la


tarjeta de identificacin.
7 MOTORES PARA USO CON CONVERTIDOR DE FRECUENCIA

All motors are dynamically balanced at the factory with half key.
Transmission elements such as pulleys, couplings etc must be
dynamically balanced with half key before installation.

7.1 Lnea de motores Standard


Always use appropriate tools for installation and removal.
Motores con tensiones hasta 575V y accionados por
Convertidor de Frecuencia no requieren filtros cuando
adoptados los criterios a seguir:
Notas:

(*)

Informado por el fabricante del convertidor.

1) Trajeta de
identificacin
mostrando tensin
380-415V / 660-690V 50Hz y 440-460V - 60Hz
y alimentados por
convertidor en tensin
660-690V - 50Hz o 480V
- 60Hz requiere el uso
de filtros.
2) Motores en las
carcasas 504/5T y 586/
7T* cuando usados
con converti dor,
necesitan uso de
rodamientos aislados.

4.6 Alignment

ALIGN THE SHAFT ENDS AND USE FLEXIBLE


COUPLING, WHENEVER POSSIBLE

Make sure that the motor mounting devices do not allow


modifications on the alignment and further damages to the
bearings.
When assembling a half-coupling, make sure to use suitable
equipment and tools to protect the bearings.
Suitable assembly of half-coupling:
Specially in cases of direct couplings, motor shaft must be
aligned axially and radially with the driven machine shaft.
Incorrect alignment can lead to bearing damage, vibrations or
even cause shaft rupture.
Correct alignment can be ensured with the use of dial gauges,
as shown in figures 4.6.1, 4.6.2 and 4.6.3.
If considering a complete shaft turn, misalignment should not
exceed 0.05 mm.

* Otros tamaos de
carcasas, bajo consulta.

Fig. 4.6.1 - Axial reading (parallelism)

Notas:
Aunque la grasa Polyrex EM (Mobil) sea compatible con
los tipos de grasa mencionados arriba, no recomendamos la
mezcla con cualquier tipo de grasa.
Si Ud. necesita utilizar otro tipo de grasa diferente de las
recomendadas arriba, primeramente contacte con WEG.

LA UTILIZACION DE MOTORES NORMALES EN


LOCALES Y/O APLICACIONES ESPECIALES DEBE
ESTAR PRECEDIDA DE UNA CONSULTA AL
FABRICANTE DE GRASAS Y/O A WEG

Fig. 4.6.2 Radial reading (concentricity)

5.2 - Desmontaje Y Montaje

Fig. 4.6.3 Axial and radial reading combined

The axial alignment (E dimension) between half couplings


should be performed in accordance with manufacturers
recommendations.

El desmontaje y montaje del motor deber ser hecho por


personal calificado, utilizando solamente herramientas y
mtodos adecuados.
Las garras del extractor de rodamientos debern estar
aplicadas sobre la pista interna o sobre la tapa interior.
Es esencial que el montaje de los rodamientos sea ejecutado
en condiciones de rigurosa limpieza, para asegurar un buen
funcionamiento y evitar daos. En el caso de colocar
rodamientos nuevos, stos debern ser retirados de su embalaje
solamente en el momento previo de su montaje al mo tor.
Antes de instalar un rodamiento nuevo, es necesario verificar
si el alojamiento de l mismo en el eje se encuentra exento de
rebabas o seales de golpes.
Para montaje del rodamiento caliente sus partes internas con
equipamiento apropiado por induccin o utilice herramientas
apropiadas.

If required, WEG can offer its personnel duly trained as well as a


laser equipment to make motor and driven machine alignment/
leveling.

6. PARTES Y PIEZAS (REPUESTOS)

Expansion effect of the components may change the alignment/


leveling conditions during performance.

Al solicitar piezas para reposicin, es conveniente indicar la


designacin completa del motor, as como el cdigo del mismo
que aparece marcado en la tarjeta de identificacin.

AVISO:
Las tablas arriba son recomendadas especficamente para
relubricacin con grasa Polyrex EM (Mobil) y temperaturas
absolutas de operacin del rodamiento de:
70C (158F) para motores carcasas 254/6T hasta 324/6T.
85C (185F) para motores carcasas 364/5T hasta 586/7T.
Para cada 15C (59F) arriba de ese lmite, los intervalos de
lubricacin deben ser reducidos a la mitad. Los rodamientos
sellados (ZZ) son lubricados para una determinada vida til,
una vez operando bajo condiciones de temperatura de 70C
(158F).
Los periodos de relubricacin informados arriba son para
los casos de aplicacin con grasa Polyrex EM (Mobil)
Motores montados de forma vertical deben tener su intervalo
de relubricacin reducido a la mitad cuando comparados con
motores en la posicin horizontal.
Para aplicaciones con altas o bajas temperaturas, variacin
de velocidad, etc. el tipo de grasa e intervalos de relubricacin
son informados en una tarjeta de identificacin adicional fijada
al motor.

I
I

RECOMENDAMOS EL USO DE RODAMIENTOS


DE ESFERAS PARA MOTORES ACOPLADOS
DIRECTAMENTE A LA CARGA

PELIGRO:
GRASA EN EXCESO PUEDE PROVOCAR
SOBRECALENTAMIENTO DE LOS RODAMIENTOS,
RESULTANDO UN DAO TOTAL

5.1.3 Compatibilidad de la grasa Polirex EM (Mobil) con


otros tipos de grasa:
Conteniendo espesante polyurea y aceite mineral, la grasa
Polyrex EM (Mobil) es compatible con otros tipos de grasa las
cuales contengan:
Base de litio o complejo de litio o polyurea y aceite mineral
altamente refinado.
Aditivo inhibidor contra corrosin, herrumbre y aditivos
antioxidantes.

4.7 Couplings
When using pulley or belt drive (coupling), follow the
instruction given below:
Remove shaft-locking device (if any) before installing the motor.
Belts must be tighten just enough to avoid slippage when
running, according to the specifications stated on the belt
supplier recommendation.
To make the installation of the pulley on the shaft easier, it is
recommended to heat up the pulley at 176F (80C) and have
it mounted at hot, using suitable tools.
To avoi d bearing and shaft end damage, mounting and
dismounting of pulleys must be made with suitable tools.
While mounting and dismounting a pulley, never make pressure
or knocks on the bearings.
Always use flexible couplings; rigid couplings require special
bearing arrangement as well as axial and radial alignment of
the shafts.
WARNING:
EXCESSIVE BELT/CHAIN TENSION WILL DAMAGE
THE BEARINGS AND LEAD TO A PROBABLE
SHAFT RUPTURE
The couplings used must be suitable to withstand radial and
axial vibrations during operation. Special care must be taken to
avoid that the allowable load and speed limits given in the catalog
are not exceeded.
4.8 Electrical Connection
Make sure the motor is connected to the correct power supply.
The cable gauges and the protection devices must be designed
based on motor rated current.

~
WARNING

The capacitor on single-phase motors can


retain a charge which appears across the
motor terminals, even when the motor has
reached standstill condition. So, avoid
touching them at such condition

A WRONG CONNECTION CAN


BURN OUT THE MOTOR.

Voltage and connection are indicated on the motor nameplate.


The acceptable voltage variation is 10%;
the acceptable frequency variation is +3% and -5% and the
total acceptable variation for voltage and frequency is 10%.
Note: For rated voltage range (Tru Metric Line), the acceptable
variation is 5% according to IEC 60034-1.
4.9 - Starting Methods
The motor is rather started through direct starting. In case this
is not possible, use compatible start methods to the motor load
and voltage.
When applying reduced voltage-starting method, remember
that the starting torque will also reduce.
P 3 leads single voltage and 9 leads dual voltage motors can be
started as follows:
- Full Voltage Direct online
- Auto-Transformer starting
- Electronic Soft-Starting
- VFD Starting subject to verification and application analisys.
- Series - Parallel starting (only for 9 leads)
P 6 leads single and dual voltage motors and 12 leads dual
voltage motors can be connected as follows:
- Full Voltage Direct online

La frecuencia adecuada para realizar las inspecciones depender


del tipo de motor y de las condiciones de aplicacin.

I
INTERVALOS DE RELUBRICACION GRASA POLIREX EM (MOBIL)

~
WARNING

Voltage may be connected at motor standstill


inside the terminal box for heating elements
or direct winding heating

PARA LUBRICACION, USE EXCLUSIVAMENTE


PISTOLA ENGRASADORA MANUAL

NO REUTILIZAR PIEZAS DAADAS O CON DESG ASTE.


SUBSTITUIR POR NUEVAS, ORIGINALES DE FABRICA

La frecuencia adecuada para realizar las inspecciones


depender del tipo de motor y de las condiciones de
aplicacin.
5.1 Lubricacin
PROCEDER DE ACUERDO C ON LOS INTERVALOS
DE REENGRASE RECOMENDADOS. ESTO ES VITAL
PARA LA OPERACION DEL MOTOR

5.1.1 - Motores sin grasera


Los motores hasta la carcasa 215T normalmente no llevan grasera.
En estos casos el reengrase deber ser efectuado conforme al
plan de mantenimiento preventivo existente, teniendo en cuenta
los siguientes aspectos:
P
P
P
P
P

Desarmar cuidadosamente los motores.


Retirar toda la grasa.
Lavar los rodamientos con querosina o gasolina.
Secar los rodamientos
Reengrasar el rodamiento inmediatamente.

5.1.2 - Motores con grasera


Se recomienda efectuar el reengrase durante el funcionamiento
del motor, de modo que permita la renovacin de la grasa en el
alojamiento del rodamiento. Si esto no fuera posible debido a la
presencia de piezas giratorias cerca de la entrada de grasa (poleas,
acoplamientos, etc.) que puedan poner en riesgo la integridad
fsica del operador, se procede de la siguiente manera:
P Limpiar las proximidades del agujero de la grasera.
P Inyectar aproximadamente la mitad de la cantidad total de
grasa estimada y poner en marcha el motor durante 1 minuto
aproximadamente en rotacin nominal. Desconectar nuevamente
el motor y colocar la grasa restante.
P La inyeccin de toda la grasa con el motor parado puede
llevar a la penetracin de parte del lubricante al interior del motor,
a travs del agujero de paso de eje en las tapas de rodamientos
interiores.

- WYE/DELTA starting
- Auto-Transformer starting
- Electronic Soft-Starting
- VFD Starting subject to verification and application analisys.
- Series - Parallel starting (only for 12 leads)
Rotation direction is clockwise when motor is viewed from
Drive Endshields side and if the phases are connected
according to sequence L1, L2, L3. This sequence and power
system must be positive.
To change the rotation direction, reverse two of the connecting
leads.
Note: For single-phase motors connections, please check the
motor nameplate.

THE CONNECTION TO THE POWER SUPPLY


MUST BE DONE BY QUALIFIED PERSONNEL AND
WITH FULL ATTENTION TO ASSURE SAFE AND
PERMANENT CONNECTION. AFTER
CONNECTING THE MOTOR, CHECK FOR ANY
STRANGE BODY INSIDE THE TERMINAL BOX. THE
CABLE INLETS NOT IN USE MUST BE CLOSED

Make sure to use correct cable gauge, based on the rated


current stamped on the motor nameplate.

BEFORE ENERGIZING THE TERMINALS, CHECK IF


THE GROUNDING IS MADE ACCORDING TO THE
APPLICABLE STANDARDS. THIS IS ESSENTIAL TO
AVOID ACCIDENTS

4.10 Protection Device


When the motor is supplied with protective or monitor
temperature device such as thermostats, thermistors, thermal
protector etc, connect their terminals to the corresponding
devices on the control panel. If this procedure is not followed
accordingly,warranty will be void.
Do not change protection devices settings as they may not
operate.

4.11 Puesta en Marcha (Start-Up)

L1 L2 L3

P1 P2

I
L1 L2 L3

P1 P2

3x

3x

RELEASE DEVICE

LA CUA DEBE ESTAR COMPLETAMENTE


ASEGURADA O POR EL CONTRARIO RETIRADA
ANTES DE PONER EN MARCHA EL MOTOR

a) El motor debe arrancar y funcionar de manera suave. En el


caso de que esto no ocurra, desconecte el motor y verifique
nuevamente el sistema de montaje y de conexiones antes de
nueva puesta en marcha.

THERMISTORS LEADS

b) En el caso de vibraciones excesivas, verifique se los


tornillos de fijacin estn sueltos o se la vibracin es originada
por mquinas adyacentes. Se debe hacer una verificacin
peridica de la vibracin.

4.11 - Start-Up

IF THE MOTOR IS RUN BARE SHAFT, THE KEY MUST


BE FASTENED OR REMOVED BEFORE STARTING

a) The motor must start and opera te smoothly. In case this


does not occur, turn it off and check all connections and the
mounting before starting it again.
b) In case there is excessive vibration, check if the fixing screws
are correctly fastened.
Check also if the vibration comes from a neighbor machine.
Periodical vibration check must be done.
c) Run the motor under rated load for a short period of time
and compare if the running current is in accordance to the
nameplate current.
5 . MAINTENANCE
Any service on electric machines should only be carried out
when it is completely stopped and all phases disconnected
from the power supply.

WARNING:
SAFETY CHECK LIST

c) Mantener el motor en marcha bajo carga nominal durante


un pequeo periodo de tiempo y comparar la corriente de
operacin con la corriente informada en la tarjeta de
identificacin.
5 - MANTENIMIENTO
Cualquier servicio realizado en mquinas elctricas solamente
debe ser hecho cuando las mismas estn completamente
paradas y todas las fases desconectadas de la red de
transmisin.

PELIGRO:
CONTROL DE SEGURIDAD (CHECK LIST).

Inspeccin General
Inspeccionar el motor peridicamente.
Mantener limpio el motor y asegurar libre flujo de aire.
Verifique los vedamientos (sellos) y efecte la sustitucin
en caso que sea necesario.
Verifique el ajuste de las conexiones del motor as como
los tornillos de sustentacin.
Verifique el estado de los rodamientos siempre
observando: aparicin de fuertes ruidos, vibraciones,
temperatura excesiva y condiciones de la grasa.
Cuando se detecte un cambio en las condiciones de trabajo
normales del motor, analice el motor y reemplace las piezas
requeridas.

LA CONEXION A LA RED DE ALIMENTACION


ELECTRICA DEBE SER EFECTUADA POR PERSONAL
CALIFICADO CON MUCHA ATENCION PARA
ASEGURAR UN CONTACTO SEGURO Y
PERMANENTE. DESPUES DE HABER CONECTADO
EL MOTOR, VERIFIQUE QUE NINGUN CUERPO
EXTRAO PERMANEZCA EN EL INTERIOR DE LA
CAJA DE CONEXIONES. TODA ENTRADA DE CABLES
A LA CAJA QUE NO ESTE SIENDO UTILIZADA, DEBE
SER CERRADA

Asegrese de utilizar el dimetro correcto para el cable de


alimentacin, tomando como base la corriente nominal
indicada en la tarjeta de identificacin del motor.

ANTES DE CONECTAR EL MOTOR, VERIFIQUE


QUE LA PUESTA A TIERRA FUE REALIZADA DE
ACUERDO CON LAS NORMAS VIGENTES. ESTE
DETALLE ES FUNDAMENTAL PARA EVITAR
ACCIDENTES

4.10 Dispositivos de proteccin


Cuando el motor es suministrado con dispositivos de proteccin
o monitoreo de temperatura, tales como, termostatos, termistores,
protectores trmicos, etc., conecte sus terminales a los dispositivos
correspondientes en el panel de control. Caso este procedimiento
no sea seguido correctamente, puede invalidar la garanta.
No altere el reglaje de los dispositivos de proteccin, porque los
mismos pueden se tornar inoperantes.
Diagrama del Dispositivo de Proteccin

L1 L2 L3

P1 P2
L1

3x

L2

P1 P2

L3

3x
CABLES DE
LOS TERMISTORES

DISPOSITIVODE
PROTECCIN

General Inspection
Check motor perio dically.
Keep motor clean and ensure free air flow.
Check seals and replace them, if required.
Check connections as well as supporting screws.
Check bearing condition and pay attention to: Any excessive
noise, vibration, bearing temperature and grease condition.
When a change, under normal conditions is detected, check
the motor and replace required parts.

DO NOT REUSE DAMAGED OR WORN PARTS.


REPLACE THEM BY NEW ONES SUPPLIED BY THE
FACTORY

Periodical inspection depends on motor type and on


application conditions.
5.1 Lubrication

FOLLOW REGREASING INTERVALS. THIS IS


FUNDAMENTAL FOR PROPER MOTOR OPERATION

5.1.1 - Machines withou t Grease Nipples


Motors up to frame size 215T are normally fitted without grease
fittings. In these cases the regreasing shall be done during
preventive maintenance service paying attention to the following
aspects:
Take motor apart carefully.
Take all the grease out.
Wash the bearing with kerosene or diesel.
Dry the bearings
Regrease the bearing immediately.
5.1.2 - Motors Fitted with Grease Fitting
It is strongly recommended to grease the machine while running.
This allows the grease renewal in the bearing housing. When
this is not possible due to rotating parts by the grease device
(pulleys, bushing, etc) that offer some risk to physical integrity
of the operator, proceed as follows:
Clean the area near the grease nipple.
Put approximately half of the total grease and run the motor for
1 minute at full speed.

Then turn off the motor and pump in the rest of the grease.
The injection of all the grease with the motor in standstill can
make the grease penetrate into the motor, through the bearing
housing inner seal.
Inspections intervals depend on motor type and on application
conditions.

USE ONLY MANUAL GREASE GUN FOR


LUBRICATION

La tensin y forma de conexin estn indicadas en la tarjeta de


identificacin del motor.
La variacin aceptable de tensin es de 10%,
La variacin aceptable en la frecuencia es de +3 y 5% y la variacin
total aceptable de la tensin y frecuencia es de 10%.
Nota: Para rango de tensin nominal (Lnea Tru Metric), la variacin
aceptable es 5% de acuerdo con la IEC60034-1.
4.9 - Sistema de arranque

RECOMMENDED RELUBRICATION INTERVALS POLYREX EM GREASE


MOBIL)
(

Es preferible que el motor arranque en forma directa. En el caso


de que esto no sea posible, utilizar mtodos de arranque
alternativos que sean compatibles con la carga y tensin del motor.
Cuando aplicar el sistema de arranque con tensin reducida,
acuerde que el par de arranque tambin reducir.
Los motores 3 cables tensin nica y 9 cables doble tensin
pueden ser arrancados como sigue:
- Arranque directo a plena tensin
- Arranque con auto transformador
- Arrancador Suave (Soft-Starter)
- Arranque con Convertidor de frecuencia bajo verificacin y
anlisis de aplicacin.
- Arranque Serie-Paralelo (solamente para 9 cables)
Los motores 6 cables tensin nica y doble y 12 cables doble
tensin pueden ser conectados como sigue:
- Arranque directo a plena tensin
- Arranque estrella-triangulo
- Arranque con auto transformador
- Arrancador Suave (Soft-Starter)
- Arranque con Convertidor de frecuencia bajo verificacin y
anlisis de aplicacin.
- Arranque Serie- Paralelo (solamente para 12 cables)
El sentido de giro es el horario, mirando el motor desde el extremo
del eje y conectando las fases en la secuencia L1, L2 y L3. Esta
secuencia y la alimentacin deben ser positivas.
Para cambiar el sentido de giro, invertir dos de los cables de
alimentacin.
Nota: Para motores con conexin monofsica, favor verificar la
tarjeta de i dentificacin del motor.

requieren rodamientos especiales, bien como alineacin axial


y radial de los ejes.
ATENCION:
UNA EXCESIVA TENSIN EN LAS CORREAS
DAAR LOS RODAMIENTOS Y HASTA PUEDE
PROVOCAR LA RUPTURA DEL EJE.
Los acoplamientos utilizados deben soportar vibraciones
radiales y axiales durante la operacin. Deben ser tomados
cuidados especiales para evitar que no sean excedidas las
cargas permitidas y limites de velocidad de catlogo.
4.8 Conexin elctrica
Se debe asegurar que el motor sea conectado correctamente
en la red de transmisin.
Los dimetros de los cables y los dispositivos de proteccin
deben ser diseados de acuerdo con la corriente nominal
del motor.

~
PELIGRO

~
PELIGRO

Con el motor parado, puede existir energa


elctrica en el interior de la caja de
conexiones, para las resistencias de
calentamiento o inclusive para el bobinado.

Los capacitores de los motores monofsicos


pueden retener energa elctrica, mismo con
el motor parado. no tocar los capacitores y los
terminales del motor sin verificar que no exista
tensin en los mismos.

TODA CONEXION EFECTUADA DE FORMA


INCORRECTA PUEDE QUEMAR EL MOTOR

Note:
The table above is specifically intended for relubrification with
MOBIL Polyrex EM grease and bearing absolute operating
temperature of:
70C (158F) for 254/6T to 324/6T frame size motors
85C (185F) for 364/5T to 586/7T frame size motors
For every 15C (59F) above these limits, relubrification intervals
must be reduced by half. Shielded bearing (ZZ) are lubricated
for bearing life as lo ng are they operate under conditions and
temperature of 70C (158F).
Relubrication periods given above are for those cases
applying MOBIL Polyrex EM grease.
When motors are used on the vertical position, their
relubrication interval is reduced by half if compared to horizontal
position motors.
On applications with high or low temperatures, speed variation
etc., the type of grease and relubrication intervals is given on an
additional nameplate attached to the motor.

I
I

WE RECOMMENDED TO USE BALL


BEARINGS FOR MOTORS DIRECTLY
COUPLED TO THE LOAD

WARNING:
EXCESS OF GREASE CAN CAUSE BEARING
OVERHEATING RESULTING IN COMPLETE DAMAGE.

5.1.3 - Co mpatibility of MOBIL Polirex EM grease with other


types of grease
Containing polyurea thickener and mineral oil, the MOBIL Polyrex
EM grease is compatible with other types of grease that contain:
Lithium base or complex of lithium or polyurea and highly
refined mineral oil.
Inhibitor additive against corrosion, rust and anti-oxidant
additive.
Note:
Although MOBIL Polyrex EM is compatible with the types of
grease given above, we do not recommend mixing it with any
other types of grease.
If you intend to use a type of grease different than those

recommended above, first contact WEG.

BEFORE USING STANDARD MOTORS IN SPECIFIC


AREAS OR ON SPECIAL APPLICATIONS, FIRST
CONTACT THE GREASE MANUFACTURER OR WEG

5.2 - Assembly and Disassembly


Disassembly and assembly must be done by qualified personnel
using only suitable tools and appropriate methods.
The bearing extractor grips must be applied over the side face
of the inner ring to be disassembled or over an adjacent part.
It is essential to assemble bearings under clean conditions to
ensure good operation and to avoid damages. New bearings
shall only be taken out from their packages when assembling
them.
Before installing a new bearing it is required to check the shaft
fitting for any sharp edge or strike signals.
For bearing assembly warm their inner parts with suitable
equipment inductive process or use suitable tools.
6. SPARE PARTS
When ordering spare parts, please specify the full type designation
and product code as stated on the motor nameplate. Please also
inform the motor serial number stated on the nameplate.
7 - VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE MOTORS

7.1 - Standard Motors Line


Motors with voltages up to 575V do not require filters if follow
the criteria bellow:

Fig. 4.6.3 Lectura Axial y Radial combinado

La alineacin axial (dimensin E) entre mitad de acoplamientos


deben ser ejecutados de acuerdo con las especificaciones del
fabricante.
Bajo consulta, WEG puede ofrecer su personal entrenado y
tambin equipamiento lser para hacer la alineacin/nivelacin
del motor y de la mquina accionada.
La expansin de los componentes puede cambiar las condiciones
de alineacin/nivelacin durante el desempeo.
4.7 Acoplamientos
Cuando se utilice un acoplamiento por medio de correas y
poleas, se debe seguir las informaciones abajo:
- Remover el dispositivo de bloqueo del eje (caso existir) antes
de instalar el motor.
- Las correas deben ser estiradas apenas lo suficiente como
para evitar deslizamiento en el funcionamiento, de acuerdo con
las recomendaciones del fabricante de las correas.
- Para facilitar la instalacin de la polea en el eje, se recomienda
calentar la polea hasta 176F (80C) y montar an caliente,
utilizando herramientas apropiadas.
- Para evitar daos en los rodamientos y punta del eje, el
montaje y desmontaje de las poleas debe s er hecho con
herramientas apropiadas.
- Mientras el montaje y desmontaje de una polea, nunca haga
presin o golpes en los rodamientos.
- Siempre utilice acoplamientos flexibles, acoplamientos rgidos

Fig. 4.6.1 Lect ura Axial (en paralelo)

Fig. 4.6.2 Lect ura radial (concentricidad)

* Other frame sizes, under request.

Note:
1) Motors with nameplate showing voltage 380-415V / 660-690V - 50Hz and 440-480V 60Hz, and fed by VFD on voltage 660-690V - 50Hz or 480V - 60Hz require filters.
2) Motors in frame sizes 504/5T and 586/7T* when uded with VFDs, require insulated
bearings.

Montaje correcto del acoplamiento:


Especialmente en los casos donde se utiliza acoplamiento directo,
el eje debe ser alineado axialmente y radialmente con el eje de la
mquina accionada.
Una alineacin incorrecta puede daar el rodamiento, vibraciones
y hasta provocar ruptura del eje.
Una alineacin correcta puede ser asegurada con el uso de
calibradores, de acuerdo con las figuras 4.6.1, 4.6.2 y 4.6.3.
Considerando un giro completo del eje, la desalineacin no debe
exceder 0.05mm.

IF SUCH RECOMMENDATIONS AND CRITERIA


ARE NOT FOLLOWED ACCORDINGLY, MOTOR
WARRANTY WILL BE VOID

7.2 - Inverter Duty Motors Line


Motors with voltages above 575V and equal or below 690V and fed
by VFD do not require filters when following the criteria below:

La base debe ser uniforme y lo suficientemente robusta para


soportar fuertes choques. Debe ser diseada de manera que
impida las vibraciones originadas por resonancias.
Nota: Considerando que el sentido de rotacin es importante
para un funcionamiento correcto, verificar el sentido de rotacin
antes de acoplar la carga al motor.
4.4 - Agujeros de drenaje
Asegrese que los agujeros de drenaje del motor se siten en
su parte inferior, cuando la forma de montaje del motor difiera
de la especificada en la compra del mismo.
4.5 Balanceo

P Check power supply voltage of the forced cooling set.

BALANCEOS ESPECIALES DEBEN SER


SOLICITADOS PREVIAMENTE A LA
FABRICA

Los motores WEG son balanceados dinmicamente en la planta


con Media Cua
Los elementos de transmisin, tales como, poleas,
acoplamientos, etc., deben ser balanceados dinmicamente con
media cua antes de ser instalados.
Utilice siempre herramientas apropiadas tanto en la instalacin
como en el desacople de los motores.
4.6 Alineacin

ALINEAR LAS PUNTAS DEL EJE, Y UTILICE


SIEMPRE QUE FUERA POSIBLE
ACOPLAMIENTOS FLEXIBLES

Cercirese de que los dispositivos de montaje del motor no


permitan alteraciones en la alineacin y otros daos en los
rodamientos.
Cuando se proceda el montaje del acoplamiento deben ser
usados los medios adecuados y las herramientas necesarias
para no daar los rodamientos.

la entrada de aire. Una persona debe tener espacio suficiente


para mantener servicios de limpieza.
Mquinas que son enfriadas a travs del aire ambiente, deben
limpiar las entradas de aire en intervalos regulares para asegurar
la libre circulacin de aire.
Aire caliente no puede retornar al mo tor.
Para motores montados en la vertical con las entradas de aire
al topo, las entradas de aire deben ser protegidas con
sombrerete para evitar la cada de cuerpos extraos en el motor.
- Considerando que el calor directo del sol causa aumento
de temperatura, los motores instalados externamente deben
siempre ser protegidos contra la intemperie.

COMPARE LOS VALORES DE CORRIENTE,


TENSION, FRECUENCIA, VELOCIDAD, POTENCIA
Y OTROS VALORES EXIGIDOS POR LA
APLICACION, CON LOS DATOS CONTENIDOS EN
LA TARJETA DE IDENTIFICACION

Motores ODP Motores abiertos (IP21, IP23, etc.):


Son motores para uso en locales limpios, secos, con
circulacin de aire suficiente para su refrigeracin. Este tipo
de motor no debe ser utilizado en la presencia de materiales
inflamables o combustibles. Motores abiertos pueden emitir
llama/chispa o metal fundido en una eventual falla del
aislamiento (cortocircuito).
Motore s TCVE (Total mente Cerrado Ventilacin
Externa): Son motores aptos a trabajar en reas con
humedad polvo y materiales corrosivos, en ambientes cerrados
y tambin abiertos.
4.3 - Cimentacin del motor
Los motores con pies (patas) debern ser instalados sobre
apoyos rgidos para evitar excesivas vibraciones.
Todos los motores deben se r apropiadamente fijados y
alineados.
El cliente es totalmente responsable de estos apoyos.
Las partes metlicas debern estar pintadas para evitar la
corrosin.

IF SUCH RECOMMENDATIONS AND CRITERIA


ARE NOT FOLLOWED ACCORDINGLY, MOTOR
WARRANTY WILL BE VOID

7.3 Bearing insulation


Inverter Duty Motors line in frame sizes 504/5T and 586/7T* are
supplied with ground system between the shaft and frame on
Drive Endshield. Also, on request can be supplied with insulated
bearings.
For other lines, in frame sizes 504/5T and 586/7T* when used
with VFDs it is required ground system between the shaft and
frame or insulated bearings.
(*) Other frame sizes, under request.
8 - ADDITIONAL INSTRUCTIONS
8.1 - Hazardous Area Motors
8.1.1 General
Besides the recommendations given above, these
recommendations must be also followed.
Motors for hazardous area are manufactured according to
specific Standards for such environments.
Motors supplied for hazardous area (classified areas) must be
installed in areas that comply with those specified on the motor
nameplate.
Notes:
- Motors of Division I are also suitable for Division II.
- Motors of a given class of temperature are suitable also for
combustible environments of a greater class of temperature
(example, T4 motors are suitable for environments of class T3,
T2, T1).
8.1.2 Installation
A complete installation must follow procedures given by local
legislation in effect.

THE INSTALLATION OF HAZARDOUS AREA


MOTORS MUST BE CARRIED OUT BY SKILLED
PEOPLE

THE SPECIFICATION OF THE MOTOR


INSTALLATION SITE IS FOR CUSTOMERS
RESPONSIBILITY, WHO WILL ALSO DETERMINE
THE ENVIRONMENT CHARACTERISTICS

When cable entrance is made by a cable gland, this must be


suitable to the unit and to the type of cable; the cable gland has
to be assembled, completely screwed in order to get the necessary
pressure on the sealing rings, so as to:
- Avoid transmission of mechanical vibrations to the motor
terminals.
- Guarantee mechanical protection IP to the terminal box.
8.1.3 Checking and Maintenance
Maintenance must be carried out by repair shops authorized
and accredited by WEG.
Repair shops and people without WEGs authorization who will
perform any service on hazardous area motors will be fully
responsible for such service as well as for any consequential
damage.
When performing maintenance, installation or relubrication,
follow these instructions:
Electric connections must be correctly locked to avoid
resistance-increases, with consequent contact overheating.
Insulation air-distance and surface-distance between
conductors, required by the Standards, must be respected.
All screws, used to assemble parts motor and terminal box,
must be completely screwed.
Seals and components replacement for cable entrance would
be made using spare parts, supplied from the manufacturer,in
order to guarantee the original type of protection.
Explosion Proof motors joint surfaces have not to be machined
and it is not allowed to insert, between them, any kind of seals,
not foreseen or suppli ed by the manufacturer. Joint surfaces
have just to be cleaned and, in order to avoid corrosion or water

Utilice siempre herramientas apropiadas para la instalacin y


desmontaje.

VERIFIQUE QUE LOS MOTORES ELECTRICOS


ESTEN DESCONECTADOS ANTES DE INICIAR
CUALQUIER TRABAJO DE MANTENIMIENTO

Todas las partes girantes, tales como poleas, acoplamientos,


ventiladores externos, eje, etc., deben estar protegidos contra
toques accidentales.
Los motores deben estar protegidos contra arranques
accidentales.
Al realizar servicios de mantenimiento en el motor, desconecte
la red de alimentacin. Verifique si todos los accesorios fueron
desconectados de la red de alimentacin y desligados.
Para impedir la penetracin de polvo o agua en el interior de
la caja de conexin, es necesario instalar prensa cables o
electroductores roscados en las salidas de los cables. Los
mismos deben tener grado IP igual o mayor que el m otor.

EL AISLAMIENTO DE LOS CABLES, ADENTRO DE


LA CAJA DE CONEXIONES DEL MOTOR, DEBEN
SER HECHOS CON MATERIALES COMPATIBLES
CON LA CLASE TERMICA DEL MOTOR QUE ESTA
MOSTRADA EN LA TARJETA DE IDENTIFICACION

Se las instrucciones de instalacin y seguridad no son seguidas


correctamente, se puede perder la garanta.
4.2 - Condiciones de Operacin
Los motores elctricos, en general, son diseados para
instalacin y operacin a una altitud hasta 1000m sobre el nivel
del mar con temperaturas ambientes de -20C (-4F) a 40C
(104F).
Variaciones respecto a los valores mencionados deben estar
indicadas en la tarjeta de identificacin.
La distancia de instalacin recomendada entre las entradas de
aire del motor y la pared no debe ser inferior del dimetro de

del estator bobinado. Caso necesario, cambiar los rodamientos


y retenedores.
Nota:
1) Los agujeros de drenaje (cuando existan) deben ser retirados
durante el secado.
2) La resistencia de aislamiento debe ser medida en temperatura
ambiente. Caso sea diferente de 25C debe ser corregida utilizando
la siguiente formula:
R(25C) = [( K+25 ) / ( K + T a )] . R (Ta)
Donde:
R(25C) resistencia del aislamiento relativa a 25C temperatura
ambiente
K
valor constante 234.5 para el cobre
Ta temperatura ambiente donde la resistencia fue medida
R(Ta) valor de la resistencia medida en temperatura ambiente Ta
4. INSTALACION
4.1 - Seguridad
Los profesionales que trabajan en instalaciones elctricas, sea
en el manejo, montaje, operacin, puesta en marcha o en el
mantenimiento, debern estar permanentemente informados y
actualizados sobre las normas y requisitos vigentes en materia
de seguridad y cuidadosamente ponerlas en prctica.
Por motivos prcticos, no es posible incluir en este Manual
informacin detallada de todas las variables constructivas,
tampoco todas las posibilidades de montaje, operacin o
alternativas de mantenimiento.
Debido a esto, este Manual solamente incluye la informacin
requerida que recomienda que estos servicios sean efectuados
solamente por personal calificado y entrenado.
Caso Ud. aun tenga alguna duda a este respecto, especialmente
respecto a informacin especifica del producto, WEG
suministrar esta informacin a travs de su red de servicio
autorizado y/o distribuidores.
Para permitir que WEG tenga un pronto servicio, dentro de las
normas tcnicas, el nmero de serie del motor que se encuentra
en la tarjeta de identificacin debe ser informado.

penetration; they can beoiled by means of a thin coat of silicon


grease.
Check if all components are free of edges, knocks or dirt.
Make sure all parts are in perfect conditions.
Lubricate the surfaces of the endshield fittings with protective
oil to make the assembly easier.
Use only rubber hammer to fit the parts.
Check the correct bolts fastening.
Use clearance calibrator f or correct connection terminal box
fitting (less than 0.05mm).
8.1.4 Explosion Proof Motor Repairs
Repair of parts, directly involved in the protection against risk of
an explosion, must be done without any modification to the
original motor design.
After the repair, these parts must be submitted to a check and
when concluded, the repair shop must issue a statement, about
all operations performed on a specific mo tor.

9. WARRANTY TERMS
WEG warrants its products against defect s in workmanship
and materials for eighteen (18) months from the invoice date
issued by the factory, authorized distributor or agent limited to
twenty four (24) months from manufacturing date independent
of installation date as long as the following items are fulfilled
accordingly:
- Proper transportation, handling and storage;
- Correct installation based on the specified ambient
environmental conditions;
- Operation under motor capacity limits;
- Observation of the periodical maintenance services;
- Repair and/or replacement effected only by personnel duly
authorized in writing by WEG;
- The failed product be available t o the supplier and/or repair
shop for a required period to detect the cause of the failure
and corresponding repair;
- Immediate notice by the purchaser about failures occurred
and that these are accepted by WEG as manufacturing defects.
This warranty does not include disassembly services at the
purchaser facilities, transportation costs with product, tickets,
accommodation and meals for technical personnel when
requested by t he customer.
The warranty service will be only carried out at WEG Authorized
Repair Shops or at WEGs facilities.
Components whose useful life, under normal use, is shorter
than the warranty period are not covered by these warranty
terms.
The repair and/or replacement of parts or components, when
affected b y WEG and/or any WEG Authorized Repair Shop, will
not give warranty extension.
This constitutes WEGs only warranty in connection with this
sale and the company will have no obligation or liability
whatsoever to people, third parties, other equipment or
installations, including without limitation, any claims for
consequential damage s or labor costs.

Las resistencias de calentamiento nunca deben ser energizadas


mientras el motor este operando.

Posicin del Dreno

Figura 1

Dreno

Medicin de la resistencia del aislamiento


Desconectar el motor de la red de energa antes de hacer
cualquier medicin de la resistencia del aislamiento.
Para evitar riesgo de descarga elctrica, descargue los
terminales despus de la medicin.
Mida la resistencia del aislamiento antes de poner el motor en
servicio y/o cuando haya indicios de humedad en el bobinado.
La resistencia, medida a 25C (77F), debe ser:
Ri (20 x U) / (1000 + 2P) [M]
(Medido con MEGGER a 500 V c.c.);
Donde U = tensin (V); P = potencia (kW).
Si la resistencia del aislamiento medida es inferior a 2 M, el
bobinado deber ser secado de acuerdo con lo que sigue:
Calentar el estator bobi nado en un horno partiendo de una
temperatura de 80C (176F) y elevando 5C (41F) por hora
hasta llegar a los 105C (221F); esta ltima temperatura debe
permanecer durante un perodo mnimo de una hora.
Medir se la resistencia del aislamiento del bobinado permanece
constante y con valores dentro de los mnimos recomendados;
caso contrario, se deber proceder a una nueva impregnacin

Verifique si ocurrieron daos durante el transporte.


Verifique los datos de la tarjeta de identificacin.
Gire el eje con la mano para verificar si est girando libremente.
Asegurar que el motor no tenga sido expuesto a polvo o
humedad durante el transporte a almacenamiento.
3. ALMACENAMIENTO

Transformando Energa
en Soluciones

Si los motores no fueran inmediatamente instalados, deben ser


almacenados en un local seco, libre de polvo, vibraciones, gases
y vapores corrosivos; dotado de temperatura uniforme,
colocndolos en posicin normal y sin apoyar sobre ellos otros
objetos.
La temperatura de almacenaje de los motores debe quedar entre
41F (5C) y 140F (60C), con humedad relativa no excediendo
a 50%.
En el caso de motores con ms de dos aos de almacenaje, se
debe proceder al cambio de rodamientos o a la substitucin
total de la grasa lubricante despus de la limpieza de los mismos.
En los motores monofsicos almacenados durante dos aos o
ms, se debe adems cambiar los capacitores (cuando existan).
WEG recomienda girar el eje del motor (manualmente) al menos
una vez al mes y medir la resistencia del aislamiento antes de
instalarlo, en caso de motores almacenados ms de 6 meses o
cuando estn sometidos a ambientes con alta humedad.
Caso el motor dispone de resistencias de calentamiento, estas
debern ser conectadas durante el periodo de almacenaje caso
la humedad relativa exceder 50%.
Caso el motor permanecer almacenado por un largo periodo
sin tener las resistencias de calentamiento conectadas o cuando
estn instaladas pero no en operacin, humedad/agua en la
parta interna del motor pueden condensar.En estos casos, la
agua debe ser drenada removiendo los drenos (tapones)
roscados. Despus del drenaje hecho, conecte las resistencias
de calentamiento y asegure que el motor este completamente
seco, entonces reinstale los tapones (drenos) para asegurar el
grado de proteccin correcto. (Vea figura 1).

MANUAL DE INSTALACION,
OPERACION Y
MANTENIMIENTO PARA
MOTORES DE INDUCCION
Carcasas 143/5t hasta 586/7

LA INTENCION DE ESTE MANUAL ES PROVEER


INFORMACIONES IMPORTANTES QUE DEBEN SER
SEGUIDAS DURANTE TRANSPORTE, INSTALACION,
OPERACION Y MANTENIMIENTO DE LOS MOTORES
WEG. ENTONCES, RECOMENDAMOS LEER
ATENTAMENTE ESTE MANUAL ANTES DE LA
INSTALACION Y OPERACION DEL MOTOR.
PARA ASEGURAR INTEGRIDAD FISICA DE LA
OPERACION Y PROTECCION MATERIAL, TODA LA
INFORMACION INCLUIDA EN ESTE MANUAL DEBERA
SER EXTREMAMENTE SEGUIDA
INDICE

1.
2.
3.
4.

MANEJO Y TRANSPORTE
VERIFICACION EN LA RECEPCION
ALMACENAMIENTO
INSTALACION
4.1 - Seguridad
4.2 - Condiciones de operacin
4.3 - Fundaciones del motor
4.4 - Agujeros de Drenaje
4.5 - Balanceo
4.6 - Alineacin
4.7 - Acoplamientos
4.8 - Conexin elctrica
4.9 - Mtodos de arranque
4.10 - Dispositivo de proteccin
4.11 - Puesta en Marcha
5. MANTENIMIENTO
5.1 - Lubricacin
5.1.1 - Motores sin grasera
5.1.2 - Motores con grasera
5.1.3 - Compatibilidad de la grasa MOBIL Polirex EM
con otros tipos de grasa
5.2 - DESM ONTAJE Y MONTAJE
6. PARTES Y PIEZAS - REPUESTOS
7. MOTORES PARA USO CON CONVERTIDOR DE
FRECUENCIA
7.1 - Motores Standard
7.2 - Motores Inverter Duty
7.3 - Aislamiento de rodamientos
8. INFORMACIONES ADICIONALES
8.1 - Motores para reas de Riesgo
8.1.1 - General
8.1.2 - Instalacin
8.1.3 - Chequeo y Mantenimiento
8.1.4 - Reparos en Motores a Prueba de Explosin
9. TERMINOS DE GARANTIA

1 MANEJO Y TRANSPORTE

LOS MOTORES NO DEBEN SER IZADOS POR EL


EJE, UTILIZE LOS CANCAMOS DE SUSPENSION,
ESPECIFICOS PARA ESTE PROPOSITO

Equipamientos de alzamiento, cuando suministrados, son


proyectados solamente para la sustentacin del motor.
Si el motor por su diseo constructivo tiene dos cncamos de
suspensin, use dispositivos que permitan el izamiento por
ambos elementos al mismo tiempo.
El izamiento as como el descenso del motor deben ser realizados
en forma suave, sin golpes, caso contrario los rodamientos
pueden sufrir daos.

LOS MOTORES CON RODAMIENTOS DE RODILLOS O


DE CONTACTO ANGULAR ESTAN PROTEGIDOS,
DURANTE EL TRANSPORTE, CONTRA DAOS POR
MEDIO DE UN DISPOSITIVO DE BLOQUEO DEL EJE

LOS DISPOSITIVOS DE BLOQUEO DEBEN SER


UTILIZADOS SIEMPRE QUE SE TRANSPORTE
EL MOTOR, AUNQUE ESTO IMPLIQUE
TENERLO QUE DESACOPLAR NUEVAMENTE
DE LA MAQUINA ACCIONADA
2. VERIFICACION EN LA RECEPCION

En la recepcin del motor, verifique si ocurrieron daos durante


el transporte.
En el caso de verificar cualquier dao, avisar inmediatamente la
transportadora, la compaa aseguradora y WEG. No avisar la
transportadora, la compaa aseguradora y WEG puede resulta
en la prdida de la garanta del producto.
No remueva la grasa de proteccin de la punta de eje, tampoco los
tapones que cierran los agujeros de la caja de conexiones, caso
existir. Estos tems de proteccin deben ser mantenidos hasta que
la instalacin completa sea concluida. Despusde la remocin de
su embalaje, una completa inspeccin visual debe ser hecha en

SHIJIAZHUANG KINGDA PUMP INDUSTRY GROUP CO., LTD


TOROMOCHO PROJECT
HARD METAL SLURRY PUMP

LONG-TERM STORAGE INSTRUCTIONS

Hard Metal Slurry Pumps

R05323-P-001A

SHIJIAZHUANG KINGDA PUMP INDUSTRY GROUP Co., Ltd


1st September, 2010

SHIJIAZHUANG KINGDA PUMP INDUSTRY GROUP CO., LTD


LONG-TERM STORAGE INSTRUCTIONS
TOROMOCHO PROJECT
R05323-P-001A, REV A

LONG-TERM STORAGE INSTRUCTIONS


The pumps are shipped fully protected for the commercial shipping and handling that is required for a
given order. Upon receipt, it is necessary that the customer, or an agent of the customer, conduct a
thorough inspection of all pumps and components for completeness of delivery and possible handling
damage. Some small spare parts may be packed separately, if you find damage or loss, please contact
with Kingda and Freight Company immediately.

All shortages should be immediately reported to Kingda.

Note: Any components damaged in shipment should be noted and a claim filed by the responsible
shipping party with the freight company.

Kinda does not warrant any pump or pump components which become damage due to a failure
which adhere to the instructions listed below.

SHIJIAZHUANG KINGDA PUMP INDUSTRY GROUP CO., LTD


LONG-TERM STORAGE INSTRUCTIONS
TOROMOCHO PROJECT
R05323-P-001A, REV A

Outdoor Storage
1. Site selection for outdoor storage of pump and pump components as following:
1.1: Level, well-drained, firm surface, clean, and dry location.
1.2: The environment for pump storage must be dry, dust-free, and well-ventilated. Avoid damage the
bearing because of vibration. The vibration of the storage place is less than 0.2mm/S.
1.3: Isolated or barricaded from possibility of physical damage from transport vehicles, earth working
equipment, and other site erected equipment.
1.4: The inlets and outlets of pumps should be plugged to prevent sundries entering pump cavity.
Accessible for periodic inspection and maintenance.
2. All the pump or pump baseplate should be supported under each corner of its base to allow it to
breathe. Supports (steel beams or wood timbers) of significant size and strength should be placed under
each corner.
All components shipped in crates and pallets must be located and supported such that air can flow under
and around the shipping container.
3. Upon receipt of the Pump and pump components, an initial inspection must be made to ensure that all
protective coatings and/or devices have not been compromised during shipping and handling.
If discrepancies are found, corrective action must be taken to ensure adequate protection of the
equipment during storage.
Particular attention must be paid to:
(a) All bright steel surfaces, journal and machined; such as shafts, end flanges.
(b) All shaft sleeve and bearing surfaces.
(c) All the roller bearing.
(d) All machined surfaces protected with paint
4. It is recommended that all electric motors be stored indoors. The motors are to be stored and protected
in accordance with the requirements of the motor manufacture. Some motors may have low voltage
internal heaters that are to be energized during storage.
If indoor store is not possible, it is necessary that these pumps and components be covered by a tarp
which is loose enough to let the component breathe. In areas of high relative humidity, it may be
necessary to use a desiccant to keep it free of moisture.
Note: WEG will provide the Motor Storage Instructions on all motors supplied by us.
Some motors may have low voltage internal heaters that are to be energized during storage.

SHIJIAZHUANG KINGDA PUMP INDUSTRY GROUP CO., LTD


LONG-TERM STORAGE INSTRUCTIONS
TOROMOCHO PROJECT
R05323-P-001A, REV A

Covered or Indoor Storage


The pumps should be covered or Indoor Storage. Covered storage will consist of any structure with a roof
to protect pumps and pump components from direct sunshine and rain. Indoor storage will consist of a
closed-in structure that will protect from sun, rain, wind and dust.
It is recommended that all electric drive motors should be stored indoors. The motors are to be stored and
protected in accordance with the requirements of the motor manufacture.
If proper indoor storage is not available, then the sensitive components must be covered with a well
drained and ventilated tarp or tent structure.

Attention during Storage


1. If the storage time is not more than 1 month, It is suggested that the pump should rotate by 1/4 turn
by manual every 1 week.
2. If the storage time is longer than 1 month, its recommended that preservative oil is painted on the
inside of the pump. The preservative oil should be replaced every 12 month. (The preservative oil film
must be cleaned before the trial run of the pump).
It is suggested that the pump should rotate by 1/4 turn by manual every 1 week.
For the pumps with packing, if the storage time is too long, replace the old packing.
3. Check all the components every 3 months; if rusted or oxidized, clean the surface and repaint the
preservative oil.

PARTICULAR ATTENTION must be paid to following:


1. Machined surface of rotating parts, as shaft, shaft sleeve, etc.
2. All the roller bearings, adequate lubricating oil should be filled in it to minimize the chance of oxidization
or rust.
3. The temperature of storage environment should not be less than 5 centigrade. It is to prevent the left
water to cracking the water jacket freezingly in the low temperature condition.
4. Measure the insulating resistance of stator with megameter periodically to check if the motor is not
affected with dampness.
5. The end of cable should be packed with adhesive butyl tape to avoid the moisture entering into the
cable.
6. To avoid the quick aging, keep the cable, winding wire and rubber parts away from the direct sunlight,
heat and hot flame.
7. The technical documents should be safely kept from moisture.

SHIJIAZHUANG KINGDA PUMP INDUSTRY GROUP CO., LTD


LONG-TERM STORAGE INSTRUCTIONS
TOROMOCHO PROJECT
R05323-P-001A, REV A

Storage/Maintenance
Period

Task

Action
Re-establish the integrity of all protective coatings and covering devices. Check

Initial receipt of pumps

Inventory

and pump components

Inspection

and

for damage to the surface finish (paint) that may allow rust or corrosion and
repaint as necessary.
-Report any shipping damages to the freight company.
-Report any shortages to Kingda.

After three (3) Months


of Storage

After six (6) Months of


Storage

Re-inspect all pump components, making sure no rust or oxidation is starting to


Inspection

form on machined surfaces. If rust or oxidation is found, the surface(s) must be


cleaned and a protective coating applied.
Re-inspect all pump components, making sure no rust or oxidation is starting to

Inspection

form on machined surfaces. If rust or oxidation is found, the surface(s) must be


cleaned and a protective coating applied.

The customer shall maintain a Periodic Inspection and Maintenance Log documenting condition and
efforts to maintain the protection of the Pump and components.

TOROMOCHO PROJECT
RECOMMENDED SPARE PARTS LIST
PO Number: R05323-P-001A

Equipment Name: Hard Metal Slurry Pumps

Date:20th, May 2011

Vendor:Shijiazhuang Kingda Pump Industry Group Co., Ltd


Vendor Contact: Ms.Wendy WANG Phone:+86 311 80908109 Fax:+86 311 80908116 Email: w_zhao72@163.com

STOCKHOLDINGS

MANUFACTURER'S DATA

Rubber+Fiber
KB04
KB04
KB04
KB04
NBR
NBR
NBR
Natural Rubber
PTFE
3Cr13
Rubber+Fiber
KB04
KB04
KB04
KB04
NBR
NBR
Natural Rubber
Natural Rubber
Natural Rubber
PTFE
4Cr13
Rubber+Fiber
KB04
KB04
KB04
KB04
NBR
NBR
NBR
NBR
Natural Rubber
NBR
2Cr13
3Cr13

245-PP-004
245-PP-005
245-PP-006
245-PP-106
M150KSH-EB/T

245-PP-008
245-PP-108
M50KSG-DB/T

260-PP-065
260-PP-065
M75KSG-EB/T

10

4000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
4000
4000
4000
4000
4000
4000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
4000
4000
4000
4000
4000
4000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
4000
4000
4000
4000
4000
4000

100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100

8
1
1
1
1
3
1
2
1
4
1
6
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
4
1
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1

14

15

64
12
12
12
12
36
8
16
8
32
8
24
6
6
6
6
12
6
4
8
4
16
4
16
6
6
6
6
6
6
4
4
8
4
4
4

N
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
N
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y
Y

64
12
12
12
12
36
8
16
8
32
8
24
6
6
6
6
12
6
4
8
4
16
4
16
6
6
6
6
6
6
4
4
8
4
4
4

16

17
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No

MSDS Applicable

13

to

12

Total Quantity
Ordered

11

18

19

20

21

Re-Order Point

8V-2500
M150KSH-F-01
M150KSH-F-05
M150KSH-F-02
M150KSH-F-06
SBB002-F109
K021-F6-L
K007-F8
K020-F6
SBB004-F111
K010-F
5V-1800
K001-DH2
K005-DH2
K002-DH2
K006-DH2
SBB002-D109
SBB002-EP
K021-C2-LP
K007-DH2
K020-C2
SBB004-D111
K010-D
8V-2500
M75KSHH-EB/T-03J
M75KSHH-EB/T-04
K002-EH3
4/3E-HH-02
SBB002-E109
SBB002-EH122
SBB002-F064
K021-EH3-L
K007-F8
K020-EH3
GRJ-100
8/6E-HH-01

Minimum

8V-2500
M150KSH-F-01
M150KSH-F-05
M150KSH-F-02
M150KSH-F-06
SBB002-F109
K021-F6-L
K007-F8
K020-F6
SBB004-F111
K010-F
5V-1800
K001-DH2
K005-DH2
K002-DH2
K006-DH2
SBB002-D109
SBB002-EP
K021-C2-LP
K007-DH2
K020-C2
SBB004-D111
K010-D
8V-2500
M75KSHH-EB/T-03J
M75KSHH-EB/T-04
K002-EH3
4/3E-HH-02
SBB002-E109
SBB002-EH122
SBB002-F064
K021-EH3-L
K007-F8
K020-EH3
GRJ-100
8/6E-HH-01

Maximum

V-Belt
Impeller
Throat Bush
Volute Liner
Frame Plate Liner Insert
O Ring
Discharge Joint Ring
Volute Liner Seal
Intake Joint Ring
Packing
Shaft Sleeve
V-Belt
Impeller
Throat Bush
Volute Liner
Frame Plate Liner Insert
O Ring
O Ring
Discharge Joint Ring
Volute Liner Seal
Intake Joint Ring
Packing
Shaft Sleeve
V-Belt
Impeller
Throat Bush
Volute Liner
Frame Plate Liner Insert
O Ring
O Ring
O Ring
Discharge Joint Ring
Volute Liner Seal
Intake Joint Ring
Mechanical Seal
Shaft Sleeve

Original
Manufacturers
Name and
Identification
Numbers
(see note 3)

Quality & Inspection


Clauses

strip
piece
piece
piece
piece
set
set
set
piece
set
piece
strip
piece
piece
piece
piece
set
set
set
set
piece
set
piece
strip
piece
piece
piece
piece
set
set
set
set
set
piece
set
piece

Unit Price
(US Dollar)

Inventory Number

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36

Mean Time
Between
Lead Time Quantity
Failure ARO (Days) Installed
MTBF
(Hours)

Storage Requirements

Parent Equipment
Number (List all
applicable tag
numbers)

Capital (Yes / No)

Material
Specification or
Certification
Reference

One Year Operation

Manufacturers
Drawing or Ref. No.

Start-Up

PARTS DESCRIPTION

EOM Part No.


(see note 2)

Commissioning

UNIT OF MEASURE

ITEM NUMBER

be

Required on Site Dates


Commissioning & Start-Up
USD . .
One Year Operation
USD ..

22

23

24

indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor

Remark:
1. Prices keep valid for 30 days since the date of issue.

Kingda-P001A Spare Parts List Unpriced.xls SPL Form

2012/2/2 10:21

Toromocho Project
Lubrication Schedule
Vendor: Shijiazhuang Kingda Pump Industry Group Co., Ltd

Date: 28th October, 2010

Equipment Name: Hard Metal Slurry Pumps

PO No.: R05323-P-001A

Equipment No.

245-PP-004/005/006/106

245-PP-008/108

260-PP-065/165

Pump Model

M150KSH-EB/T

M50KSG-DB/T

M75KSG-EB/T

Pump Speed
(RPM)

Lubricant Type

Lubricant
Manufacturer

Lubricated
Position

Filled Qty
(per each bearing)
(in g)

Replacement
Frequency
(in hours)

lithium grease #2 or #3

pump end

71

1200-630

lithium grease #2 or #3

motor end

71

1200-630

lithium grease #2 or #3

pump end

28

1300

lithium grease #2 or #3

motor end

28

1300

lithium grease #2 or #3

pump end

44

800-750

lithium grease #2 or #3

motor end

44

800-750

810~1050

1350

1200~1280

Tormocho Project
LUBRICATION SCHEDULE
PO Number: R05323-P-001
Vendor :SHIJIAZHUANG KINGDA PUMP
page 1 of 1
EQUIP NO.
245-PP-004
245-PP-005
245-PP-006
245-PP-106
245-PP-008/108

260-PP-065/165

DESCRIPTION, WHERE USED

Front bearing NU322-C3


Rear bearing 6319-C3
Front bearing NU319-C3
Rear bearing 6316-C3
Front bearing NU319-C3
Rear bearing 6316-C3

Equipment: Standard End Suction Pumps


Vendor contact Name : Wang zhao(Wendy)
E-mail :w_zhao72@163.com
LUBRICANT TYPE

POLYREX EM
(polyurea grease

POLYREX EM
(polyurea grease
POLYREX EM
(polyurea grease

QUANTITY MANUFACTURER

60g

Date : 16 11 2010
Phone:86-0311-80908102
Fax :86-0311-80908116
FREQUENCY OF LUBRICATION &
REMARKS
14875 h

MOBIL
45g
45g
34g
45g
34g

20000 h
MOBIL

MOBIL

11859 h
20000 h
11859 h
20000 h

ELECTRIC MOTOR WIRING DIAGRAM

SINGLE SPEED 380V 60HZ MOTOR:

WEG INDSTRIAS S/A

Das könnte Ihnen auch gefallen